Home

Carlson Agstar 2013

1. Select Coordinate File I Check Total Station Turn Angle Total Station Turn Angle Tolerance seconds Stakeout Distance Tolerance MW o o o GPS Number of Reads for Final Average Cancel Total Station Scale Settings These settings apply only to total stations The Project Scale Factor is multiplied by the measured distance from the total station when calculating the foresight point coordinates A typical project scale factor for working in state plane coordinates is slightly less than one Factors greater than 2 0 or less than 0 5 are not allowed The Project Scale Factor can be entered directly or choose the Calculate button The Calculate function takes a state plane coordinate and calculates the project scale factor as the state plane grid factor minus the elevation factor Grid Factor elevation earth radius The state plane coordinate 1s specified by a point number from the current coordinate file The Calculate State Plane Scale Factor At Each Setup option will calculate the scale factor for each shot as the combined grid and elevation factors see above equation The scale factor is calculated at both the occupied and Chapter 7 Survey Commands 116 foresight points and then averaged To use this option you must be working in state plane coordinates and set the state plane zone in this dialog The Correct For Earth Curvature option adjusts the horizontal distance and vertical differece to the
2. Assign Descriptions to Points X Highest Point Number gt 2079 Range of Points 2 13 85 150 Description to Assign topo Cancel Map Points from 2nd File This routine adds point to the current CRD file from points stored in a second CRD file The points to copy are specified by numbers one at a time Destination Point Number 55 This is the point number to create in the current CRD file Source Point Number 25 This is the point number to copy from the second CRD file Point Northing Easting Elevation 25 52 516 13 328 0 000 Destination Point Number Press Enter to end Point Protect Toggle Toggles point protection on and off Pull Down Menu Location Tools Keyboard Command CFU Prerequisite None Create Design Surface Points This command creates points on the design surface grid The points are drawn in the drawing and stored in the current coordinate file At the first prompt you can pick inside a design subdivision to process or choose to process the entire field These design points can be used for stakeout or reporting Prompts Pick inside subdivision area to select or press lt Enter gt to select entire field pick point Highest Point Number 3949 Starting Point Number lt 3950 gt press Enter Pull Down Menu Location Tools gt Points Prerequisite A design field Chapter 9 Tools Commands 217 Keyboard Command autopnt_agstar Edit Point Attributes This command will edit the attri
3. El Cancel Help d Prompts Chapter 3 Edit Commands 48 1 Select polyline to edit pick a 2D or 3D polyline After you pick a polyline the vertices are marked with a temporary X symbol 2 Pick point on polyline to edit pick the vertex to edit 3 Dialog box is shown 4 Select polyline vertex to edit press enter to quit or select another polyline Menu Location Edit Polyline Utilities gt Prerequisite A polyline Keyboard Command EDITPL Open Polylines This command allows you to open a selection set of closed polylines Menu Location Edit Polyline Utilities gt Prerequisite Closed polyline s Keyboard Command OPENPL Remove Polyline Arcs This command allows you to replace arc segments in polylines with chords Removing arcs is a prerequisite to some commands that don t handle arcs such as Break by Closed Polyline and Make 3D Grid file This command can add many vertices to the polyline Prompts 1 Select polylines to remove arcs from Select objects pick polylines 2 Offset cutoff lt 0 5 gt Press Enter This specifies the maximum distance that any point on the arc will be allowed to shift Menu Location Edit Polyline Utilities gt Prerequisite A polyline Keyboard Command RMARC Remove Polyline Segment This command allows you to remove a specified segment from a polyline A polyline segment is the section between two vertices of the polyline There are two options for removing the se
4. E apj alale 075 Rotation Axis x E N Chapter 4 View Commands 55 Ignore Zero Elv This option excludes entities on zero elevation from the display e Vert Scale Controls the vertical exaggeration of the 3D display e Light Position This control represents the position of the sun in the sky looking from above The position of the sun in the center of the control means the sun is in a zenith and a position near the edge of the circle means the sun is near the horizon To move the sun simply drag it to new location or click there Dynamic Zoom Mode Allows you to zoom in and out by holding the left mouse button down and moving the mouse up and down e Zoom In This option incrementally zooms in to the view e Zoom Out This option incrementally zooms out to the view e Pan Mode Allows you to pan the display Shade Model This option allows you to shade the surfaces of your view The color of the shade depends on the lighting of the surface which you adjust using the Light Position control in the middle of the controls window See Light Position below Export to BMP This option creates a BMP bitmap file from your current view e Rotation Mode Allows you to rotate the view in the X or Y axis while the cursor is in the middle of the display Rotates on the Z axis when the cursor is near any edge of the display The cursor will indicate the axis e Plan View This option restores the
5. East North Elevation Desc East North Elevation Desc C 7 D45 Format C 8 Geodimeter Format C 9 Leica GSI Format C 10 Maptech Format 11 Zeiss Text Format 12 User Defined Format Type of Delimiter Selection method f Comma C Space fy E C Selection Set Number of Decimal Places 0 00000 Wild Card Descriptions Match a Range of Points to Write Cancel Help User Define Export Format X m Specify Sequence Number For Fields Point Number h y Northing 2 Easting la y Elevation sl Description ls E to ox Pull Down Menu Location Tools gt Points Prerequisite A Coordinate File CRD Keyboard Command writept Chapter 9 Tools Commands 211 Set Coordinate File This command allows the user to set the name of the current coordinate file This file is used by different commands that compute store and recall the coordinates The file has an extension of CRD and by default is stored in the configured data subdirectory When prompted for the name if you type in a path name the file will be stored in the specified path If you don t specify a path then the default path that is configured in the Configure Survey command will be used The Existing button is the default and can be selected by pressing Enter note the thicker highlighting around the button or select either button by clicking on it with your pointing device The underlined characters
6. IV Windows standard accelerator keys Bunning object snap IV Shortcut menus in drawing area C Keyboard entry Right click Customization Keyboard entry except scripts r DesignCenter Object Sorting Methods When Insert Units are not defined assume Object selection Source content units Object snap Feet y Tl Redraws Target drawing units J Regens ffa M Plotting IV PostScript output r Hyperlink m Associative Dimensioning IV Display hyperlink cursor and shortcut menu z EA JV Make new dimensions associative Y Display hyperlink tooltip ES a Lineweight Settings OK Cancel Apply E Under the User Preferences Tab you control options that optimize the way you work in Carlson Survey 1 Under Windows Standard Behavior you specify whether Windows behavior is applied when working in AgStar e Windows Standard Accelerator Keys Follows Windows standards in interpreting keyboard accelerators for example CTRL C equals COPYCLIP If this option is cleared the program interprets keyboard accelerators by using AgStar standards rather than Windows standards for example CTRL C equals Cancel CTRL V toggles among the viewports Chapter 6 Settings Commands 95 Shortcut Menus in Drawing Area Controls whether right clicking in the drawing area displays a shortcut menu or issues ENTER e Right Click Customization Displays the Right Click Customization dialog box You can als
7. Pulldown Menu Location File gt Export Keyboard Command polywrite Prerequisite Polylines in the drawing Chapter 2 File Commands 30 Export LandXML File The Export LandXML File routine provides a mechanism where data can be sent from Carlson Software into a LandXML file for use in other applications that support the LandXML data specification To generate a LandXML file a series of dialog boxes are presented Import Export LandXML x Project Data Files Import From Land lt ML Exit Help Export to LandXML This option allows you to individually select the desired Carlson Software data file s that should be included in the LandXML file Project Data Files This option allows you to quickly select the various data files associated with and defined by a Carlson Project prj file Select LandXML File Specify the name of a LandXML file you wish to create Export to LandXML File 3 x Basemap dwg Sewer network files sew C Carlson projectsiSpbeachWEx_storm sew El Coordinate files crd C Carlson projects S pbeach B asemap crd J Include Files Referenced in Selected Files Add Remove Up Down Change Directory Report ry E Include Files Referenced in Select Files When enabled this option will automatically add other files that are referenced by the selected file As an example the file produced by the Carlson Road Network command references TINs C
8. a im 6 B ag gt gt ge 8 Clip plane g Hint To see entity info here select pick mode and hover above Double click for more features FACE3D Makes a triangle mesh of 3D face entities by triangulating points starting with the current point and continuing until the line ends or another 3D special code is found The points must be ordered along the perimeter Although the mesh will be built if the points are clockwise or counterclockwise along the perimeter the visible side in the Carlson 3D viewer cube is the clockwise side by default On the Advanced tab the shading mode may be set to Shade both or Shade back if you would prefer to see both sides or just the counter clockwise side HOLE3D Makes an exclusion area within the triangle mesh identified by the point number following this code e g HOLE3D101 will start a hole in point 101 If no point number is given HOLE3D the exclusion area is applied to the last mesh or if there is a mesh in the process of being constructed by the current sequence of points it is ended and the hole is applied to it Note that a hole can only be applied to a mesh that was created by FACE3D not BLOCK3D or WALL3D Note also that it can be difficult to predict what the last mesh was if it used a different field code since the points of the coordinate file are processed by order of field code first and then point number There is no limit to how many holes can be applied to
9. 4 Exit Configure Survey 5 Go to Total Station Setup and check Connect to Station and click OK Now you are ready Chapter 7 Survey Commands 119 Impulse Laser There are two types of Impulse Lasers from Laser Tech One has a compass for horizontal angles The other has only a laser range finder for distance These are refered to in AgStar as Impulse 9600 and Impulse 4800 respectively The default baud rate for the Impulse 9600 is 9600 and the baud rate for the Impulse 4800 is 4800 The baud rate is set in Configure Survey To take a shot with the Impulse press the button that is closest to you With the Impulse 4800 AgStar will prompt for an azimuth after reading the distance If you do not get data with the Impulse 4800 make sure that the Impulse is configured for the correct format To check the format press the far key twice The screen should show SYS at the top Then press the close key Keep pressing the middle key to view the different settings until you see IP 200 or Cr 400 AgStar needs Cr 400 format So if the Impulse reads IP 200 press the near button once Leica GPS System 500 Setting Up a 500 Series Receiver 1 Connect the antenna cable to the ANT Port on the front of the receiver and to the antenna 2 If you are using the PacCrest radio module screw it in place over Port 1 on the receiver and attach its antenna cable Otherwise connect any radio being used to Port 1 2 or 3 3 If an extern
10. 6 Starts a 2D polyline that is open 6 Starts a 2D polyline that is closed 7 starts line whose type 2D line 2D polyline 3D polyline is specified by the point s field code definition If the field code definition is to use points then a 2D line is started 2 Middle point of 3 point arc 05 starts a curved 3D polyline section 50 ends a curved 3D polyline section 8 starts a 2D and 3D polyline combination that is open 8 starts a 2D and 3D polyline combination that is closed 8 ends a 2D and 3D polyline combination 08 starts a 2D and 3D polyline combination curve that is open 80 reverts back to a straight 2D and 3D polyline combination Chapter 9 Tools Commands 201 6 R a 0 gt EPR 0 pciwo E 5 1p 1 2 P EPL 0 EPL o BC E LINE CODING F P 7 4 56 to TB a zp 0638 3D POLYline BARRIER LINE CODING n 3 132 mo 2s 134 R 0 E pot 0 130 DR 5 g TR 3 t z Fi pe 178 177 a E EP 4 EPS y ng peed 13 171 172 e e Erro EPOR Ug Ig n_n sel a s DE ikia DR 0 17 ARC CODING Mza P SMOOTH CURVE CODING a 197 135 AP 0 13 7 LK p r AR P LEX a t r 179 180 af tad EP 0 EP 0 g 185 fer 1y 4 k r EP no 4 40 139 PA i AR k ues se LK LK EP PointCAD linework coding examples GIS Processing With GIS processing activated the entities created by Field to Finish are linked to a GIS feature name and attributes These GIS links can be used by the routine
11. After converting the LAT LONG from the GPS to the state plane coordinates and applying the Align Local Coordinates the Project Scale Factor is applied as the final adjustment to the coordinates This adjustment is used on the X Y and not the Z The Project Scale Factor is applied by dividing the distance between the coordinate and a base point by the Project Scale Factor The coordinate is then set by starting from the base point and moving in the direction to the coordinate for the adjusted distance The base point is the first point in Align Local Coordinates If there are no points specified in Align Local Coordinates then 0 0 is used as base point The Project Scale Factor can be entered directly or calculated using the grid factor and elevation for the current position When using the current position the program will read the LAT LONG from the GPS receiver The scale factor is then calculated as State Plane Grid Factor Elevation Earth Radius Laser Offset Settings There is an option to use a laser for reading the distance andr angle for offset points When this option is enabled you can choose the laser equipment type and communication parameters The serial port for Chapter 7 Survey Commands 113 the laser must be different than the GPS which requires at least two serial ports on the computer When using a laser for offsets the program will read the current position from the GPS and then read the laser for the distance and angle
12. Area sq 3498 309 Average Slope 0 119 Current Elevation M 383 527 Area Above Point sq 115 425 Rainal Volume Above cu 9 619 Runoff Coefficient 0 650 Sink Node 11661 Sink Elevation ft 303 417 Sink Name N3 y E Stop Inspect Area sq ft 3498 309 Average Slope 0 119 Era Jar Current Elevation ft 383 527 Area Above Point sq ft 115 425 Rainfall Volume Above cu ft 9 619 Runoff Coefficient 0 650 1 The Watersheds Report function runs the report formatter to choose which of the watershed parameters to report The Ponds Report function reports the position and depth of each ponding area Besides calculating the runoff of the triangulation surface Watershed Analysis can also process the runoff effects from structures for inlets storage ponds culverts and channels The structures in Watershed Analysis are simply for placement and watershed delineation These structures do not have design considerations for parameters like pipe size In the Structure tab there is a list of the structures to apply with the current surface The list shows the name type and drainage area for each structure The Draw function will draw symbols for each structure The Inlet structures act as sinks in the watershed and capture all the flow that comes to the inlet point Each inlet is defined by a single point and a name The Storage Tank structures also act as sinks and are defined by a single point and name The Culve
13. Import Export Topcon TIN File The Export Topcon TIN File command writes a Topcon TIN file TN3 from a Carlson triangulation file TIN FLT The routine first prompts for the Carlson file and then the Topcon file The Import Topcon TIN File command creates a Carlson Tin file TIN FLT from a Topcon triangulation file TN3 The routine first prompts for the Topcon file and then the Carlson file The units Feet or Meters for the triangulation file are the current units set in Drawing Setup Pulldown Menu Location File gt Import Export Keyboard Command topcon_tin tn3_to_tin Prerequisite A triangulation file Import Export Trimble TTM File These commands convert between Trimble TTM format triangulation files and Carlson format First you select the source file to read and then the destination file to write Pulldown Menu Location File gt Import Export Keyboard Command ttm2tin tin2ttm Prerequisite File to convert Write Polyline File This command creates a polyline file that contains the point data of the select polylines The objects supported by this tool include polylines arcs and lines Several different output formats are supported The Carlson format PLN is a text file format that is used by some Carlson commands and by machine control Carlson Grade Dozer 2000 GradeStar for the plan view Each polyline begins with a line of POLYLINE Color number etc Then the points for the polyline are listed on sepa
14. Renumber Points This option renumbers points in the user specified range starting from a new point number The old point numbers are erased The condense points will renumber such that there are no unused point numbers in the renumbered range Otherwise the spaces between the points is maintained In the example shown renumbering 1 25 with points 1 2 24 25 to starting point number 101 will result in points 101 102 103 104 if condense is on or 101 102 124 125 if condense is off Description for Points This option sets the point description field with the user specified text for a range of point numbers Input Edit Point Enter or edit the coordinate values or the description of a point The Notes section is for adding optional point notes which are additional point descriptions The standard description field is limited to 32 charac ters Under notes any number of lines of text can be assigned to the point A list box shows the lines of notes To add a note line pick a blank line in the list box and then type in the note in the edit box belong the list box and press Enter To edit a note highlight the line in the list box and edit the text in the edit box Chapter 9 Tools Commands 216 Duplicate Point Check X Action List Duplicates C Delete Duplicates r Range Settings Highest Point Number gt 2079 Range of Paints to Check m Tolerance Settings Northing E asting 0 001 Elevation 0 001 Cancel
15. SP Store Point PN Point Number N North Coordinate E East Coordinate EL Elevation Point Description Note TR Traverse SS Side Shot CL Closure Record AB Angle Balance Record OP Occupy Point Number FP Foresight Point Number one of the following 6 AZ Azimuth angle code 5 BR Bearing angle code 1 NE 2 SE 3 SW 4 NW AR Angle Right angle code 7 AL Angle Left angle code 6 DR Deflection Angle Right angle code 9 DL Deflection Angle Left angle code 8 one of the following 3 ZE Zenith Angle 90 degrees level VA Vertical Angle 0 degrees level CE Change Difference in Elevation from Instrument Point SD Slope Distance if ZE or VA above HD Horizontal Distance if CE above Menu Location Tools Prerequisite None Keyboard Command RAWEDIT Chapter 9 Tools Commands 242 Display Commands 10 Display Display GIS Window Help mu Existing Drawing e Existing Contours lv Benchmark Paints KE Design Drawing le Design Contours Design Grid Cut Fill Contours SE cutfrill Labels Options Cut Fill Spreadsheet Pad Design Report Check or uncheck the following options under the Display menu to show or hide elements from the drawing Existing Drawing Shows Hides all surveyed points and lines Existing Contours Shows Hides the contours lines for the existing field Benchmark Points Shows Hides the benchmark points Design Drawing Shows Hides the design arrows created in Desi
16. e Use Symbol for Delta Angle Label This option inserts a symbol to denote the delta angle If this option is unchecked then you may specify the prefix for Delta Angle above B Under Label Chord Angle in you can determine if the chords of the arc are labeled as azimuths bearings or gons Chapter 6 Settings Commands 107 C Under Type of Curve you can specify if the arc is a roadway or railway curve 10In the Line Curve Table defaults dialog box you can set parameters for producing line and curve tables Line Curve Table Defaults xi Label Test Layer Table Test Layer Label Text Style Table Text Style Label Text Size Table Text Size Line Label Prefix Curve Label Prefix Prompt for Label Location m Line Table Distance Curve Options Horizontal C Slope Sequence an 1 r Label Angles in Das Arc Length 2 Azimuths Bearings Gons ae Chord Length Automatic Table Update Chord Angle CO Off E S Delta Angle Label Alignment Tangent C Horizontal e Parallel Degree of Curve Cancel Help A In the Line Curve Table dialog box you must assign text size and layers Label Text Layer This option sets the layer for the label text Label Text Style This option sets the text style for label text Label Text Size This option sets the text size for label text Line Label Prefix This option sets the label prefix for lines Table Text Layer Thi
17. or xline e Apparent Intersection Apparent Intersection includes two separate snap modes Apparent Intersection and Extended Apparent Intersection You can also locate Intersection and Extended Intersection snap points while running Apparent Intersection object snap mode is on Apparent Intersection snaps to the apparent intersection of two objects arc circle ellipse elliptical arc line multiline polyline ray spline or xline that do not intersect in 3D space but may appear to intersect in the drawing display Extended Apparent Intersection snaps to the imaginary intersection of two objects that would appear to intersect if the objects were extended along their natural paths You might get varying results if you have both the Intersection and Apparent Intersection running object snaps turned on at the same time Apparent and Extended Apparent Intersection work with edges of regions and curves but not with edges or corners of 3D solids a e Parallel Draws a vector parallel to another object whenever AgStar prompts you for the second point of a vector After specifying the first point of a vector if you move the cursor over a straight line segment of another object Chapter 6 Settings Commands 83 the program acquires the point When the path of the object you create is parallel to the line segment the program displays an alignment path which you can use to create the parallel object e Clear All This option turns off all objec
18. 0 75 and the third point horizontal 7 5 and vertical 0 75 When there are multiple OH codes for the same point the polyline is offset multiple times The OFL code stands for offset left horizontal The only difference with the OH code is that you don t have to enter the to go left The OFB code stands for offset both left and right horizontal For example if the points follow the center of a ROW the OFB code can be use to create the left and right edges of the ROW SZ This code is used to set a different symbol size There are several ways to use this code It can take multiple scale factors for different dimensions by putting an ID character after the factor SZ If nothing follows the SZ code then the next point with the same field code as the current point will be used to determine the size SZ The value of the new symbol size is specified after the SZ This value is the actual size in drawing units For example SZ2 SZ X The value after the SZ is used to scale the symbol in the X dimension For example SZ2X SZ Y The value after the SZ is used to scale the symbol in the Y dimension For example SZ2Y SZ Z or SZ V The value after the SZ is used to scale the symbol in the Z Vertical dimension For example SZ2Z SZ H The value after the SZ is used to scale the symbol in the X Y Horizontal dimensions For example SZ2H SZ S The value after the SZ is a symbol size scaler that get multiplied by the drawing hor
19. 87 55 6 2 PA 175 179 19 Layer ID Layers EEG OI 173 169 19 least squares Leica Leica GPS System 500 120 Leica TC Series 122 Length License Agreement Line cE SL Ni alo All a EE llo Cn Go List 58 69 84 1051 116 175 179 208 210 List Points Locate on Real Z Axis 104 115 168 170 Locate Point 11 Locate Within Coordinate Range Make 8 7 8 TO 124 126 128 130 136 170 Manual Total Station 123 Maptech 236 MicroStation Monitor GPS Position 146 Move 36 B9 40 62 88 110 151 212 215 219 Move Point Attributes NADCON National Geodetic Survey 113 Navcom Configuration Guide 123 Navcom GPS Setup 125 Nearest Found Jew 20 23 A3 50 89 02 LOT 125 140 169 173 Nikon Nikon Total Stations 129 Nodes 170 Note File Numeric 102 Object Linking Object Snap 81 82 96 98 171 Occupy Point 220 241 242 Offset 585 ZOJ 1050510 CTS Ta 1 EO Offset 3D Polyline 45 Z Offset Cutoff 30 OLE objects 22 OnLine Help Open 2T 3 53 A EE Open Polylines Options 20 8568 75 7 EOT 108 115 118 163 172 176 192 20 Pad Design Report 246 Pan 55 56 135 236 254 Parameters 193 PC PT Radius Point 68 PC Radius Chord 68 PDMODE 102 PDSIZE 102 Place Google Earth Image 71 72 Place Image by World File 71
20. A value specified for X is also reflected in the Y and Z values 4 Under Rotation you specify the rotation angle for the inserted block e Specify On Screen This option specifies the rotation angle of the block using the pointing device e Angle This field sets a rotation angle for the inserted block 5 You can explode the block and inserts to the individual parts of the block When you select Explode you specify only an X scale factor Menu Location Draw Prerequisite None Keyboard Command DDINSERT Text Creates a single line text object You can use the TEXT to enter several lines of text that you can rotate justify and resize As you type at the Enter Text prompt the text you are typing is displayed on the screen Each line of text is a separate object To end a line and begin another press Enter after entering characters at the Enter Text prompt To end the TEXT command press Enter without entering any characters at the Enter Text prompt By applying a style to the text you can use a variety of character patterns or fonts that you can stretch compress make oblique mirror or align in a vertical column If TEXT was the last command entered pressing ENTER at the Specify Start Point of Text prompt skips the prompts for height and rotation angle and immediately displays the Enter Text prompt The text is placed directly beneath the previous line of text The point specified at the prompt is also stored as the Insertion Poin
21. CTOG Code Curve Togde CTOG CLO Code Close cto OH Code Offset Horiz OH OFL Code Offset Lett OFL CIR Code Crcle CIR SMO Code Smooth SMO GAP Code Gap GAP 30 Face Special Codes 30 Face FACE3D 30 Block BLOCK3D NOS Code Non Surface Code Append Field Code Desc Code Prefix Field Code Desc Character Append Descaption Character Prefix Description SZ Code Symbol Size DIST Code Distance Muti Point 3RD Code END Code End Linework PT Code End Curve NEAR Code Nearest Found RECT Code Close Rectangular OY Code Offset Vertical OFB Code Offset Both L R JPN Code Join to Point Name JOG Code Extend By Distance LTF Code Linetype Fip ox Gancet Hep Cied Deia NEAR RECT ov OFB JPN JOG LTF HOLE3D WALL30 The characters and _ can be used and substituted in Draw Field to Finish The way these characters are used is that when the file is processed the description field is searched for these characters If the symbol Chapter 9 Tools Commands 180 was changed to then the program would look for and change it to This is useful when a particular data collector may not have all the symbols available With these substitutions you can make a character that is provided on the data collector generate the symbol needed Multiple characters can also be used For example can be used to in order to produce a character or any
22. Full Name This is an optional field that describes the code for viewing Description This value is assigned to the point description attribute when the point is drawn This descrip tion can be different than the field description An additional description can be added to a point by entering it after a forward slash in the data description field Use Raw Description This option turns off the Description field described above Instead the points will be drawn with their original unprocessed descriptions The Attribute Block option applies to the point block with Chapter 9 Tools Commands 190 point elevation and description fields The Text Attribute applies to drawing the description as text The format of the description is controlled by the Attribute Format setting Main Layer The point and line work for the code will be created in this layer Distinct Point Layer When this toggle is selected the line work is created in the layer defined in the Layer field and the points are created in the specified distinct point layer For example you could have DRIVEWAY for linework and DRIVEWAY PNT for the points Dual 3D Polyline Layer Displays the layer that the 3d polyline will drawn on when using an Entity Type of 3D and 2D The layer name can be typed in this field Set 3D Layer Sets the layer that the 3d polyline will drawn on when using an Entity Type of 3D and 2D The layer can be selected from the list or typed in at the bottom o
23. GIS Keyboard Command gis_query Prerequisite MDB file with data or entities with linked GIS information Import SHP File The Import SHP File command converts ESRI SHP files into Carlson drawing entities and can also optionally write the available attribute data to an external Access MDB file and create GIS links between the drawing entities and the records in the database Use the Geometry with GIS Data Import Option to accomplish this Use the Geometry Only Import Option to just draw the linework If you don t need the data this option is much faster The Import SHP File dialog displays the Output MDB file to add data to and the source SHP file to be imported SHP files are similar to entities in one layer in CAD You must specify the table name to store the data in the MDB database and the layer name for the entities to be created Typically these names are the same or near equivalent as the SHP file name Once these names are entered the Import Polylines from SHP button becomes available Pick this button to import the SHP files entities and database You can also assign elevations by a specified data attribute There are primarily three types of ESRI SHP files Points Arcs and Polygons Each will provide different options on Import Once the SHP file is selected Carlson detects the data contents of the file and sets the dialog options for importing either polygons arcs or points Carlson GIS also supports the use of three other types of SHP f
24. No corresponding Maintenance Agreement rights shall transfer with the SOFTWARE transfer to the subsequent end user Prior to the transfer the subsequent end user receiving the Software from the initial End User must agree to all terms of this EULA with the added condition that no further transfers to third parties are permitted for any reason whatsoever and shall agree to the terms and conditions of a new Maintenance Agreement with Licensor You may not reverse engineer decompile or disassemble the SOFTWARE or alter the images utilized in the SOFTWARE and user documentation The SOFTWARE PRODUCT is licensed as a single product Its component parts may not be separated for use on more than one computer You shall communicate to any individual user in your facility that they are bound by the restrictions of this license agreement may not copy or alter the SOFTWARE for use outside End User s facilities Upgrades If you purchase an upgrade of a SOFTWARE PRODUCT and you use it on different machine from one where upgraded SOFTWARE PRODUCT was used use of original SOFTWARE PRODUCT must be discontinued and confirmed within 30 days If such use is not discontinued it is a material breach of this EULA and LICENSOR shall be entitled to all remedies available to it under this EULA and under the laws of Kentucky USA 5 Security Mechanisms Licensor and its affiliated companies take all legal steps to eliminate piracy of their software products In this con
25. Plot 2428 78 88 PPA PA 102 TOS ET Point Defaults Point Description Point Entity 200 Point Layer Point Notes 114 115 175 238 239 Point Number Format Point Protect 26 28 32 210 217 221 22 Points 11 28 B3 34 42 74 102 106 115 7 77 079 1187 um a N DO X Re 1 Ni NI NI ies J N E So SR 3 2 Qu ON O N Ni O E N O NWN Nl fH Gpo oN Go Gy OO _ 9 4 Polyline 7 Polyline File Polyline Info 59 Polylines Pond Precision Process 3 112 165 177 178 189 202 226 233 Product Overview Profile Projects Quickstart Guide O NO O E N W E N NI N O N W N WN al ws BN P N On Re ns UN O B E E E all B S ES Qi J J RN N N WN NI NO WN oO Raster Image Reduce Polyline Vertices 30 477 Reduce Vertices 103 Regen Registration Remove 37 50 67 88 100 19 1 213 223 Remove Polyline Arcs Remove Polyline Segment Remove Polyline Vertex Removing Index 265 Renumber Points repackaged Report B1 60 102 105 15 175 187 207 POS Report Log 101 Resize Point Attributes 219 Restore Restore Due North 57 Restore Layer Reverse 40 47 1 15 235 240 241 Reverse Polyline 47 Rotat
26. SETUP Units Control Function The Drawing Units dialog box controls coordinate and angle display formats and determines precision Chapter 6 Settings Commands 79 Drawing Units ka xi Length m Angle Type Type Decimal v Surveyor s Units ba Precision Precision 0 00 y IN Od00 00 E y Tl Clockwise r Drawing units for DesignCenter blocks When inserting blocks into this drawing scale them to Unitless iM m Sample Output 1 50 2 00 0 00 3 00 lt N 45d0 0 E 0 00 DK Cancel Direction 4 1 Under Length you specify the current unit of measurement and the precision for the current units e Type This field sets the current format for units of measure The values include Architectural Decimal Engi neering Fractional and Scientific The Engineering and Architectural formats produce feet and inches displays and assume that each drawing unit represents one inch The other formats can represent any real world unit e Precision This field sets the number of decimal places for the current units display 2 Under Angle you specify the current angle format and the precision for the current angle display e Type This field sets the current angle format e Precision This field sets the precision for the current angle display Carlson Survey uses the following conventions for the various angle measures decimal degrees appear as dec imal numbers grads appear w
27. To enable this option choose Configure from the Settings menu then choose Survey Settings then choose General Settings Turn on the Automatic Raw File toggle in this dialog The raw files created by TDS data collector programs are also compatible without conversion The command Data Collectors on the Tools menu has options for reading other data collectors native file formats and converting them to raw data RW5 format Within the raw data editor the File menu includes an import menu for converting raw data from other formats When you select the Edit Process Raw Data File command you are prompted to specify the name of the raw data RWS file The current coordinate file is used automatically To change the current coordinate file use the Set Coordinate File command in the Points menu before starting this command If no coordinate file is current the program will prompt you to set the current coordinate CRD file Raw Editor RW5 gt c program files carlson software 2002 data market_st rw5 CRD gt C al EG File Edit Search Display Add CRD Process Compute Pts Tools Help Northing Easting Elevation Desc 8086 3333 11418 8922 0 Code Horzingle SlopeDist Zenithing Desc AZ 62 5802 626 49 v 150 2728 576 vj350 1731 Edit Process Raw Data File uses an optional graphics window to display the points and traverse lines in real time As data is entered or edited the graphics window will be updated to show the configuration
28. Used to load a saved set of system variables This allows you to create a drawing save the system variables open a second drawing and load those variables into that drawing Read only variables are skipped Chapter 6 Settings Commands 85 e Save Used to save the current system variables to a disk file All system variables are stored to the file even those that are marked as read only e Print Used to print the current system variables After choosing this option you will prompted for an output filename then the program will proceed to write the system variables to the file This file can be loaded into any editor or word processor edited and printed 8 Variable Buttons These buttons are used to control the changes in variables while using the Variable Editor Each buttons purpose is explained below e Change Used to execute the changes typed into the edit field You must use this button simply pressing enter will not make the change e Restore Used to cancel the changes typed into the edit field If you make a mistake or change your mind while making changes in the edit field press this button to restore the edit field to the value before editing e Status Used to determine if the program will echo the status of changes being made to the command area If this toggle is on any changes made from the dialog will echo the change Also if a stream of change commands is being read from a file and the toggle is on the changes t
29. of over a foot sub meter or more Setting your GPS RMS Tolerance high and turning off Store Fixed Only will allow storing wetland and LOD limits of disturbance points under canopy that require only sub meter tolerances USCG beacon DGPS sub meter RTK GPS will always use these settings Projection Type defines the datum coordinate system to be used for converting the latitude longitude from the GPS receiver into cartesian coordinates For the United States two separate horizontal control systems have been devel oped by the Federal Government State Plane 1927 and State Plane 1983 For international use the UTM Universal Transverse and Mecator System should be selected The Lat Lon option will convert the latitude longitude from degrees minutes seconds format into decimal degrees This option is useful when working in a decimal degrees lat lon coordinate system Zone For State Plane projections you must select the correct state zone that you are working in For UTM the Automatic Zone option will have the program automatically use the correct UTM zone for your location Otherwise for UTM you can manually set a specific UTM zone This manual option applies to working on the border between zones and you want to force the program to always use one of those zones Important Coordinates of surveyed points will be inaccurate if the Projection Type and Zone settings are wrong If you have done survey work and then realize that they are set wrong the
30. the Land Desktop Project file path It is located in the under the COGO DescKey directory Import TDS Codes This option imports TDS codes into the Carlson Field to Finish fld code definition file Import Trimble Codes This option imports Trimble FXL file codes into the Carlson Field to Finish fld code definition file Import Eagle Point Codes This option imports Eagle Point codes into the Carlson Field to Finish fld code definition file Chapter 9 Tools Commands 178 Import C amp G Description Table This option imports C amp G code tables tbl into the Carlson Field to Finish fld code definition file Import Text ASCIL Codes This option imports code definitions from a user defined format Each row in the text file should represent one code The program will prompt for the delimiter ie comma separated that is used in the text file and then for the field type for each of the columns ie Layer or Description Import GIS Feature Codes This option imports features in a GIS file from Define GIS Features into F2F codes Import SurvCE Codes This option imports a SurvCE Feature Code List fcl into a Carlson Field to Finish fld code definition file Export SurvCE Codes This option creates a SurvCE Feature Code List fcl from the current a Carlson Field to Finish fld code definition file Draw Field Codes Without a Suffix as Points Only This option is useful for when wanting to use a field code sometimes for l
31. the license granted by this Agreement is hereby terminated In the event of such termination all rights of the LICENSOR shall remain in force and effect Any protected health information data of End User maintained on LICENSOR S data base shall upon reasonable notice to End User and at the discretion of LICENSOR may be destroyed Chapter 1 Product Overview 16 12 Copyright The SOFTWARE including but not limited to any images photographs animations video audio music and or text incorporated into the SOFTWARE and all intellectual property rights associated with it whether exists in a tangible media or in an electronic image media is owned by LICENSOR and is protected by United States copyright laws and international treaty provisions and all other commonwealth or national laws LICENSOR reserves all intellectual property rights in the Products except for the rights expressly granted in this Agreement You may not remove or alter any trademark logo copyright or other proprietary notice in or on the Product This license does not grant you any right to use the trademarks service marks or logos of LICENSOR or its licensors You may not copy any user documentation accompanying the SOFTWARE 13 Injunctive Relief It is understood and agreed that notwithstanding any other provision of this Agreement LI CENSOR has the unequivocal right to obtain timely injunctive relief to protect the proprietary rights of LICENSOR 14 Entire Agreemen
32. Balance routine in the Process menu uses to compare the angle between the occupied point and foresight point of this record with a user specified reference angle There Chapter 9 Tools Commands 234 should be only one AB record in the raw file If there is no AB record then the Angle Balance routine will prompt for which shot to use as the angle balance CL AB Closing Shot and Angle Balance This record is used as both the closing shot and angle balance records FD Foresight Direct The foresight direct is a traverse record used in a direct and reverse set When the program finds one the of direct reverse measurement records it will look for the other three records to complete the set FR Foresight Reverse The foresight reverse is a traverse record used in a direct and reverse set BD Backsight Direct The backsight direct is a traverse record used in a direct and reverse set BR Backsight Reverse The backsight reverse is a traverse record used in a direct and reverse set NAME Traverse Name This record acts as an identifier for the group of records that make up a traverse All the records after the NAME record belong to that traverse up to the next NAME record or the end of the file This record allows you to have multiple traverses in one raw file When running one of the Process commands the program will bring up a list of all the traverse names Simply choose which traverse to process If you have only one traverse in
33. Cell and specify the desire cell size 50X50 is recommended higher density corresponds to lower cell dimensions 2 Press Ok Make 3D Grid File x of Cells in x 36 in Y 56 Grid Resolution Specify Grid Resolution As C Number of Cells in and Y a Dimensions of a Cell F Cancel Help Pull Down Menu Location Design Prerequisite A closed perimeter Keyboard Command mk exgrd Design Field This routine allows you either to specify a desired field design or have Agstar calculate the optimal field design through an iterative process If the field has been divided into multiple sections field design can either be performed on a specific section or on the entire field as a whole Chapter 8 Design Commands 149 Design Pad Eo x Jv Dual Slope Draw Direction Dual Slope Row Angle 180 000 Column Angle 270 00 y Row Slope Percent o da dan i Column Slope Percent Single Slope Slope Percent 0 119 Slope Angle Jv Find Optimal Slope Percent Jv Find Optimal Slope Direction Approximate Natural Grade Range Of Slopes To Check __ __ 7 Minimum Slope Percent Maximum Slope Percent Cut Swell Factor Fill Shrink Factor Balance Volumne Tolerance C Y Balance Import Yolumne C Y Balance Export Volumne C Y Cancel Help The design field menu has the following options Dual Slop
34. Descriptions Notes IV Elevations FT Use IV Use IV Label Zeros IV Locate on Real Z Axis Decimals 0 00 Point Number Settings Y Point Numbers Y Automatic Point Numbering Starting Point Number Wildcard match of pt description J Erase Duplicates Layer Name PNTS Select Layer Draw Range Draw All Enter and Assign Screen Pick Point Cancel Help Locate Within Polyline When checked you will be prompted to select a closed polyline Only the points that are inside this closed polyline will be drawn Locate Within Distance When checked you will be prompted for a reference point and a distance Only the points that are within the search distance from the reference point will be drawn Locate Within Coordinate Range When checked only the points that are within the specified range of northing easting and elevation will be drawn The program prompts for the minimum and maximum northing easting and elevations These values default to the actual min and max in the CRD file Then the program prompts for the point number range of points to check Descriptions Specify whether you are prompted for a point description when creating points and whether the point descriptions are labeled in the point block Elevations Specify whether you are prompted for a point elevations when creating points and whether the point elevations are labeled in the point block Chapter 9 Tools Commands 170 Locate on Rea
35. Display Tab Chapter 6 Settings Commands 88 Options a Eg Current drawing Drawing dwg Files Display Open and Save Plotting System User Preferences Drafting Selection Window Elements m Display resolution IV Display scroll bars in drawing window 100 Arc and circle smoothness Colors Fonts e Segments in a polyline curve m Layout elements m Display performance IV Display Layout and Model tabs I Apply solid fill IV Display margins Show text boundary frame only IV Display paper background I Display paper shadow IV Show Page Setup dialog for new layouts p Crosshair size V Create viewport in new layouts 5 T 1 Under Window Elements you control display settings specific to the Carlson Survey drawing environment e Display Scroll Bars in Drawing Window Specifies whether to display scroll bars at the bottom and right sides of the drawing area e Colors Displays the Color Options dialog box Use this dialog box to specify the colors of elements in the window e Fonts Displays the Command Line Window Font dialog box Use this dialog box to specify the font for the command line text 2 Under Layout Elements you control options for existing and new layouts A layout is a paper space environment in which you can set up drawings for plotting e Display Layout and Model Tabs Specifies whether to display the layout and Model tabs at the bottom of the drawing area e Disp
36. Format Bearings C Azimuths UC Gons Distance Angle General Settings Reset To Defauts Row This column allows you to stack the data in different ways You can place more than one item in the same row If None is selected then that item will not be displayed Side This column allows you to place each item either inside or outside of the line or polyline Order This column determines the order of items when they are placed in the same row General Settings This button brings you to the Annotate Defaults dialog see Annotate Defaults for more Reset To Defaults This button restores the default settings shown above Load Save You may also Load and Save different label configurations with the corresponding buttons Prompts Options Format Points lt Select line or polyline gt select entity Options Format Points lt Select line or polyline gt O Custom Line Label dialog choose your preferences and click OK You can decide to go into the Option dialog at the start of the command or after your initial labeling If you use the Format command line option you will be asked to enter the Format command The choices are B bearing A azimuth G gon D distance R next row _ switch side of line Pulldown Menu Location Draw Keyboard Command annline Prerequisite An arc to label Chapter 5 Draw Commands 74 Draw Barscale This command draws a barscale at the user specified scale The comman
37. Height 0 000 North 105 825 East 461 069 Elev 0 197 SIMULATION LOCK GRID 7 333 FILL 7 530 Store F2 Exit eS PL Commond Command Command grd_gps Ea qa g 6728554 0 0000 0 0000 SNAP GRID ORTHO POLAR OSNAP OTRACK LWT MODEL El Pull Down Menu Location Design Prerequisite A field design Keyboard Command grd gps Watershed Analysis This command has a collection of tools to analyze the runoff of a surface defined by a triangulation or grid surface file After selecting the surface file of the surface the program docks a dialog on the left side of the drawing window While the Watershed Analysis dialog is running other AutoCAD and Carlson commands are not available To zoom or pan the drawing view use the buttons at the top of the dialog or use the middle button of a wheel mouse Chapter 9 Tools Commands 161 a a l 5 Surface simo2 tin Draw Tools Structures Data Draw Watersheds xo Above Point 00 Watershed Perimeters Fill Watershed Areas O Buffer Hatch Width ft 50 O Hatch Structure Areas O Max Flow Lines O Pond Areas Sink Locations O Spillover Locations O Group Watershed Entities Symbol Options Layer Options Rainfall 1 0 O Allow Overflow Along Boundary Watershed Analysis calculates the flow connections between the triangles and along the edges of the triangulation The Rainfall amount is used in the processing for figuring t
38. Help Local Coordinate Transformation Options Rigid Body Transformation No Scale Factor C Over Determination by Plane Similarity Cancel C Align by Two Pairs of Points When running AgStar with AutoCAD Map the Coordinate Transformation dialog has an option called Other which activates all the AutoCAD Map transformations Draw Entities by Point s Draw Lines Arcs 3DLines Polylines or 3DPolys by defining a range of point numbers Example Prompts Enter Menu Option lt L gt P Plot Entities by Point Number Type of entity Arc Polyline 3dpoly 2dline Exit lt Line gt P This response causes the program to plot polylines Example 1 4 7 10 12 5 8 would draw lines from point number s 1 through 4 then to 7 to 10 through 12 then to 5 to 8 limit 132 characters Undo lt Enter point numbers or ranges gt 110 2030 The program draws a polyline from point number 1 through 10 to point number 20 through 30 New Last Point Number This option sets the highest point number in the CRD file All points above this number are erased Update Drawing from CRD File This function updates the position of AgStar points in the drawing to match the position stored in the coordinate file This command also has options to erase and draw points For the erase option point are erased from the drawing if the point number does not exist in the coordinate file For the draw option if a point number in the CRD file does not e
39. If the base is moved for any reason or if significant time has passed since the Master Benchmark was surveyed it may be necessary to align to or tie in to a benchmark Be sure your vehicle is positioned in exactly the same place in the field it was when you initially surveyed the benchmark Steps 1 You will be prompted to select a benchmark from the drawing Click on the benchmark you want to align to 2 With your vehicle positioned over the benchmark point press the Read button When the readings complete click Ok on the Read Average GPS window 3 You will be asked to select a number of GPS readings to be taken 10 is enough Click Ok to begin readings The coordinate system is now aligned to the chosen benchmark Pull Down Menu Location Survey Prerequisite A master benchmark and preferably fixed RTK Keyboard Command align_bmark Typical Alignment Scenarios Scenario New site In this case there are no established coordinates on the site Alignment Choose a point on site and do a one point alignment For the local alignment point enter the coordinates that you would like to use ie 5000 5000 100 Under Configure AgStar gt GPS Settings The One Pt Align Azimuth option chooses between using true north geodetic or state plane north grid To use real world ground distances set the Project Scale Factor under Configure Survey gt GPS Settings Otherwise the default scale factor of 1 0 will collect points on state pla
40. Il Specify On screen l Specify On screen jo 00 2 11 00 Angle E Y fo 00 Y 1 00 Z oo 2 11 00 I Uniform Scale T Explode 1 In the Insert dialog box you specify the block to insert and define the position for the inserted block The last block you insert during the current editing session becomes the default block for subsequent uses of this command e Name This field specifies the name of a block to insert or the name of a file to insert as a block e Browse This button opens the Select Drawing File dialog box a standard file selection dialog box where you can select a block or a file to insert 2 Under Insertion Point you specify the insertion point for the block Specify On Screen This option specifies the insertion point of the block using the pointing device e X This field sets the X coordinate value e Y This field sets the Y coordinate value Chapter 5 Draw Commands 64 e Z This field sets the Z coordinate value 3 Under Scale you specify the scale for the inserted block Specifying negative values for the X Y and Z scale factors inserts a mirror image of a block e Specify On Screen This option specifies the insertion point of the block using the pointing device e X This field sets the X coordinate value e Y This field sets the Y coordinate value e Z This field sets the Z coordinate value e Uniform Scale This option specifies a single scale value for X Y and Z coordinates
41. Multiple Set misas A TTT Cia Sepa aon L Elev Precision Layout ID Chapter 9 Tools Commands 188 Edit Field Code Definition Eo xj IV Processing ON Code HUB I Use Code Sequence ESTA Eull Name HUB 8 TACK SET Description HET SET Use Raw Description pth Main Layer TRAVERSE Se IV Distinct Point Layer PNTS Set Dual 3D Pobline Layer A Attribute Format Attribute Bock y GIS Note Point Atrbute Labels A TS even The code definition dialog has three tabs General Symbol and Linetype Here are the settings under General Processing ON This toggle controls whether this code will be processed Code This is the key name that identities the code and is matched with the field data descriptions It is important to note that the character used in this field is regarded as a wildcard or match anything code For example a field code definition with the code defined as TREE will be used for any raw description of TREE Raw descriptions of TREEA TREE12 TREE etc will match the TREE code definition This will always be the case unless there is a more specific code is found For example is there was a code TREEA in the code definition file then that code would be used instead of the TREE code Use Code Sequence This specifies a sequence type code Sequences are a way to simplify field entry of a sequence of codes For example a road cross section could be SHD1 EP1 CL EP2 SHD2 Instead of entering t
42. ROT by itself to rotate to the next Point Point 48 Regular point without rotation Point 49 Using AZI and DIST codes to offset the point Point 50 Using SZ with value to set size of symbol Points 51 52 Using SZ by itself to size symbol by the distance to the next point Point 53 Using SZ with 2 values to draw multiple symbols at those sizes Points 54 55 Using 2ND code to size the symbol Points 56 58 Using 2ND and 3RD codes to size the symbol in 2 dimensions Points 59 62 Using CLO to close the linework Points 63 64 Using RECT with two points and a value to create a rectangle Points 65 67 Using RECT with three points to create a rectangle Points 68 69 Using OH to offset right a fixed amount U U U U Points 70 73 Using OH on multiple points to offset various amounts Points 74 75 Using multiple OH on the same point to offset polyline multiple times Points 76 77 Using OH with negative value for offset to left Points 78 79 Using OFL with value for offset left a fixed amount Points 80 81 Using OFB with value to offset both left and right a fixed amount Point 82 Using CIR to draw circle at specified radius Points 83 84 Using CIR to draw circle using two points for center and perimeter Points 85 89 Using CIR to draw best fit circle through points on perimeter Points 90 91 Using JPN to join linework to another Point Points 92 95 Using SMO to create smoothed linework Points 96 97 Using JOG to create additional
43. This EULA grants you the following rights You may install and use one copy of the SOFTWARE PRODUCT or any prior version for the same operating system on a single computer The primary user of the computer on which the SOFTWARE PRODUCT is installed may make a second copy for his or her exclusive use on a portable computer Storage Network Use You may also store or install a copy of the SOFTWARE PRODUCT on a storage device such as a network server used only to install or run the SOFTWARE PRODUCT on your other computers over an internal network however you must acquire and dedicate a license for each separate computer on which the SOFTWARE PRODUCT is installed or run from the storage device A license for the SOFTWARE PRODUCT may not be shared or used concurrently on different computers 2 Exclusive Source End User shall obtain all LICENSOR authorized product materials through LICEN SOR or LICENSOR S authorized representative and no other source LICENSOR authorized product materials include but are not limited to manuals license agreements and media upon which LICENSOR s proprietary computer programs are recorded End User shall make no copies of any kind of any of the materials furnished by LICENSOR or LICENSOR s authorized representative except as specifically authorized to do so in this EULA End User is not entitled to make archival copies of those portions of LICENSOR s product s that are provided on a machine readable media Chapte
44. Tree Tag Prefix jr Default Order Key in the tree code trunk size diameter dripline radius and tag 1D in the field like the ing example following E OAK 16 12 100 means a OAK tree with 16 inches diameter TRUNK and 12 feet radius DRIPLINE for tree ID 100 Keep all above settings blank for default order User defined Order Key in the tree code then use the character settings to define the order like the following example OAK T100 12FEET 12INCHES means the same as above example Tree Trunk Suffix INCHES Tree Drip Suffix FEET Tree Tag Prefix T On the Description Codes tab there are setting to help identify the tree attributes in the point description The program looks for the trunk size drip size and tag ID in the point description after the tree code By default the program expects the attributes to by in the order of trunk size drip size and tag ID Here s an example default order OAK 16 12 100 where OAK is the tree code from the code table 16 is the trunk diameter 12 is the drip radius and 100 is the tag ID If the attributes are in a different order then the suffix prefix settings can be used to identify the attributes When the program finds a specified prefix or suffix that tells the program which attribute to use For example if the Trunk Suffix is in and the Drip Suffix is ft and the Tag Prefix is T then OAK T100 16in 12ft means tag ID of 100 trunk diameter 16 and drip radius 12 feet Tree Su
45. Use this command to view existing field area names System Requirements Operating System Microsoft Windows 98 Windows Millennium Edition ME Windows XP Professional Windows 2000 Profes sional or Windows NT 4 0 with SP 6 0 or later Notes It is recommended that you install and run Agstar on an English version of the operating system Users of Windows NT 4 0 or Windows 2000 Professional must have Administrator permissions to install Agstar Not assigning these permissions can cause Agstar to perform incorrectly See Windows Help for information about assigning user permissions Processor Intel Pentium III IV or AMD K6 III PC 450MHz or higher RAM 128 MB Video VGA display 1024 x 768 Hard disk SOOMB free disk space Pointing device Mouse CD ROM Any speed for installation only GPS Equipment RTK base and rover Optional hardware Printer or plotter Digitizer Modem or access to an Internet connection Open GL compatible 3D video card The OpenGL driver that comes with the 3D graphics card must have the following Full support of OpenGL or later An OpenGL Installable Client Driver ICD The graphics card must have an ICD in its OpenGL driver software The miniGL driver provided with some cards is not sufficient for use with this Autodesk CAD engine Chapter 1 Product Overview 3 Web browser Microsoft Internet Explorer 5 0 Netscape Navigator 4 5 or later Installing Agstar If you re instal
46. WORK test5 dwg Monitor F3 SkyPlot F4 Menu F11 A 2 del mp e Point Number 2 Rod Height 0 000 Northing Easting Elev interval Type Distance Time sec Interval xiy 10 000 Interval z 10 000 Start F1 Stop F2 Exit All Center Dynamic Extents Previous Scale Window lt real time gt Sx a ommand Command Command survey perim 4 J gt 8824 3 90 0 00 SNAP GRID ORTHO POLAR OSNAPJOTRACK LWI MODEL 2 Now with your vehicle positioned at the edge of the field press Start and begin piloting your vehicle around the field Chapter 7 Survey Commands 142 Auto Points At Interval C oem2k oem XPAD WORK tests dwg os aj xj ER Fie Edt view Draw Survey Design Tools Display Window Hep x D a 2 p Suerte Fi yreQaagas Monitor F3 SkyPlot F4 Menu F11 A e yl e Stored point 87 Dist 2 0 LOCK SIMULATION Point Number 88 Rod Height 0 000 Northing 196 081 Easting 207 317 Elev 6 918 _ Interval Type a Distance Time sec Interval xiy 10 000 Interval 2 10 000 Store F1 Stop F2 Exit 14 ml 3 If you need to stop in the middle press Stop and when prompted to close the perimeter press No Measure Perimeter Close Perimeter Yes No 4 When the survey is complete press Stop and choose Yes
47. X Y and Z axes back to zero e Set Acad View This option allows you to send the current 3D view back to the AgStar screen when you exit the 3D Viewer window You update the current CAD view to match the view that is displayed in the 3D viewer window e Z Axis This slider rotates the view on the Z axis The range of these sliders is 180 to 180 degrees with middle being 0 which is the default position when the viewer starts e Y Axis This slider rotates the view on the Y axis X Axis This slider rotates the view on the X axis Menu Location View Prerequisite Entities to display Keyboard Command CUBE Regen This command regenerates the drawing and refreshes the current viewport Menu Location View Prerequisite None Keyboard Command REGEN Twist Screen Standard This command allows you to twist the screen s orientation so that a direction other than North is toward the top of the screen and the drawing It does not do a coordinate rotation and it leaves the database unchanged The ROTATE and MOVE commands in the Edit menu can be used to do a coordinate rotation and translation This command prompts you for the twist angle then adjusts the screen and crosshairs to that angle The twist angle 1s always measured counterclockwise with O degrees at the east right Menu Location View Twist Screen gt Prerequisite None Keyboard Command TWIST1 Chapter 4 View Commands 56 Twist Screen Line This command is a va
48. a FACE3D mesh The points of the hole itself are Chapter 9 Tools Commands 185 not added to the FACE3D mesh they are projected on to the best plane that contains the FACE3D mesh and then the hole is cut out Example 1 2500 HOUSE FACE3D front of house 2501 HOUSE1 2502 HOUSE1 2503 HOUSE1 2504 HOUSE1 2505 VENT1 HOLE3D2500 applies 2505 2508 as a hole to last mesh that uses point 2500 So any point in the range 2500 2504 would have the same effect 2506 VENTI 2507 VENTI 2508 VENTI Example 2 2500 HOUSE1 FACE3D front of house 2501 HOUSE1 2502 HOUSE1 2503 HOUSE1 2504 HOUSE1 2505 HOUSE1 HOLE3D stops the above mesh and applies 2505 2508 as a hole 2506 HOUSE1 2507 HOUSE1 2508 HOUSE1 Example 3 2500 HOUSE1 FACE3D front of house 2501 HOUSE1 2502 HOUSE1 2503 HOUSE1 2504 HOUSE1 2505 WINDOW1 FACE3D HOLE3D2503 applies 2505 2508 as a hole to above mesh 2500 2504 and starts a new mesh using the WINDOW field code 2506 WINDOW1 2507 WINDOW1 2508 WINDOW1 Example 4 same result as Example 3 2500 HOUSE1 FACE3D front of house 2501 HOUSE1 2502 HOUSE1 2503 HOUSE1 2504 HOUSE1 2505 WINDOW1 FACE3D starts a new mesh using the WINDOW field code 2506 WINDOW1 2507 WINDOW1 2508 WINDOW1 HOLE3D2504 makes the mesh 2505 2508 also be a hole in the mesh 2500 2504 BLOCK3D Makes a set of 3D faces to make a 3d block using the height value entered after the code e g BLOCK3D2 3 with height 2 3 Heigh
49. allows for customization of the eagle point special designators Eagle Point Code Definition Settings X Special Designators Field Code Line End Point On Curve Insert Description Close Line Bearing Close Cancel Help MOL Currently the supported designators include Field Code Point On Curve Close Line Line End Insert Description and Bearing Close Also supported is the ability to recognize overwriting of descriptions just as Eagle Point does by using the space separator instead of the Insert Description designator Examples of supported coding are as follows TC Places a node and or line per the field code library TC Places a node and or line per the field code library TC Specifies a point on a curve TC Specifies a point on a curve TC Stops the line TC Stops the line TC Closes the line back to the starting point TC Closes the line back to the starting point TC Typically coded on the third corner of a rectangle to close the figure with having to locate the fourth corner TC Typically coded on the third corner of a rectangle to close the figure with having to locate the fourth corner WV WI Places a node as specified by the code WV in the field code library and then begins a line as specified by code W in the field code library TC EP FL Results in three lines coming together TCI TC2 TC3 Results in three lines coming together All three lines are spec
50. are the short cut keys that can be selected by the character and pressing Enter Pull Down Menu Location Tools gt Points Prerequisite None Keyboard Command setcrd CooRDinate File Utilities This command allows you to manipulate the coordinates stored in a coordinate CRD file One of the most impor tant commands is the Update CRD File from Drawing which allows you to update the file after editing the drawing with commands such as Erase Move Rotate or Change Elevations Another handy option is the Draw Entities by Point Number which allows the user to input point number ranges and plot Lines Arcs Polylines or 3D polylines Coordinate files have either numeric or alphanumeric point numbers Alphanumeric point numbers consist of nine or less digits and letters i e point number 7A The type of point number format is displayed at the top title bar of the dialog shown on the next page Coordinate File Utilities Options Open CRD File Allows the user to switch to another file When you exit Coordinate File Utilities this will be the current file that you work with in AgStar Copy CRD File Copies a coordinate file to another file name This can be used to make a backup of your coordinate file Switch Point Number Format Allows you to convert the current CRD file from numeric format to alphanumeric format Import Text ASCU File This routine converts point data from a text file into the current coordinate CRD file See the Imp
51. at the command prompt repeats that last command Pull down menus have a row of header names across the top of the screen Selecting one of these header names displays the possible commands under that name The pull down menus are the primary method for command selection This manual is organized by the contents of each pull down menu Pull down menus may sometimes be referred to as drop down menus Chapter 1 Product Overview 9 Startup Wizard For creating a new drawing in Agstar the Startup Wizard can guide you through starting and setting up the drawing This wizard is optional and can be turned on or off in the Configure Survey General Settings command You can also exit out of the Startup Wizard at any time Create New Drawing kd xi wn Use a Template Select a Template Stariso dwt Tsunami dwt Browse m Template Description Carlson Survey Default Cancel When the New drawing command is executed you first get the standard AutoCAD choice of Start from Scratch Use a Template or Use a Wizard Typically you want to the Use a Template option and choose the drawing template SURVEY DWT The drawing template will set of some basic drawing parameters such as default layer names New Drawing Wizard Ea NEW Drawing Name r Scale Settings e English 1in ft Metric 1m m Horizontal Scale Symbol Plot Size 0 100 Drawing Units 5 000 Text Plot Size 0 100 Drawing
52. available features will either be all the features found in the GIS links of the drawing or all the features from the Output MDB file depending on the Query Using option Once the feature is specified the Field Name pop up list contains all the available fields in the feature Choose a field from this list Next choose the operator gt etc from the operator list The Value pop up list contains all the different values for that field that are found in the current data set You can either select one of these values or type in another value into this field If a Field Name relates to another Feature when you select that Field an additional button will appear allowing you to add a query parameter from the related feature Related T able Add Parameter Using Relationships When all the parameter values are set pick the Add Parameter button Once a feature is selected and add a parameter is added the Feature Names list becomes unavailable because any additional query parameters must come from that feature or relate through that primary feature When all the parameters are defined for the query you can save these settings by filling out a name Current Query field and then picking the Save button This query can be recalled later by highlighting the query name and clicking the Load button The Delete button removes the highlighted query The Save Load and Delete functions operate on the current set of queries active in the program The Save To File a
53. be on top Edit Symbol Library xi Points Trees TREE1 TREE1 DWG TREE2 TREE2 DWG TREES TREE3 DWG TREE4 TREE4 DWG TREES TREES DWG TREES TREE6 DWG TREE TREE DWG North Arrows S Add Category Create Symbol Rename Import Symbols Remove Up Save Wau ek Wl e Add Category Categories are a way for grouping symbols by type for your own convenience in symbol selec tion A new category is added by selecting this button An edit field then appears in the tree view on the left and waits for you to enter the category name Pressing the Enter key finishes the input e Rename Select the category or symbol that you want to rename and press this button By default the symbol description is the same as file name e Remove Select the category or symbol that you want to remove and press this button e Up Ifa symbol is selected this moves the symbol up into the next category If a category is selected this moves the category up in the list e Down If a symbol is selected this moves the symbol down into the next category If a category is selected this moves the category down in the list e Create Symbol Allows you to select drawing entities to create a new symbol The symbol should be drawn at unit size scale 1 1 because Carlson Survey will scale the symbol by the current drawing scale when the symbol is used e Import Symbols All
54. entered There are also several angle output options that are set at the second prompt in the Options The angle can be reported as either Bearing Azimuth or Angle Right Prompts Calculate Bearing amp Distance from starting point Traverse Sideshot Options Arc Point number or pick point pick point Traverse Sideshot Options Arc Point number or pick point 9 Use point number 9 PtNo North y East x Elev z Description 9 4909 25 4648 37 0 00 Bearing N 81d8 54 E Azimuth 81d8 54 Horizontal Distance 261 17407461 Pull Down Menu Location Tools gt COGO Prerequisite None Occupy Point This command sets the occupied point and backsight angle for other COGO commands such as Traverse For setting the occupied point you have the option of picking a point on the screen entering coordinates at the command line or typing in a point number that will be read from the current coordinate file Four options are available for determining the backsight direction Azimuth Bearing Point and None For the Point option you may pick a point on the screen input coordinates or type a point number that will be read from the current coordinate file For the Azimuth and Bearing option you enter the backsight angle in the selected format The None option sets the backsight to an azimuth of 0 north You can also set the occupied point by using the Inverse command If you inverse from point 3 to point 1 you have set point 1 as the occupi
55. for operating Agstar It also contains instructions for installing and authorizing Agstar setting up your first project and a description of non menu specific commands Product Overview Quickstart Guide Startup Wizard Command Entry System Requirements Installing Agstar Authorizing Agstar Technical Support Product Overview Agstar offers a complete package of land levelling tools for agricultural and irrigation purposes It carries a versatile suite of commands designed to simplify and speed up the professional surveyor s work as well as reduce costs by minimizing the amount of dirt to move For data collection Agstar supports a wide range of GPS RTK receivers including such popular brands as Navcom Ashtech Leica Sokkiam and Trimble if you have it Agstar probably supports it which means you may not even need to upgrade your hardware Agstar handles both the survey and the design sides of land levelling allowing you to survey large fields with GPS and then determine the optimal field design requiring the least amount of dirt moved Agstar enables you to set the cut fill ratio the amount of dirt to import or export and a host of other design parameters It also allows you to subdivide the field and assign different designs to each subdivision which is useful if you want crowns in your field After field design Agstar can display design information in a variety of ways 1 A pad report detailing the total cubic cut fill yardag
56. for the importing of codes from different software packages Controls for handling multiple codes are located on this dialog All special codes can be replaced to other characters defined by the user The special codes are listed and edited on this dialog Chapter 9 Tools Commands 176 Code Table Settings Code File C ACarlson Projects Settings carlson fld Coding Method Split Multiple Codes Process Carlson Coding Oll None O Prompt Pi Eagle Point Codi O Brocess Eagle Point Coding Import SurvCE Codes Import Eagle Point Codes Process SDMS Coding Process CAICE Coding Import Land Desktop Desc Keys Import TDS Codes Export SurvCE Codes Import C amp G Description T able Import Text ASCII Codes C Draw Field Codes Without a Suffix as Points Only Max Delta Height for Linework 1000 00 CI Use Multiple Codes for Linework Only Max Length for Linework 5000 00 Special Codes Substitution Codes Set Choose this button to specify a new code table The name of the current table is shown in the field to the right of this button Process Carlson Coding When checked this option interprets and processes coordinate files based upon the Carlson Coding method and data collection method Process Eagle Point Coding When checked coordinate files are processed based on the Eagle Point Data Collec tion method When selected the Eagle Point Codes button becomes available for selection and displays the following dialog This dialog
57. in DWG Directory 101 Decimal Places 106 Defaults Define GIS Features 250 251 Definition Delete Layer Delta Angle 107 density Design BIPA TST TIS O Design Commands Design Fiela 149134 T6 A Discussion Groups 17 Display 244 NO WN al ws N N N ns E oo e n N UU Ke 263 Display Commands 243 Display Options 247 DistanceDistance Intersect Distance MeasureSwathing Distance Measure with Pen 160 Dozer 29 Draw 11 POHA 24 BA 59 621669 PIHTA 78180 103 153 1160 163 165H167 171H174 176 1179 97 1199 2024204 212 215 218 NI NO ni G2 N RIIS ON 2 Draw Barscale 75 Draw Commands Draw Field to Finish 17 Drawing Inspector 59 Drawing Setup 27 2312242 DrawLocate Points 169 Draw North Arrow 75 Draw Subdivision Line l Eagle Point Earth Curvature 238 Edit 8 23 6659 4142 44 65 51 52 59 62 25 76 W QU ON ma 00 00 j TEE Go SE So ml j Go Ni NO U Ni NI NI O Ni NI QN co On 1 E E E Ni QU Y ES Edit Commands 35 Edit Point Edit Point Attributes 218 Edit Points 208 Edit Polyline Vertex 48 EditProcess Raw File 232 Edit Symbol Library 100 Edit Text 44 Elevation 121 1674171 192 19 Elevation Difference Enter and Assign EnterAssign Point 223 Enti
58. in the same directory the image will be inserted into the proper coordinates Prompts Select World File choose existing TFW or JGW file Pulldown Menu Location Draw gt Images Keyboard Command geotiff Prerequisite A georeferenced image file Place Google Earth Image In addition to providing a graphical method for displaying feature rich data located anywhere on the globe Google Earth also provides the ability for software applications to extract its aerial imagery While the positional accuracy of the Google Earth surface should be considered approximate it might be suitable for preliminary land planning studies or proof of concept preliminary designs Consider the following example Based on the physical screen size of the Google Earth application and the zoom or view resolution of a project site the following values summarized at the bottom of the dialog box were returned Chapter 5 Draw Commands 71 Acquire Google Earth Image E loj x M Spatial Reference State Plane 83 KY North NAD83 US Survey Feet csref GCS North American 1983 Extent Current Google Earth View Current Drawing View Select From Drawing m Image Type Monochrome e Color m Image Layer fearr o Lx cn Viewing 1637 E 966 N 0 1mi 1366x809 pixels at 1 1964 fpixel Z Unit a Horizontal Vertical Feet 1637 966 Pixels 1366 809 Feet Pixel 1 19 1 19 Google Earth View Area In the s
59. linework segment extensions Points 98 102 Using GAP to create a break in the linework Points 103 106 Using LFT to switch linetype to left side Points 107 109 Using WALL3D with specified height value Points 110 112 Using WALL3D with height from 2nd point Points 113 115 Using BLOCK3D with height and three points to define parallelogram U U Points 116 123 Using BLOCK3D with height and multiple points to define perimeter Points 124 128 Using FACE3D with multiple points to make a surface Chapter 9 Tools Commands 200 Points 129 132 Using HOLE3D with multiple points to define the perimeter of a hole in the FACE3D surface Point 133 Using code definition with Attribute Format set to Text and only Elevation turned on with Label Decimal On Point Ka y ESAk J A 5 A t e 1 gt gt i 4 Pu f 14 ly ai e case 1 A riu o 4 g g 4 Y j Poet a Lor es 9 1 nw Ree t fix PointCAD Coding Field to Finish supports an early Carlson style of linework coding called PointCAD The PointCAD codes use numbers with symbols as follows 0 Starts a regular 2D line not a polyline that is open 0 Starts a regular 2D line that is closed 4 Starts a curved 2D polyline that is open 4 Starts a curved 2D polyline that is closed 1 Begins a 3 point arc 0 or 1 or 3 or 4 or 5 or 6 or 7 Ends a line 5 Starts a 3D polyline that is open 5 Starts a 3D polyline that is closed
60. make sure the baud rate matches under Configure Survey menu click on General Settings and check the baud rate When Leica is turned on press F3 for conf then enter 3 The baud rate can be changed by pressing F6 for list when done enter CONT In addtion to baud rate parity char length and stop bits should also match NOTE Default in AgStar is not the same as default in Leica Chapter 7 Survey Commands 122 Manual Total Station This method allows you to run AgStar in total station mode without being connected to equipment The program will prompt you to enter the horizontal angle zenith angle and slope distance This method can be used for demonstration purposes or to work with total stations that cannot connect to AgStar For these total stations instead of the automatic connection you can take a shot read the instrument and then manually enter the data into AgStar As with other total stations the first step is to run Total Station Setup to establish the occupied point backsight and instrument rod heights before running AgStar functions Then in AgStar functions when you pick the Read button the program will bring up a dialog for entering the angles and distance The angles should be entered in dd mmss format degrees minutes seconds Navcom Configuration Guide This guide will walk you through the setup process for your Navcom units It covers individual unit setup as well as base rover setup under the simple
61. methods e Form This method allows you to fill out a form that you can print out and fax or mail to Carlson Software for registration e Internet If your computer is online you may register automatically over the Internet Your information is sent to a Carlson Software server validated and returned in just a few seconds If you are using a dial up connection please establish this connection before attempting to register e Enter change key Choose this method after you have received your change key from Carlson Software if you previously used the Form method above e Register Later Choose this method if your want to register later You may run Agstar for 30 days before you are required to register 2 After you choose the registration method press Next Registration Wizard xi Reg Method Install Info User Info Authorize Reason for Installation New install or maintenance upgrade of Carlson Software Home use See License Agreement Re installation of Carlson Software Windows or AutoCAD Upgrade New Hardware new hard drive network card new computer 3 Choose the reason for installation The very first time you install Agstar is the only time you will choose the first reason All subsequent installations require a choice from the remaining options Chapter 1 Product Overview 12 New install or maintenance upgrade of Carlson Software If you are installing Agstar for the first t
62. mode the scaler represents the plotted size in inches In Metric mode this value is the plotted size in centimeters The Symbol Plot Size is not entered in Drawing Units e Drawing Units This field shows the result of the Symbol Plot Size value the scaler multiplied by the horizontal scale e Text Plot Size This value is a scaler that represents the size on the plot The Drawing Units are determined by multiplying the scaler by the horizontal scale In English mode the scaler represents the plotted size in inches In Metric mode this value is the plotted size in centimeters The Text Plot Size is not entered in Drawing Units e Drawing Units This field shows the result of the Text Plot Size value the scaler multiplied by the horizontal scale Line Type Scaler This option sets the linetype scale by multiplying this scaler by the horizontal scale 2 Under Angle Mode you determine how angles are entered and displayed e Bearing This option sets reporting to bearing mode for any of the inquiry commands e Azimuth This option sets reporting to north based azimuth mode for any of the inquiry commands e Gon This option sets reporting to gon mode for any of the inquiry commands 3 The Set Paper button allows you to draw a rectangle on the screen that represents the edge of your paper After you have set the horizontal scale press the Set Paper button and the following dialog box appears Chapter 6 Settings Commands 78 Set Paper E
63. numbers from another CRD file or with different point numbers from the same CRD file A report is created for any differences that shows the point numbers and the differences The difference can be reported as a bearing and distance between the two points as distance North South and East West or as the delta X and delta Y There is an option whether to include the point coordinates in the report List Points List the points stored in the CRD file See the List Points command in this chapter for more information Delete Points Deletes points in the file by defining a range of point numbers to delete or by picking a polyline that defines a perimeter from which points inside or outside the perimeter are deleted Screen Pick Point Pick a point on the graphics screen and add or update it s coordinate values to the CRD file This command does not plot a point point attributes or point symbol Use the command Draw Locate Points command to do this Chapter 9 Tools Commands 215 Compare Points Options X m Source of Points for comparison Output Option C Drawing Bearing Distance Current Coordinate File C DeltaXDeltay C Another Coordinate File North South East West m Number of Decimal Places for Northing E asting 0 000 y Elevation 0 000 Report Coordinates Cancel Scale Points This option multiplies the point northing easting and elevation by the scale conversion factor You can use this routine
64. of the characters listed above Special Codes oF hil Carlson points in the drawing have point attributes including a description When Field to Finish draws the points the point description from the coordinate file is processed to match a code The code then defines the description that is drawn with the point For example consider a code of UP with a description of POLE and a data point with the description UP The data point description UP would be matched with the code UP and the point would end up being drawn with the description POLE A special character the forward slash or divide key can be used for an unprocessed description to append Everything after the is added directly to the point description and is not considered a code and no further substitution is done on it For example a data point with the description UP 150 with the same code UP definition above would be drawn with the description POLE 150 eats This special code takes the part of the description after the and puts it as the prefix before the point description For example a data point with the description TR 24ft and a TR code definition with a description of Tree would be drawn with a description of 24 ft Tree my This special code causes text after the to be interpreted as a field code That field code s description is then appended to the first field code s description For example if the field code 02 has the descr
65. on the leader e Mtext Explodes into text entities e Multiline Explodes into lines and arcs e 3D Solid Explodes planar surfaces into regions Nonplanar surfaces explode into bodies e Region Explodes into lines arcs or splines e Body Explodes into a single surface body nonplanar surfaces regions or curves e Polyface Mesh Explodes one vertex meshes into a point object Two vertex meshes explode into a line Three vertex meshes explode into 3D faces Chapter 3 Edit Commands 37 e Circle Within a Nonuniformly Scaled Block Explodes a circle within a nonuniformly scaled block into el lipses e Arc Within a Nonuniformly Scaled Block Explodes an arc within a nonuniformly scaled block into elliptical arcs Menu Location Edit Prerequisite None Keyboard Command EXPLODE X Offset This command creates a new object at a specified distance from an existing object or through a specified point Offset does not support 3D polylines Use Offset 3D Polyline to offset these entities Prompts 1 Specify offset distance or Through lt Through gt Press Enter The Through option allows you to screen pick the location of the offset You can also enter a value for the interval of the offset 2 Select object to offset or lt exit gt select entity 3 Specify through point pick point Menu Location Edit Prerequisite None Keyboard Command OFFSET Trim This command allows you to trim objects at a cutting edge defined b
66. or new configuration of the traverse The graphics window is toggled on or off from the Display Graphics Window menu inside the raw file editor Within the graphics window real time zoom and pan are available You may select whether to zoom or pan from the Display Graphics Window menu also To zoom in press and hold the left mouse button and drag in the direction of the symbol To zoom out press and hold the left button and drag in the direction of the symbol To pan set the graphics window to pan mode then press and hold the left mouse button and then drag to desired position With the Resize Text option on the text becomes smaller larger in the view when you zoom in out Edit Process Raw Data File uses a spreadsheet for editing the raw data as shown Each row of the spreadsheet represents one record of data There are 14 types of data records The type of data record is shown in the first column Different record types use different numbers of columns Whenever the data record type changes between rows a record header is added to the spreadsheet that describes each column of data in the following row To edit the raw data simply highlight the cell and type in the new value To change the type of record pick on the down arrow in the first column and choose a new data type from the list To delete a row highlight any cell in the row and hit the Delete key or choose Delete Row from the Edit menu Records can be added pressing the Insert ke
67. paste procedures Quit To quit choose Quit from the File menu Pull Down Menu Location Display Prerequisite A field design Keyboard Command show_cutsheet Pad Design Report Select Pad Design Report from the Display menu to show the design and benchmark information for each field Chapter 10 Display Commands 246 28134 mS Benchmark Cut Fill Report 05 22 2003 14 33 a Point Northing Easting Elevation Design Z Cut Fill Description 3315 1 162 1 104 0 016 6 485 Fill 6 501 7 Pad Report Subdivision area Field 2 Pad slope percent 0 139 Pad slope azimuth 197 55 52 Pad slope North component 0 132 Pad slope East component 0 043 Grid position 700 00 1500 00 to 1100 00 1300 00 X grid resolution 36 Y grid resolution 56 X grid cell size 50 00 Y grid cell size 50 00 Balance Tolerance C Y 0 10 Cut Swell Factor 1 00 Fill Shrink Factor 1 00 Pad EarthWork Volumes Total fill 493 850 2 C F 18 290 75 C Y Total cut 492 370 4 C F 18 235 94 C Y Max cut fill 4 455 0 719 ft Area 1932098 1 Sq Ft 44 355 Acres Cut per Acre 411 14 cy acre Pull Down Menu Location Display Prerequisite A field design Keyboard Command bmark_cf report Display Options These settings apply to various AgStar commands Point Size Sets the size of surveyed points in the drawing Benchmark Size Sets the size of benchmark points in the drawing Surface Inspector Label Size Sets t
68. references xrefs Image names can include up to 255 characters and can contain letters digits spaces and any special characters not used by Microsoft Windows or Carlson Survey The image name can be identical to the file name but changing the image name does not change the file name e Tree View This button displays all the image definitions and the levels of nesting of images within xrefs The top level of the tree view shows images that you attached directly to the drawing images nested in block references and the names of externally referenced drawings containing images The names of the images attached to the externally referenced drawings appear nested within the drawing at the next tree level To insert a copy of an already attached image select it and then choose Attach Tree view lists the image names only not file names and lists the image name just once regardless of how many times you attach insert the image You can edit an image name by selecting it and then clicking it again or by selecting it and then pressing F2 However you cannot select more than one image at a time Chapter 5 Draw Commands 69 e Attach This option displays the Select Image File dialog box When you unload and then reload an image the program draws that image on top Images remain loaded or unloaded from one drawing session to the next e Detach This option removes the selected image definitions from the drawing database and erases all
69. s status changes to Not Found If you do not choose Save Path after editing the path the program uses the original image path the next time you load the drawing 2 Under the Image dialog box you can attach an image Image El xi Name m155041 y Browse MV Retain Path Path G TWDOTSON GeoTiff m155041 tif Insertion point Scale Rotation IV Specify on screen IV Specify on screen I Specify on screen x po roo Anale E Y foo zZ fono E Cancel Help Details gt gt 3 In the Image dialog box you must first identify the image and the path e Name This field identifies the image you have selected to attach either from the Select Image File dialog box an unattached image or from the list of previously attached images To add another instance of an image file that is already attached select the image name from the list and choose OK e Browse This option opens the Select Image File dialog box a standard file selection dialog box If Show Preview is selected the program displays a preview of the selected file e Retain Path This option saves the path of the image file with the image definition If Retain Path is not selected only the image name is saved and AgStar searches the Support File Search Path 4 Under Insertion Point you must specify the insertion point for the selected image Specify On Screen is the default The default insertion point is 0 0 Chapter 5 Draw Comm
70. set this option by using the PICKAUTO system variable e Object Grouping Selects all objects in a group when you select one object in that group With GROUP you can create and name a set of objects for selection You can also set this option by setting the PICKSTYLE system variable to 1 e Associative Hatch Determines which objects are selected when you select an associative hatch If this option is selected boundary objects are also selected when you select an associative hatch You can also set this option by setting the PICKSTYLE system variable to 2 2 Under Pickbox Size you control the display size of the Carlson Survey pickbox The pickbox is the object selection tool that appears in editing commands The default size is set to 3 pixels values range from 0 to 20 You can also set the Pickbox Size by using the PICKBOX system variable If you use the command line to set Pickbox Size values range from 0 to 32767 3 Under Grips you control the settings that relate to grips Grips are small squares displayed on an object after it has been selected Enable Grips Controls whether grips are displayed on an object after you select it You can edit an object with grips by selecting a grip and using the shortcut menu Enabling grips in a drawing significantly affects performance Clear this option to optimize performance e Enable Grips within Blocks Controls how grips are displayed on a block after you select it If this option is selecte
71. show only points on a certain layer If a character is detected that cannot be used in a layer name the layer name will be truncated at the invalid character For example a point description of UP 105 would use layer UP The Field to Finish command is a more powerful method to insert points by description Layer Prefix This string is added to the beginning of the layer name when using Layer by Dec For example a Layer Prefix of PNT_ and a point with the description EP would use the layer PNT_EP Layer Prefix is optional It allows all the point layers to be grouped so that you can select all the point layers by PNT Draw Nodes Only When checked only the AutoCAD POINT entities are inserted and not the point block and symbol This option is most useful when there are a lot of points to insert because inserting the nodes only is much faster AgStar routines like Triangulate amp Contour and Make 3D Grid File can use these points and do not need the point block and symbol Elev Text Only When checked the text of the point elevation is drawn without the point block symbol or node The decimal place of elevation text is placed at the northing and easting point location Draw Locate Points X Symbol Name SPT99 i ael Symbol Rotation Azimuth 0 0000 o M Layer by Desc Layer Prefix PT TF Draw Nodes Only T Elev Text Only Locate within FT Polyline FT Distance I Coordinate Range Point Prompt Label Settings IV
72. snaps at all times You can also set OSNAPCOORD to 1 to enable Keyboard Entry e Keyboard Entry Except Scripts Specifies that coordinate entry overrides running object snaps except in scripts You can also set OSNAPCOORD to 2 to enable Keyboard Entry Except Scripts 5 Under Object Sorting Methods you determine the sort order of objects e Object Selection Controls how objects are sorted during selection If this option is selected Carlson Survey sorts objects available for selection from those created first to those created last If two overlapping objects are chosen during object selection the program recognizes the newest object as the selected object If this option is cleared object selection is determined by a random sort order This setting is saved in the drawing e Object Snap Controls how objects are sorted when using Object Snap If this option is selected Carlson Survey sorts objects available for selection from those created first to those created last If two overlapping objects are chosen when using Object Snap the program recognizes the newest object as the object to snap to If this option is cleared Object Snap is determined by a random sort order This setting is saved in the drawing e Redraws Controls how objects are sorted when using the REDRAW command If this option is selected the program sorts and redraws objects in the drawing from those created first to those created last If this option is cleared the redrawi
73. technical support email address is support carlsonsw com Internet The Knowledge base is available at update carlsonsw com kbase Program updates and patches are available at update carlsonsw com Technical support documents are available at www carlsonsw com Phone or Facsimile Phone 606 564 5028 Fax 606 564 6422 Fax for registrations only 606 564 9525 Please submit your company name product version and serial number with all support inquiries Chapter 1 Product Overview 18 File Commands 2 New This command allows you to create a new drawing file Create New Drawing lea Ed DO Use a Template Select a Template Stariso dwt Tsunami dwt Browse Template Description Carlson Survey Default This command defines the settings for a new drawing There are two methods that you can use to create a new drawing The first option Open a Drawing is not available from the NEW command To open an existing drawing use the OPEN command Choose one of the icons at the top of the dialog box 1 Under Start from Scratch you can start a new drawing file This command starts a new drawing using default settings defined in either the surv dwt or surviso dwt template depending on the measurement system you ve chosen You cannot modify the surv dwt or surviso dwt templates To start a new drawing based on a customized template see Use a Template e English This option s
74. text file with point number easting northing elevation description and space delimiters 1 5000 0 5000 0 490 3 TRAV 2 5030 4 4930 5 495 5 TRAV The Coordinate Order would be PXYZD Chapter 9 Tools Commands 209 Common formats can be selected from the Common Format List All the lines in the text file should contain only point data and any header lines should be removed To read the text file pick the Select Text ASCII File button and choose the file to read Then the selected file is displayed in the Preview Window to help with filling out the Coordinate Order When the Coordinate Order is set click OK to read the text file The Wild Card Descriptions Match allows for only point with matching descriptions to be imported With Point Protect active the program will check if a point number already ex ists in the CRD before importing the point If a point conflict is found you can either assign a new point number or overwrite the old point The Value to Add to Point Numbers allows you to renumber the points as they are imported The Header Lines to Skip value is the number of lines not to be processed at the start of the text file Multiple files can be imported at once In the Select Text ASCII Files routine you can select multiple files by using the Shift or Ctrl keys while picking files You can also run Select Text ASCII Files multiple times The files to import are listed in the top scroll display window The point data from all the i
75. the Read GPS option in the Add function The rover GPS solution must be in fixed status when the alignment point Chapter 7 Survey Commands 138 is added By reading the rover GPS position for the alignment points the alignment will transform the coordinates from the GPS system of the current base setup to your local coordinate system Load allows you to open an existing alignment file Only one alignment file can be open at a time Alignment files have a DAT extension and stored in the Data directory by default Save stores alignment files DAT extensions to a file Files are by default stored to the Data subdirectory The OK button will set the current alignment to the settings in the dialog Alignment Methods AgStar can operate by the following Alignment methods Alignment Method 1 No alignment points Alignment Method 2 One point alignment Alignment Method 3 Two or more alignment points Alignment Method 1 With no alignment of the rover AgStar will report Northing and Easting as State Plane or UTM coordinates In order for this method to give accurate State Plane or UTM coordinate values the GPS base receiver must be set up over a known point and configured using the true Lat Long Hgt or true State Plane coordinates If the base is set over an arbitrary point configured by reading the GPS the RTK GPS stored coordinates will be translated up to a 200 feet but accurate in relation to each other When using this method
76. the Navcom unit If the command is successful all three status lights on the unit should go solid temporarily After performing a soft reset you will have to go to the Configure Port Submenu to reconfigure the control port Click Factory Reset to send an emergency reset command to the Navcom unit However in nearly all cases it is only necessary to use the Soft Reset button After performing a factory reset you will have to go to the Configure Port Submenu to reconfigure the control port View Firmware Submenu This submenu displays the Navcom firmware version your unit is using along with the hardware serial numbers and the hardware model name Navigation Status Submenu If Valid Navigation reads Yes your unit has successfully solved its position If it reads No the unit s position has not yet been calculated and an error message explaining why will be displayed in the Error field A rover will not try to use RTK corrections unless its navigation is valid Similarly a base will not broadcast correction unless its navigation is valid Navigation Status will read AUTONOMOUS if it is not receiving the type of corrections it has been configured to use It will read FLOAT if it is receiving the right kind of corrections but hasn t finished using them to calculate its position It will read LOCK when it is receiving corrections and has successfully used them to calculate its position Navigation Mode displays the specific type of correction
77. the saved image file m For Color images Use Windows functionality Alt Tab to switch focus to the Google Earth application and use the Google Earth gt File gt Save gt Save Image command Ctrl Alt S to save the current Google Earth image Once saved Click OK on the Carlson alert dialog box shown above and locate select the image just saved Click Open when the file has been located Pulldown Menu Location Draw gt Images Keyboard Command google image Prerequisite Coordinate projection system Functioning version of Google Earth Internet connection Custom Linework Label Formatter This command allows you to customize the labeling for lines and polylines You are first prompted to select a line or polyline to label given the existing defaults currently set The linework is shown as labeled on the screen The command line shown below also offers you an important choice called Options When you type O for options the below dialog box appears In this dialog there are three columns at the top of the dialog along with other features On the command line there is also a choice called Format F which allows you to enter quick key style keywords for quickly changing the label format See below for these Chapter 5 Draw Commands 73 Custom Line Label x Row Side Order fi ef fabove fae El persia fa feo Elf El Orientation Parale Position Types Above Below y FF Inside Outside For Closed Polylines f Angle
78. to be drawn For example entering EP for the wildcard would drawn only points with a description of EP An asterisk is the default setting it matches any character sequence meaning no filtering occurs Erase Duplicates When this option is checked Draw Locate Points will detect and erase duplicate points on the screen For example if you are drawing points 1 10 and point 6 is already in the drawing point 6 will be erased before points 1 10 are drawn Layer Name Specify the layer name for AgStar points You may pick the Select Layer button to select from the list of existing layers Draw Range This command will draw a user specified range of points from the current CRD file Draw All This command will draw all the points in the CRD file and then the program will perform a zoom extents the display to show the points Enter and Assign This command can be used to create new points by typing in the point northing and easting Screen Pick Point This command allows you to create points by picking the point coordinate on the screen For example you could set the Object Snap to EndPoint and pick the end point of a building polyline to create a point at the building corner Prompts To create a new point Locate Point dialog Choose Screen Pick Point Pick point to create pick point Enter Point Elevation lt 500 gt 498 43 This prompt only appears if elevation prompting is turned on Enter point description HUB This prompt o
79. to use the point coordinates highlighted by the preview arrow Define 1st angle by Line Points Right Azimuth Bearing lt Bearing gt L Select Line or Polyline that Defines 1st Bearing select line 2nd Base point Point number or pick point pick point Define 2nd bearing by Line Points Right Azimuth Bearing lt Line gt Enter to use preview point or pick 1st point that defines 2nd bearing Pick point or Point number pick point 2nd point that defines 2nd bearing Pick point or Point number pick point The point is then located at the computed point of intersection Bearing Bearing Intersect Bearing Distance Intersect Pull Down Menu Location Tools Locate at Intersect gt Prerequisite Execute Drawing Setup to set Defaults BearingDistance Intersect The Bearing Distance Intersection command prompts the user for a base point from which the known bearing intersects Then define the bearing by one of three methods The bearing can be defined by picking two points selecting a line with the same bearing or by typing in the bearing in the form of Qdd mmss similar to the Locate by Bearing command Next the user is prompted for a base point from which the known distance radiates After entering the known distance a circle is drawn radiating from the selected base point and a line defined by the bearing is extended to intersect the circle The user then picks the correct point for the solution desired and a point symbol is loca
80. whichever port is to be used to interface the receiver with the computer running AgStar Port 1 by default Next set both the input and the output to transmit receive in NMEA at 9600 baud rate The final option Remote Select should be set to Primary b Now the NMEA sentences must be configured From the I O menu enter the NMEA Sentences submenu Disable all sentences save for the GGA sentences and the GSA sentences Ensure the Talker ID is GP From here Return to the I O menu c The NMEA Control menu item reachable from the I O menu has three options The Output Rate here should be set to 7 second the Position Output Rate set to Output Rate and the NMEA Output Version to 2 1 Next the GPS settings must be configured and can be found in the GPS menu under the main Setup menu Chapter 7 Survey Commands 134 The GPS Mode should be set to 3D and the DGPS mode set to Auto The DGPS source should be toggled to Internal and the Pos Vel Filter should be Off Mask Values should be left at Default and the SNR at M Finally the Beacon Receiver configuration under Beacon Receiver on the Setup Menu needs to have its Search Mode set to Auto Dist Mode All other values in all menus ought to either be left at their default settings or configured as necessary to the local conditions in the case of antenna height etc 2 The RMS value reported in AgStar is the RMS value of the standard deviation of the range inputs to the navigation
81. will be applied Process Options xi Report Angle Format C Bearing C Azimuth C Angle Right e By File r Calculate Elevations All C SideShots Only C None M Report SideShots 7 Point Protect I Create Point Notes Decimal Places for Report 0 000 Use Report Formatter Calculate State Plane Scale Factor at Each Setup Zone 27 83 Scale Factor 7 Correct for Earth Curvature Y Report Closure r Reference Closing Point OPTIONAL PtH North e East sf Ely UK Cancel Help The dialog box prompts for the following options e Direct Reverse Vertical Angles For any direct reverse raw data you can choose to process the direct reverse shots using only the foresight direct shot or to balance all shots e Report Angle Format This setting specifies the angle format for the report The By File option specifies that the report should use the angle format in the RWS file e Calculate Elevations The Calculate Elevations option controls for which points elevations will be calculated For example if the traverse point elevations have already been adjusted and you need to recalculate the sideshot elevations then use the SideShots Only option e Report SideShots This option specifies whether to include the sideshot data in the process results report e Point Protect This option will check the coordinate file for existing point data before processing If the foresight point number
82. will store the project scale factor in the note field for the point Chapter 7 Survey Commands 114 Time Date in Point Notes This option will store the time and date that the point was stored in the note file AgStar will read the time from the computer Drawing Options control how points are drawn by default It controls the layer symbol number and whether points will be drawn with descriptions and elevations AgStar s Field to Finish code table can override these defaults The symbol used for default points is displayed You can choose another symbol by changing the Symbol name or by selecting one from the table that the Select Symbol button brings up Default point settings are used for points whose descriptions don t correspond to any category on the Field to Finish code table Label Descriptions and Label Elevations Control whether these two items of information appear on your drawing next to each point Locate on Real Z Axis will record points with their true elevations If this setting is off all points recorded will have an elevation of zero Layer for Points indicates the layer where all default points will be drawn For points using a code on the code table the code table will determine their layer Number of Readings specifies how many times AgStar will read from the instrument in the Read function of the Point Store command This applies to both GPS and total stations The readings will be averaged to find a more accur
83. you can skip Align GPS to Local Crds and start surveying immediately once the base is configured and transmitting its position and the rover is fixed In most cases you cannot use Method 1 because you will not have setup the base on a point whose exact true position you know Therefore the base corrections are going to be off a certain distance north south and a certain distance east west This is why you want to do an alignment You are showing AgStar how to correct for the north south and east west offsets Any points surveyed with the alignment file active will be translated to their proper position To gather alignment points you put the GPS antenna over a point with known coordinates and AgStar records the GPS Lat Lon Elv and the Northing Easting Elevation you give it This point can be a local coordinate for example a stake you are calling 5000 5000 It can also be a true State Plane point Using one or more State Plane points will give you an alignment to true State Plane even if your base is not using its own true position Alignment Mehtod 2 This method uses one alignment point to translate the GPS coordinates to local or true State Plane coordinates Remember that if the base is set up over an arbitrary point the GPS coordinates can be off from true state plane by up to 200 feet This alignment method can be used to correct for this by translating the system onto true state plane coordinates You can choose if you want the coordinate
84. you control options that relate to the pointing device This field displays a list of the available pointing device drivers e Current System Pointing Device Sets the system pointing device as current e Wintab Compatible Digitizer Sets the Wintab Compatible Digitizer as current Accept Input From Specifies whether the program accepts input from both a mouse and a digitizer or ignores mouse input when a digitizer is set 2 Under General Options you control general options that relate to system settings e Single Drawing Compatibility Mode Specifies whether a single drawing interface SDI or a multi drawing interface MDI is enabled If you select this option Carlson Survey opens only one drawing at a time If you clear this option the program can open multiple drawings at once e Display OLE Properties Dialog Controls the display of the OLE Properties dialog box when inserting OLE objects into a drawing Show All Warning Messages Displays all dialog boxes that include a Don t Display This Warning Again option All dialog boxes with warning options are displayed regardless of previous settings specific to each dialog box Chapter 6 Settings Commands 94 Beep on Error in User Input Specifies whether the program should sound an alarm beep when it detects an invalid entry e Allow Long Symbol Names Determines whether long symbol names are enabled Named objects can include up to 255 characters Names can include letters
85. 1 000 100 m Serial COM Port COMI C COM2 C COM3 C COMA m COM Port Settings Baud Rate a600 y Parity None gt Char Length ls y Stop Bits hi y Defaults i Cancel Help ing a serial cable This cable is plugged into a serial COM port on your computer called 1 2 3 or 4 Check the circle denoting the COM Port to be used The Baud Rate Parity Char Length and Stop Bits are the serial port communication parameters for the AgStar computer These parameters need to match the parameters on the instrument that you are using The Defaults button will set these communication parameters to the standard parameters for the current equipment type GPS Settings The RMS Tolerance checks the RMS values when reading GPS positions The RMS is the accuracy value reported by the GPS receiver There are separate settings for the horizontal and vertical RMS values The RMS root meaned squared value means that the reported coordinate is within the RMS value of the true coordinate to a certain confidence level The confidence level depends on the GPS receiver Typically 1t is a 98 confidence If either RMS value exceeds the user defined tolerance while storing points AgStar will default to No when it asks if you want to store the point You are required to choose yes to override the tolerance check and store the point Suggestion When GPS RTK systems loose lock and go Float both the horizontal and vert
86. 2 or the setting will be ignored Chapter 9 Tools Commands 194 Custom Attributes E x Attributes must not be Constant or Preset Teg PE Vabe SPE se Decimals fo y Tag 2 SIZE ee Pisisize paa 00 y Tag 3 Maio sap Decimals y Tas Vale get s ooo Taj oe m ok Cancel Hep Back Net y x on Set Custom Attribute 2 Parameter Type GIS By Name Name TYPE OK corcel Hee 4 The Values for the attributes can be fixed strings that you enter in the dialog shown here Or they can be dynamic parameters including point northing easting elevation or description for the current point as well as a point note or GIS attribute To setup a parameter value pick the Set button and then select the attribute The Decimals setting applies to fields that are real values Besides labeling as block attributes the Attribute Format method of Text mode is a way to label the at tributes as text entities Symbol Points For each code definition the symbol insertion points can be defined with up to three points To define the symbol insertion points choose the Symbol Pts button in the Edit Code Definition dialog box By default the symbol insertion is defined by one point at the symbol center 0 0 A one point insertion definition can be used to insert a symbol offset from the center With a two insertion point definitions the program will rotate and scale the symbol For example tw
87. 207 0 SQ MILES 0 0 ACRES 1 5 PERIMETER 1018 7 Pick area label centering point Enter for none pick a location When auto placing labels at the rear of lots or when aligning labels by the sides of the lot the user will also be prompted to pick one or more centerlines Select the Centerline Polylines The routine will find the closest centerline and use this to determine the location of the front and back corners of the area When additional interior text is selected the standard report will include that text Polyline Area 11 17 2004 12 49 Polyline Area 43560 0 sq ft 1 00 acres Polyline Perimeter 838 35 ft Text 16 Sf 43560 0 Ac 1 00 In this case the 16 refers to Lot 16 and appears in the report because the lot number and existing area labeling were selected along with the polyline for the lot 64862 9 5Q FT 1 5 ACRES Chapter 9 Tools Commands 230 Pulldown Menu Location Tools gt Area Keyboard Command plarea Prerequisite Set Area Label Defaults BearingBearing Intersect This command locates a point at the intersection of two lines The lines can be defined by picking two points selecting a line or typing in a bearing After the lines are defined a point symbol is located at the point of intersection The figure below shows a graphical example of this command Prompts Enter to use preview point or select 1st Base point Point number or pick point gt Enter Pressing Enter causes the program
88. 2D entity type selection creates a 3d polyline in the layer spec ified in the Dual 3d polyline layer setting and a 2d polyline in the layer identified in the Layer setting Since 3d polylines do not display linetypes this is useful when needing linework in 3d for design work while also needing to display linetypes for final plotting of the drawing This provides an easy and quick way to turn off all 2d polylines or all 3d polylines by using the layer control dialog or the appropriate toggles in the Draw Points dialog Elevation Integers This controls the number of digits to display to the left of the decimal point for the el evation label The All setting will show the full elevation digits The other settings allow you to limit the number of digits to display for the purpose of reducing the amount of space the elevation labels take up in the drawing For example if a site is in the 4000 foot elevation range then this setting could be set to three digits 000 and an elevation of 4321 would be labeled as 321 Elevation Decimals This controls the display precision for the elevation label Chapter 9 Tools Commands 192 Elevation Prefix Suffix These set the prefix and suffix for the elevation label per code In the Draw func tion under Additional Draw Settings there is an override to set the elevation prefix suffix for all the codes Locate Pts on Real Z Axis This option will draw the points at the actual point elevation Otherwise the poin
89. 35 Pick area label centering point pick a point Erase Polyline Yes No lt Yes gt press Enter The command plots a polyline that represents the figure you defined if you want to keep the polyline respond with No E7247 4 SB FT 0 63 ACRES Inverse with Area CRD File gt c data newplat crd PNTNO BEARING DISTANCE NORTHING EASTING STATION DESC 903 4940 73 2490 40 0 00 StartPt S 48 43 58 W 136 21 904 Closure Error Distance gt 0 0000 Chapter 9 Tools Commands 228 Total Distance Inversed gt 1008 07 AREA 74664 6 SQ METERS Pulldown Menu Location Tools gt Areas Keyboard Command ia Prerequisite None Area by Interior Point This command calculates and labels the area of the perimeter surrounding a picked interior point The Boundary Polyline command is used to find the perimeter Generally this command will only work on closed or overlapping objects Use Area by Lines amp Arcs for other applications The settings for the area label and for whether to prompt to create a closed polyline for the area are under the Area Defaults command Prompts Pick point inside area perimeter pick a point Pick area label centering point Enter for none pick a point The area is then plotted at the point selected Pulldown Menu Location Tools gt Area Keyboard Command ptarea Prerequisite Set Area Defaults Area by Closed Polylines This command will calculate and report the area of single area and multiple area closed
90. 3942 Manual Read Chapter 7 Survey Commands 129 Simulation GPS Simulation GPS mode is for demonstration purposes to show or pratice AgStar functions This mode allows you to run AgStar without being hooked up to any equipment The program will automatically generate a position This position is the first point in the alignment If there is no alignment then the starting point is 5000 5000 1000 There are keyboard commands to control the simulation position during continuous read commands such as Stakeout and Track Position Here are the keyboard commands L Turn Left R Turn Right F Go Faster S Slow Down U Up D Down W Switch Direction Sokkia Sokkia Radian IS Hardware Setup 1 Make sure that the Radian IS has fully charged batteries installed as described in the receiver documentation 2 Connect the Radian IS serial cable to COM1 on the Radian IS plugging the other end into the controlling computer s serial port 3 If the Radian IS is to be used as a base connect a PDL base radio to the COM2 port of the receiver If the IS is to be used as a rover connect a PDL rover radio to the COM2 port if the receiver 4 Power the Radian IS on with its external power switch 5 Once the receiver finishes its self initialization when all the lights on the side panel go out and then the battery light lights in just one position it is ready for use with AgStar However positions will not be able
91. 40 165 221 Barscale 75 Bearing 40 42 43 68 78 104 220 4222 231 232 BearingBearing Intersect 231 BearingDistance Intersect 231 Benchmark Boundary Break Break at Intersection Break by Closed Polyline Breakline 199 Centerline Change Change Elevations Change Layer Change Properties 41 Circle close 21 3 BARO RA TOA A A 178 23 25 Close Polylines Closure Command Entry 1 9 Configuration 88 118 12 Configure 101 104 110 121 124 128 130 131 136 141 22 Configure Survey 110 123 129 132H134 137 212 Contours 244 Convert 45 Coordinate File CooRDinate File Utilities 212 Coordinate File Utilities 212 Coordinate Transformation 2 13 Copy 37 91 199 Create 30 32 65 100 159 202 Create Design Surface Points 217 Create Existing Ground Grid 149 CSI GBX Pro 118 Custom 6 7 16 25 06 153 194 Custom Linework Label Formatter Cut Fill CutFill Spreadsheet 244 Cut Sheet 105 Cutsheet 245 DAANA oo pal Q N J NJI O 05 J PIS N ES E 5 PI I AS on l A A o NINN SSeS A ALANS HASS NO Gy Qe pa oo uN ma Eso ES ale m1 ON SER N Pa ERE fos LVS ta Na SEBE ALALA NIMI A NIINI SIS jN TS R se W N N oo gt L90 NJ e NJI 304239 24 1 242 24 Database Data Collecto 235 Data Files
92. 666 177 0135 6 6697 6 6116 Means HorzAngle SD Distance SD Vertical SD 264 3516 6 6624 177 0038 6 6698 96 2931 6 6269 Chapter 9 Tools Commands 240 e Reduce Direct Reverse This command processes the direct and reverse shots and simplifies the raw file by replacing the sets of direct and reverse shots with the resulting average traverse record e Update Raw from Points This command updates the horizontal angle distance and vertical angle data in the raw file using the coordinates from the coordinate file This command can be used to generate a raw file from point numbers only To create raw data from points first create rows of Traverse and or SideShot records in the spreadsheet containing only the occupied and foresight point numbers Set the angle code to the desired format then run Update Raw from Points All the angles and distances will be filled in e Find Bad Angle This command applies the angular error to each traverse record one at a time The adjusted traverse record that improves the closure the most is reported as the Bad Angle The angular error is the difference between the angle balance shot and a reference angle e Append Another Raw File This command prompts for a raw file RW5 The file is read and its data is added to the end of the existing raw file For example if you are editing the raw file from a first day s work and you have a separate raw file containing a second day s work you can use this routine to add th
93. A feature such as a manhole can have multiple attributes such as Number of rungs Type of material Number of inlets etc Features can be organized into Categories Utilities Roads Properties The Category designation is an arbitrary way of organizing the features Features and attributes can be imported from Field to Finish Esri MSC data within the drawing or from older Carlson Template Database Chapter 11 GIS Commands 250 MDB files Features and attributes can of course also be defined from scratch in the Define GIS Features dialog box 1 The first field to set is the GIS file you are working with Use the File menu to create a new GIS file or open an existing one for editing 2 Next set up one or more Category Names using the Category menu GIS feature codes can be categorized e g STRUCTURES UTILITIES ROAD FEATURES etc At least one category must be created 3 Next define Features using the Feature menu e g A category such as UTILITIES might have features such as manholes light poles fire hydrants water valves etc 4 Lastly define the attributes for the Feature Each attribute has a a Name b a Full Name or Prompt c a Type Integer Character or Real d a Default Value these can be preset or read from a list of automatically generated values using the Default button e optionally a List of values to pick from Use the List Values button to build a list f whether the attribute is requi
94. Carlson Agstar Carlson Software Inc User s manual July 23 2012 Contents aa eer rae A hale a eee ae Ey Ad hades a as ridad het ash EEES aia as a a aa meda loe iaa a o a hn ce A bee Chapter 2 File Commands boo os esas Fees es a hese nace eu dee oe eae eee Ger a An A and ede E EEE Ses oe een Fema ye baat ae ea ees pei ada peas Peewee yee ase ae ee a es es e bead tiesa Chapter 3 Move Edit Commands 10 12 14 17 19 20 21 21 21 21 22 26 28 29 29 29 31 33 34 35 36 36 36 36 37 37 38 Eesha BO ge ata eS ee Ap hh Be i 38 a ee ee ee ee ee ee a 39 Gees phe aint A 39 one heen ages OESTE nee hee ees 40 AS 41 SA 41 Shed a Spa ad ed 42 NR ra a a o e a a a ee 42 ee Ghd da rd a a ee ae a ee Wee eee ane ea 44 eer eee eT ee Ot re ee eee te eee Te oe ee ee 44 ay aoe ya Sy eck eee eee a epee ee a ee Ge ee ee 44 Mg glo ale Able a a ae dal Boe we dk whe eee a We a e A 44 Se bd Deg bee thee bot has aa bw So Baek ee ee ee 45 bdo bod aad dod we wh ew oa a wt oS e hk Glee A O 46 oe eee RA 47 DRA be hae EGG Sa Sa Pa ae be we wa dae G Pa be oa a deo 47 be ae tds ed Gg Sathya as sh aa ee ogee Ae ee ee Ob ete Got aes wy 47 eee ee Cee eer ee eee ee ee eee ee 48 Sh ene Oe bate pa a Bar ee Ae dee a he ee a 48 a nd e 48 Praia a ia a ae a aa dew ata af kee a 49 ia o 49 A A ee a a we a 49 a 6S AG aa 50 Pe a fae de aka dada 24 aoe Marke wanda ga kha ds da a ea 50 EE yea POA eee eee oon aes
95. Chapter 9 Tools Commands 197 3 Edit Field Code Definition E x General Symbol Linetype Linetype Name Haybale_C Set Linetype Line Width 0 000 Linetype Text Linetype Spacing Scaler Linetype Text Scaler 0 080 7 Aip Linetype J Smooth Polyline Hard Breakline Connection Order Sequential y Tie Closed y Linework Description Set Template Edit Set lisi Here are the settings on the Linetype tab Set Linetype Line work can be drawn in any of the special linetypes or with the linetype for the layer BYLAYER There are three types of pre defined linetypes CAD Entity and Continuous The type is shown as part of the linetype names in the list The CAD linetypes are the default linetypes available in AutoCAD and IntelliCAD The Entity linetypes insert text or symbol entities at the linetype interval These linetypes are the same as used with the Annotate gt Polyline To Special Line command The Continuous linetypes define a special linetype in CAD and create continuous polylines with that special linetype These linetypes are the same as with the Annotate gt Change Polyline Linetype command Besides these pre defined linetypes within Field to Finish you can also use any linetype that is defined in the drawing by entering that linetype name in the linetype edit box or by picking the Select From Drawing button within the Set Linetype dialog The spacing and size of the special linetypes is determined by th
96. Civil 3D as invisible or excluded are not imported Note e The LandXML initiative is being driven by the land development industry as an acceptable means to share and transfer land data rather than the traditional graphical representation of that data It also provides an effective means for transferring a variety data points centerlines profiles surface models sewer data etc Another advantage of LandXML is that the LandXML data structure is CAD and software vendor neutral meaning you don t have to own or use the CAD or software product used by your data provider e Visit http www landxml org for additional information on the uses and acceptance of the LandXML initia tive Pulldown Menu Location s File gt Import Keyboard Command landxml_import Prerequisite A LandXML file to import Import Google Earth File The Import Google Earth File command allows you to insert a KML Keyhole Markup Language or alternatively a KMZ file of points KML Placemark polylines KML Path and closed polylines KML Polygon into your drawing Throughout this discussion KML will be used to also describe KMZ files unless explicitly noted IV Import Lines and Polygons IV Import Points IV Point Protect JV Use Folders as Layers Default Layer ANNO SYMB Select Layer Lok Cae He Import Lines and Polygons When this option is selected KML Path and Polygon entries will be placed into the drawing as open or closed polylines respective
97. Color E 1 red Layer FINAL Linetype BYLAYER CONTINUOUS Cancel Help 1 In the Change Properties dialog box you must choose the properties to modify e Color This option allows you to change the color of the object e Layer This option allows you to change the layer of the object e Linetype This option allows you to change the linetype of the object e Linetype Scale This option specifies the linetype scale factor for the new linetype e Thickness This option specifies the distance to extrude the object above or below its elevation Chapter 3 Edit Commands 41 Note The Properties command allows you to modify entity specific properties such as the radius of a circle or the height of a text entity Menu Location Edit Change gt Prerequisite None Keyboard Command DDCHPROP Change Elevations This command allows you to change the elevation of selected entities You can move the entity to a specified elevation from its current elevation absolute or you can specify a differential change to be added to or subtracted from an entity s current elevation If AgStar points are selected their attribute text and Z axis Elevation coordinate are changed Elevation values are not changed in the current coordinate file You must choose the command Update CRD File from Drawing under Coordinate File Utilities on the Points menu to update the elevation values in the current coordinate file Prompts 1 Ignore
98. E and the field code 04 translates to 4 The advantage to the PointCAD method is that you don t have to keep track of line numbers For example if you are surveying 50 curb lines the first method would require you to use 50 distinct curb numbers The advantage to the first method is that you don t have to use the start and end codes Also the Nearest Found connection option applies to the first method Draw Chapter 9 Tools Commands 173 Draw Field to Finish Draw Options Highest point number 54 Entities to Draw Paints Lines Symbols 3D Faces Draw within C Polyline C Distance C Window Coordinate Rage Layer Prefix Additional Draw Options Erase Existing Field to Finish Entities Erase In Range C Preview Only C Fix Overlaps Code Table C son projects Settings Carlson fld GIS Table C Temp5 S patial gis Edit Codes Points Report Codes Points Point Label Settings Elev Label Settings M Poi Elevations Label Zeros Descriptions Prefix and Suffix By Code Prefix Suffix C Point Notes O Use Use Locate Points on Real Z Axis O Un Oof By Code Locate Linework on Real Z Axis O Dn Oorff By Code PC PT Curve Type Bezier O Sequential Arcs O Best Fit Creating Point Groups C Automatically By Code nore Code Suf By Code Definition Group Name Prefix Creating Point Notes Create Drawing Description Notes Create Special Code Notes C Flip Text for Twist Screen for Rotate to Lin
99. Eagle Point Geopak InRoads or TMOSS defaults Select Default ns Eagle Point Geopak IA DOT Geopak MB DOT Geopak MI DOT Geopak MO DOT Geopak NC DOT Geopak OH DOT m InRoads MD SHA InRoads NV DOT InRoads NY DOT InRoads WA DOT TMOSS CO DOT Go Code Table continued Sort Table This sorts the code table by either code name or layer Report Codes Points This routine prints the code table or the data file to the screen file or printer A useful option here is to print the data file CRD Points and choose Sort by Codes which will group the data points by distinct codes Chapter 9 Tools Commands 187 Report Codes Points Batedor ty ater Jo Grip Renort Godes in earen CAD M Use Report Formatter fio Use Leica komat Code Table by CRD This command will create code table definitions based on the coordinate file field descrip tions This is useful when creating a code table from scratch Save Saves the Draw Field to Finish field code definition FLD file Save As Reacts the same as Save but allows for specification of file name and location to save to Code Definitions Edit If only one field code is selected then this command opens the Edit Field Code Definition dialog box If multiple field codes are selected by holding down the control key or shift key and clicking on the rows then the Multiple Set dialog box will open
100. Folder gt lt Folder gt entry with the color of the group taking the general color of the CAD layer Shade Closed Regions When enabled all closed polyline regions e g building pads ponds etc will be fill shaded Export to KMZ Format When enabled the KML file is written to the more compact zipped KMZ version of the standard KML file format Display Results in Google Earth When enabled the results of the KML are passed to and automatically opened with Google Earth Note e When the Use Elevations from the Drawing 3D option is selected be aware that elevation values lower than the Google Earth terrain may be obstructed in the Google Earth display e Attribute information e g Number Elevation Description of selected Carlson points are also written to the KML and will display in the balloon when a point is picked in the Google Earth display or data hierarchy Chapter 2 File Commands 33 When the Shade Closed Regions toggle is enabled note that all closed polyline regions will become fill shaded and may lead to undesired results for items such as closed contours When prompted for the name of the KML KMZ file to write the appropriate KML or KMZ file extension based on the Export to KMZ Format toggle will be added to the file if the file extension is not specified Arcs and polylines with arcs are converted into chord segments that closely approximate the arc s Other entities not supported for direct export to
101. Follow Elevation C Documents and Settings Dave C My Documents jerry4 2 dwag Fle Edit View Draw Survey Design Tools Display Window Help lel x jose a cehermma a rivyraqgagas al a dal t y Northing 1537 800 Target Elevation 0 002 Easting 4857 935 s a airea o lees Elevation 0 335 Q Uphit on right SIMULATION CUT 0 337 Exit Status LOCK HR 0 000 Command follow_elev 3 4 442416981 1550 4560 0 0000 SNAP GRID ORTHO POLAR OSNAPJOTRACK LWT MODEL 4 Set the direction of inclination as you go select Uphill on Left or Uphill on Right Without knowing which way uphill is the software will not be able to guide you along the proper course 5 When complete click Exit Pull Down Menu Location Tools Prerequisite Locked RTK Keyboard Command follow_elev Distance MeasureSwathing This routine has two uses To measure a driven distance and to create or follow a swath of a desired width Chapter 9 Tools Commands 158 Z Swathing C Documents and Settings Dave C My Documents jerry4 2 dwg Fie Edt View Draw Survey Design Tools Display Window Hep Del Sno 52040 HWF VRQQeaRar Menu F11 A del Y Swathing Width 1 000 Start F1 Offset Tolerance 1 000 Exit F Draw Trail Create Swath Measure Distance ic Follow Swath Path L en l zi Hla MA Model EKI Dj rf ommand swathing E UE 1 49 7657 705 6900 0 0000 SNAP GR
102. I OSNAP 4 When two arrows appear click on the desired endpoint 5 You will now be prompted to assign names to the two new areas See instructions on Assign Subdivision Area Name for what to do next Note that you must assign a name to any new section before you can design it Pull Down Menu Location Design Prerequisite A closed perimeter Keyboard Command draw_subdivide Assign Subdivision Area Name Before you can design a subdivision it must first be named Steps 1 When prompted to select a subdivision area click on the subdivision area you wish to name It should change color 2 When prompted type the desired area name and press ENTER Chapter 8 Design Commands 152 Pick point inside area to assign Enter name for area Field 1 320 5247 316 0053 0 0000 SNAP GRID ORTHO POLAR OSNAPJOTRACK LWT Pull Down Menu Location Design Prerequisite Draw or survey subdivision Keyboard Command set_subperim Area Name Inspector This feature allows you to view the names of each field subarea by dragging the mouse over it Steps 1 Drag the mouse over each existing area to view its name 2 When finished press ESCAPE Chapter 8 Design Commands 153 Area Field 1 Command view _subperim love pointer into area to display name Enter to end C2696634 0022469 0000 SNAP GRID ORTHO POLAR OSNAPJOTRACK LWT Pull Down Menu Location Design Prerequisite The na
103. ID ORTHO POLAR OSNAP OTRACK LWT MODEL Distance Measure To measure a distance set the toggle to Create Swath Measure Distance and press Start The distance will be reported as you go To restart the measurement press Restart To exit press Exit You will then be asked whether or not you would like to save the trail you have driven in the drawing Create Swath Set the toggle to Create Swath Measure Distance Set the swathing width to the desired width of the swath in feet If you would like to be guided with arrows in such a way that each swath row is a specified distance from the adjacent swath row set the swathing tolerance to the desire value Press Start to begin E Swathing C Documents and Settings Dave C My Documents jerry4 2 ciwg lel xj Fle Edit View Draw Survey Design Tools Display Window Help lel x 05909 gt CONTRA A yraqgagas A el Y Northing 207520 ER a Restart SIMULATION sttustock Distance 1886 8 14 of If you want your swaths to be adjacent on screen arrows or a connected lightbar will begin to direct you once you have completed a row Press exit to finish Chapter 9 Tools Commands 159 Follow Swath Set the toggle to Follow Swath Set the swathing tolerance to the amount of variation in feet you are willing to tolerate from the swath you will follow If you would like to draw a trail of the path you drive leave Draw Swath checked Press Start You will be prompted to
104. L NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT SPECIAL INCIDENTAL CONSEQUENTIAL OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF OR IN ANY WAY RELATING TO THIS EULA OR THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE PRODUCT INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF GOODWILL WORK STOPPAGE LOST PROFITS LOSS OF DATA AND COMPUTER FAILURE OR MALFUNCTION EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES AND REGARDLESS OF THE THEORY CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE UPON WHICH SUCH CLAIM IS BASED THE LICENSOR GROUP S COLLECTIVE LIABILITY UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT EXCEED THE GREATER OF 500 FIVE HUNDRED DOLLARS AND THE FEES PAID BY YOU UNDER THIS LICENSE IF ANY 9 Update Policy LICENSOR may from time to time revise the performance of its product s and in do ing so incur NO obligation to furnish such revisions to any End User nor shall it warrant or guarantee that any revision to the SOFTWARE will perform as expected by the End User on End User s equipment At LICENSOR s option LICENSOR may provide such revisions to the End User 10 Customer Service Although it is the LICENSOR s customary practice to provide reasonable assistance and support in the use of its products to its customers LICENSOR shall not be obligated to any End User to provide technical assistance or support through this Agreement and may at LICENSOR s sole election charge a fee for customer support 11 Termination of End User License If any one or more of the provisions of this Agreement is breached
105. NI ES WN NI n N U Q es HR 00 n A o NW A NO NO al OO 1 N I NO Ni NO NN 3 Text EnlargeRe Text Size 44 Text Style 44 TFW file 71 Thaw Layer 58 TIF file Title Block 103 TO 2759 8 97 59 018 027 029 052 Toolbars 86 Tools Commands 156 Topcon Total Stations 132 eS NI ON 3 a TR Training Movies Transit Translate Points 216 Traverse 2211223 233235 238 241 242 Triangulation Trim Trimble PJ P 3AA 178 210 TS ESNEA BLON ANST Twist Twist Screen Line 57 Twist Screen Standard 56 57 Twist Screen Surveyor 57 Typical Alignment Scenarios 140 Undo 36 Units Control 79 104 Universal Transverse Mercator 2 13 Index 266 Update T6 42 108 Update Drawing from CRD File 214 Vertical Angle Vertical Angle Mode 104 169 View 25 26 52160 69 72 73 O 10 127 138 View Commands Volume Watershed Analysis Wild Wildsoft Write Polyline File Zeiss Zone Polylines 30 Zoom Center Zoom Extents Zoom Previous Zoom Window 54 Zoom IN Zoom OUT Index 267
106. ORTHO NORTHOS N GS ate NORTHO9 NORTH10 NORTH11 NORTH12 Pulldown Menu Location Draw Keyboard Command narrow Prerequisite None Chapter 5 Draw Commands 76 Settings Commands 6 Drawing Setup Function This command displays a dialog box for setting drawing parameters including the plotting scale size of symbols label annotation size and the drawing mode Drawing Setup xi Scale and Size Settings English 1in ft Metric 1m m Horizontal Scale 100 0 Symbol Plot Size 0 0800 Drawing Units 8 0000 D E Text Plot Size 0 0800 Drawing Units Line Type Scaler 0 5000 Angle Mode Bearing Azimuth C Gon C Other Cancel Set Paper Help 1 Under Scale and Size Settings you can determine scale and size of drawing entities e English lin ft This option tells Carlson Survey which unit mode to use This affects the prompting and reports When you are working on a drawing in English units one unit equals one foot In metric one unit equals one meter e Metric 1m m This option sets the metric scale to meters only Horizontal Scale This option allows you to set the horizontal scale of the drawing For example if the horizontal scale is set to 50 then 1 50 in your drawing e Symbol Plot Size This value is a scaler that represents the size on the plot The Drawing Units are determined by multiplying the scaler by the horizontal scale In English
107. Offset Scalers Above 1 000 Below 1 000 Left 0 000 Right 0 000 E Create as MTEXT STANDARD Set PNTTXT e Northing Easting Decimals 0 00 y E Bev Label Decimal on Point E Avoid Overlap with Block Attributes ox canes Heb Also for points notes and SurvCE GIS attributes you can choose to all or selected fields For selected use the Add Edit and Remove buttons to build the list of fields to label To specify the field to label the Sequence method sets the field by its order position For example a sequence of 3 would use the third attribute for the point The Name method sets the field to label by field name such as HRMS For each field there are settings for the rotation prefix suffix position decimals layer and style The deci mals setting applies to GIS fields that are real numbers Chapter 9 Tools Commands 191 Note GIS Label Settings l Specify Attribute By O Sequence Name Sequence jw Rotation 0 0 Prefix Suffix Position Lower Right Layer NOTE Set Style STANDARD Set a a Besides labeling attributes as text with this method the Custom Attributes feature is a way to label attributes as block attributes Separate Attribute Layers This controls the layers of the point and symbol attributes With None the point layers are the standard layers PNTNO PNTELEV and PNTDESC and the symbol layer is PNT MARK With Points or Both the point attribute layers begin w
108. P11 codes will both be automatically added to the Point Group named EP No matter how the Point Group is created the Group Name Prefix can be used to add a prefix to the group name Note if the Point Group already exists it will be erased first before being created again by either of these two methods Creating Point Notes These options append point notes to the coordinate file data for some of the data fields processed by Field to Finish These notes can then be used by other commands like List Points to report these fields For example this enables List Points to report both the point coordinate file description as well as the point drawing description as generated by Field to Finish Flip Text for Twist Screen This option will rotate the point labels and symbol by 180 degrees when needed to make them right side up readable relative to the current twist screen drawing view This option applies to the Rotate To Line and Rotate special code ROT Pause on Undefined Codes When checked Draw Field to Finish will pause if it encounters a description that is not defined in the code table Undefined code found prior to drawing X Point 1 has undefined code Abort without drawing anything C Use default settings for this point Use default settings for all undefined codes Chapter 9 Tools Commands 175 Abort without drawing anything This stops the command Run Draw Field to Finish again to correct the code tabl
109. Pick a point inside polygon Select Number lt Pick gt pick a point GIS Smart Prompting dialog make selections GIS Smart Prompting Entity has GIS Data View Related GIS Data Current Output MDB C Documents and Settings grosen My Documents UTILS mdb Parent T able Info Related T able Info Name MH_MAINTENANCE Name MH_SPECS Field MHNUM Field MHNUM Value 12344 Number of Records 1 ESE Installed 2 1 1995 I Eb Current Template MDB IC Carlson Project Image Utilities n nverts 2 Pulldown Menu Location GIS Keyboard Command gisdata Prerequisite MDB GIS prompting must be created in Define Template Database and points or entities must exist to link GIS information to GIS Inspector This command displays all or portions of the data attached to drawing entities in real time How much of the attached data is displayed is set by the command GIS Inspector Settings When you move the cursor over an entity with GIS data selected fields are displayed in a tooltip box next to the cursor For data attached to closed polylines you can move the cursor anywhere inside the polyline to show the data Polylines that are closed will highlight with a solid fill as you inspect each one Open polylines such as road centerlines will highlight with a solid fill generated along the length of the polyline The solid fill color for all highlighting is set in GIS Inspector Settings The routine start
110. Pick point or point numbers gt C The close option draws a line segment back to the original starting point Menu Location Draw Prerequisite None Keyboard Command 2DLINE 2D Polyline Function This command draws a polyline entity You can either provide point numbers from the current coordinate file or pick points on the screen to define coordinates A Polyline is a series of line and or arc segments joined together in one entity or object Prompts 1 Pick point or point numbers pick point 2 Undo Arc Length lt Pick point or point numbers gt 3 3 Undo Arc Close Length lt Pick point or point numbers gt The or activates an additional prompt option that allows you to plot line segments at a 90 degree deflection angle from the last line This is useful for plotting buildings See also the Extend by Distance command on the Edit menu Chapter 5 Draw Commands 62 4 Perpendicular Distance Right 50 5 Arc Length Close Undo lt Pick To point or point number gt C This closes the polyline and ends the command Menu Location Draw Prerequisite None Keyboard Command 2DP 3D Polyline Function This command allows you to set a specified layer and plot a 3D polyline which can be used to define breaklines and features to better define surface models You can pick points from the graphics screen or use point numbers from the current coordinate file You can also specify a range of point numbers For example enteri
111. Point Number Settings E Vertical Angle Mode Separate Layers MV Point Numbers None None IV Automatic Point Numbers C ODearees Level C Points Start Point Number 30 Degrees Level C Symbols E Elev Difference C Both Auto Zoom Use Field to Finish M For Symbols M For Layers Table C scadxml DATA surveadd fld Set Table GIS File NONE Set File Cancel Help The following table illustrates the effects of elevation settings Elevations Yes Real Z No Picked Point Labels point Prompts for elevation uses 0 for z coordinate Point Number Labels point No Prompt uses 0 for z coordinate Elevations Yes Real Z Yes Picked Point Labels point Prompts for elevation for z coordinate Chapter 9 Tools Commands 168 Point Number Labels point No Prompt uses z coordinate from file Elevations No Real Z No Picked Point No Label No Prompt uses 0 for z coordinate Point Number No Label No Prompt uses 0 for z coordinate Elevations No Real Z Yes Picked Point Labels point No Prompt uses z coordinate of picked point Point Number Labels point No Prompt uses z coordinate from file Start Point Number Specify the next point number to use Vertical Angle Mode Specify how AgStar should prompt you for vertical angles None means no prompt Applies to creating points with commands such as Traverse The vertical angle is used to calculate the point elevation Separate Attribute Layers Specify settings for poi
112. Points rm Options for Radial Stakeout Maximum Horiz Distance 7 Report Slope Distance J Use Cut Sheet Format Report Options Bearing Azimuth Angle Right C Azik Ang Right m Number of Decimal Places for List Points Northing E asting 0 000 y Elevation 0 000 X To Line Table Scaler 0 000 To Curve Table Scaler 0 000 r Initial Traverse Sideshot Angle Mode C Azimuth C Angle Right e Prompt Y Show Occupy and Backsight Points on Status Bar 7 Automatic Raw File On i Cancel A Under Options for Calculate Offsets you must set defaults for offsets e Maximum Offset to Calc This option allows you to set the maximum distance an offset will be calculated from an origin e Display Offsets Ahead Behind Centerline This option allows you to display the calculated offsets apart from the centerline Store Station Text to CRD File This option allows you to save station text in the coordinate file with the points Label Station and Offsets This option allows you to label the generated stations and offsets e Sort Report by Stations This option allows you to sort the output report by generated stations Report Point Coordinates This option allows you to report coordinates for all points generated B Under Define Centerline by you must determine if centerlines are picked as polylines or as points C Under Options for Radial Stakeout you must set defaults fo
113. S information GIS Query Report This command applies a user defined query on a data table or related tables with the database Records in the table that pass the query can be reported or the associated entities can be highlighted in the drawing The Query Using option in the main dialog box sets the source of the data table to process as either GIS data attached to selected drawing entities or from the current Output MDB file Chapter 11 GIS Commands 255 Query GIS Links roo Current Query QUERY1 ESRI Map Specs for CAD MSC And SWRNET PIPE SIZE 15 E Feature Name Field Name Value Andy SWRNET_PIPE SIZE y y 15 y Available Queries a Add parameter Delete parameter Clear all Output method Query using ESRI Map Specs for CAD Generate report MSC Data from Current Mark screen entities Drawing Build Selection Set Table from Output Database Save Load Delete Select Color PA l Execute Save To File Load From File Help The query is defined in the dialog shown here To add a query enter a new query name in the in the space underneath Current Query If there is already a name there just highlight and type over it with a new name then hit Clear All to clear out existing query lines and get full access to all Feature Names The top portion of the dialog contains a list of the query parameters To add a parameter select a Feature Name from the pop up list The
114. SIMULATION Point Number 330 Rod Height 0 000 Northing 12 692 Easting 206 480 Elev 6 951 Require RTK Interval Type Distance C Time sec Interval xiy 70000 Interval 2 10 000 Stop F2 Exit ll 3 When you ve reached the other side of the field press Stop Then press Exit Note that after pressing stop the subdivision is complete and that you can t continue it later as you can with during perimeter and interior surveys 4 You will now be prompted to assign names to the two new areas See instructions on Assign Subdivision Area Name for what to do next Note that you must assign a name to any new section before you can design it Pull Down Menu Location Survey Prerequisite A closed perimeter and preferably fixed RTK Keyboard Command survey_subdivide Survey Master Benchmark A master benchmark point must be surveyed before any other points Its purpose is to define the origin of your local coordinate system When you survey a master benchmark a mapping from GPS coordinates to your local coor dinate system is created For more complex coordinate mapping functionality see the Align to Local Coordinates command Steps 1 Set the Number of Readings field to the number of readings to be taken and averaged 10 is enough 2 With your vehicle positioned over the benchmark point press the Read button Chapter 7 Survey Commands 145 10 x ES File Edt Vew Draw Survey Design Tool Displa
115. Style Text Size Scaler Text Size Scaler eres 7 Arrow Size Scaler a Decimal Places foo y Iie ear zorns IV Use EndPoint Snap For 1st Point Characters To Append po I Drop Trailing Zeros Offset From Line Characters To Append ft Auto Label Closed Pine _ Offset From Line aea Site rice Text Alignment p Position Horizontal Auto 7 Adioiner Text C Parallel C Picked Layer r MIEN Line E Text Ste Arrow Line C Standard Line Text Size Scaler Curved Leaders Justification Ly C Dimension Only Cancel Help A Under Building Dimensions you set text specification for building dimensions Layer This option allows you to set the layer for the building text Text Style This option allows you to set the text style for the building text Text Size Scaler This option allows you to set the text scaler to determine text size Decimal Places This option allows you to set the precision for the building dimensions Drop Trailing Zeroes This option allows you to truncate trailing zeroes from dimensions Characters To Append This options allows you to set characters to add to reported dimensions Offset From Line This option sets the offset distance from the line to the dimension text Auto Label Closed Pline This option specifies whether a closed polyline is labeled on the interior or exterior B Under Offset Dimension Text you can set text specifications for off
116. TK OUTPUT CONTROL 8 Set the RTK OUTPUTS to Port 2 and the ANTENNA HEIGHT to the measured height of the antenna 9 Ensure that all other forms of output Cycled Output 1PPS output Event Markers etc are disable These options may all be accessed with the submenus accessible through the Control button 10 Ensure that the Synch time of the Rover and Base are the same This setting may be accessed by first pressing Control and then cycling through the menus until the MASKS SYNCH TIME option is available Rover Station 1 After powering on the receiver press the Control Button From the selections available select MORE This will bring up a second page of options Select MORE again The front panel screen should now be on RECEIVER CONTROL 3 of 7 2 Select BAUD RATE FORMAT and from the menu that this creates select SERIAL PORT 1 SETTINGS 3 Ensure that the port is set to 38400 baud 8 Odd 1 Format with no flow control 4 Similarly make sure that the settings for I O Port 2 agree with those of the type of radio being used typically 9600 8 None 1 5 Return to the RECEIVER CONTROL menus and go to page 2 6 Select RTK ROVER CONTROL 7 Toggle the ENABLE setting to L1 L2 Chapter 7 Survey Commands 135 8 Push the Status button and select POSITION There should now be an RTK option Select it This will bring up a screen displaying delta Northing Easting correction status etc 9 Ensure that the STATIC option
117. This option controls the plot area The default scale setting is 1 1 when plotting a layout The default setting is Scaled to Fit when plotting a Model tab When you select a standard scale the scale is displayed in Custom e Scale This option defines the exact scale for the plot The four most recently used standard scales are displayed at the top of the list e Custom This option creates a custom scale You can create a custom scale by entering the number of inches or millimeters equal to the number of drawing units e Scale Lineweights This option scales lineweights in proportion to the plot scale Lineweights normally specify the linewidth of printed objects and are plotted with the linewidth size regardless of the plot scale e Plot Offset This field specifies an offset of the plotting area from the lower left corner of the paper In a layout the lower left corner of a specified plot area is positioned at the lower left margin of the paper You can offset the origin by entering a positive or negative value The plotter unit values are in inches or millimeters on the paper e Center the Plot This option automatically calculates the X and Y offset values to center the plot on the paper e X This field specifies the plot origin in the X direction e Y This field specifies the plot origin in the Y direction e Plot Options This field specifies options for lineweights plot styles and the current plot style table You can select whether
118. Units Skip Startup Wizard Next Time Next Exit Help After selecting the AutoCAD new drawing option the New Drawing Wizard dialog box opens The Startup Wizard begins with a dialog to set the drawing name and scale The first step to do is set the drawing dwg name by picking the Set button This brings up the file selection dialog Change to the directory folder Save in field where you want to store the drawing You can either select an existing folder or create a new folder To select an existing folder pull down the Save in field to select a folder or drive click the Move Up icon next to the Save in field and or the pick the folder name from the list To create a new folder pick the Create New Folder icon to the right of the Save in field Then type in the drawing name in the File name field and click the Save button Chapter 1 Product Overview 10 Drawing to Create x Save in Ql work gt e EX alal p EH example1 dwg Move up one directory Create new directory Save as type Drawing dwg y Cancel Help After setting the drawing name you can set the drawing horizontal scale symbol size text size and unit mode English or Metric Then click the Next button The next startup dialog sets the Data Path and CRD File The Data Path is the folder where Agstar will store the data files such as raw RWS files and profile PRO files The Set button for the Data Path allow
119. Windows programs before running this Setup Program running Click Next to continue with the Setup program WARNING This program is protected by copyright law and international treaties ay Click Cancel to quit Setup and close any programs you have Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this program or any portion of it may result in severe civil and criminal penalties and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under law Cancel If this version of Agstar has already been installed you will see the slightly different dialog shown below l AgStar 2002 Setup 151 x Add Remove Application Choose the maintenance function to perform Add or Remove Features C Reinstall AgStar 2002 C Remove AgStar 2002 lt Back Cancel In this case it is recommended that you remove the current installation After the current installation is removed you may start the install process once more to continue 4 On the Serial Number dialog box you must enter the serial number provided with your copy of Agstar Chapter 1 Product Overview 5 ie Carlson Software 2002 Setup e x Enter Serial Number Please enter serial number located on the package Click Next to continue 0000 00000 00000 0000 5 On the Select Installation Type dialog box select the type of installation you want Typical Compact or Custom Choose Next i AgStar 2002 Setup _ ol x S
120. You will need to provide a target elevation and whether the uphill direction is on your left or your right When you stray out of your chosen elevation tolerance arrows will appear on the screen or on an external lightbar telling you which way to turn to find the target elevation This feature is useful for designing a field with steps for example in planting rice levies The following options are available Keep Polyline Select this options if you would like the path you drive to remain in the drawing Elevation tolerance Set this value to the amount of deviation in elevation you are willing to tolerate Elevation Set this value to the desired elevation you will drive along or click Read to read this value from GPS Steps 1 Fill in the desired values for the parameters described above i Jr ollow Elevation C Documents and Settings Dave C My Documents jerryA 2 dWwg PAD v 059819 n g Sfoewars Ki VRAQQRasL Menu F 4 q g e gt t y Rod Height 0 000 Elevation Tolerance 1 000 Start F1 Exit Y Keep Polyline Elevation 0 004 lif follow_elev ya 4 J gt 755 4408 0 0000 0 0000 SNAP GRID ORTHO POLAR OSNAPJOTRACK LWT MODEL 2 Click on Start to begin 3 Pilot your vehicle along the desired elevation with the guidance of the left and right arrows on the screen or using a lightbar When within tolerance the arrows become target symbols Chapter 9 Tools Commands 157
121. a world file assists with this task To generate a world file please reference the Create by Image in Drawing command Once the image has been inserted into the CAD drawing it may be helpful to control its display order by using the View gt Display Order gt Order by Layer command or View gt Display Order gt Send to Back command e The Place Google Earth Image routine fetches aerial imagery in real time from the Google servers and requires an Internet connection to proceed In the event that an Internet connection is not available the following error message may be displayed Failed to initialize Google Earth Please ensure Google Earth client software is functional and online Chapter 5 Draw Commands 72 e It bears repeating that the aerial imagery returned by Google Earth should only be used for illustrative or proof of concept purposes only Prompts First corner Identify Entity lt Current view gt dentify one corner of a drawing window that should be used to set the Google Earth display or pick an existing entity with discreet upper and lower bounds to define a region or press Enter to use the current view this is the same as the Extent Current Drawing View option above Specify opposite corner dentify the opposite corner of a drawing window that should be used to set the Google Earth display Save Image from Google Earth E x From Google Earth run File gt Save gt Save Image then press OK and reselect
122. a EA ajx EA fe Edt View Draw Survey Design Tools Display Window Help 19 xj Ose ds cansa JE VRagaeas Monitor F3 J SkyPlot F4 Menu F11 A a del Y Elevation Difference Rod Height 0 000 North 105 825 East 461 069 Elev 0 197 SIMULATION LOCK GRID 7 333 FILL 7 530 Store F2 Exit A11 Center Dynamic Extents Previous Scale Window lt real time gt Command Command Command grd_gps X w 8 672 8554 0 0000 0 0000 SNAP GRID ORTHO POLAR OSNAP OTRACK LWTIMODEL Pull Down Menu Location Survey Prerequisite A field design Keyboard Command grd_gps Chapter 7 Survey Commands 147 Design Commands 8 Set Perimeter Use this command to select the CLOSED polyline that defines the outer most limit of the disturbed area Volume calculation will take place inside this boundary Prerequisite a closed polyline Keyboard Command tag inclu Create Existing Ground Grid AgStar uses a grid to model the field The area for the grid is automatically set to cover all the 3D entities in the drawing Before designing a field you must set the grid density For fields with a lot of natural slope variation the dimensions of the grid cell should be made smaller to ensure high accuracy However 50X50 should be dense enough for most fields Note that the higher the density the more time it will take to calculate the optimal field design Steps 1 Set the toggle to Dimensions of a
123. a KML file e g circles 3DFaces ellipses splines multilines regions and solids can be first turned into polylines with the Entities to Polylines command Text entities can be converted to polylines through the use of the Text Explode To Polylines command The graphical symbology of any all items sent to the KML file can be manually modified via the Google Earth interface Prompts Select points polylines lines and arcs to write FILter lt Select entities gt Select the desired entities and press Enter when complete e To import a Google Earth image into your drawing use the Place Google Earth Image command e To import a Google Earth terrain data into a Carlson TIN surface model use the Place Google Earth Image command e To import KML content into your drawing use the Import Google Earth File command Pulldown Menu Location File gt Export Keyboard Command kmlwrite Prerequisite Points lines or polylines in the drawing with an established projection zone through Drawing Setup Exit This command allows you to exit AgStar This option allows you to quit the program if there have been no changes since the drawing was last saved If the drawing has been modified the program displays the Drawing Modification dialog box to prompt you to save or discard the changes before quitting You can close a file that has been opened in read only mode if you have made no modifications or if you are willing to discard them To save mo
124. acet of the configuration failed If one of these messages is rejected it is likely a momentary transmission error If on the other hand several or all are rejected it is possible there is a problem in the communication line between the computer and the receiver which should be checked Leica TC Series Remote Mode 1 Turn on Leica 2 Connect Leica to rover radio and connect the radio to the larger battery 3 Connect the base radio to AgStar and the smaller battery 4 Under Survey go to Configure Survey and under equipment type put Leica TC 5 To make sure the baud rate matches under Configure Survey menu click on General Settings and check if the baud rate is 19200 When Leica is turned on under Main Menu enter 5 for Configuration and 2 for Communication Mode then enter 1 for Gsi parameters and check if the baud rate is also set 19200 6 Line Terminator in Gsi paramiters should be set to CR LF 7 Press F1 for cont when done 8 When back in Communication Mode screen enter 5 for RCS Remote ON OFF and make sure it s NOT set for remote mode 9 In Main Menu press F6 for meas when ready to measure 10 In AgStar go to Total Station Setup and for Connection Mode check remote 11 When done click on OK To put Leica in Tracking On Gun press FNC then ATR and LOCk TCA 1800 1 Turn on Leica 2 Connect Leica to AgStar 3 In AgStar go to Configure Survey and under equipment type put Leica TC 4 To
125. airs move over a snap point on an object You can also enable the Marker by setting AUTOSNAP to 1 e Magnet Sets the AutoSnap magnet on or off The magnet is an automatic movement of the crosshairs that locks the crosshairs onto the nearest snap point You can also enable the Magnet by setting AUTOSNAP to 4 e Display AutoSnap Tooltip Controls the display of the AutoSnap tooltip The tooltip is a text flag that describes Chapter 6 Settings Commands 97 which part of the object you are snapping to You can turn object snaps on and off from the Object Snap tab in the Drafting Settings dialog box You can also enable the Display AutoSnap tooltip option by setting AUTOSNAP to 2 e Display AutoSnap Aperture Box Controls the display of the AutoSnap aperture box The aperture box is a box that appears inside the crosshairs when you snap to an object You can also set the Display AutoSnap Aperture Box by using the APBOX system variable e AutoSnap Marker Color Specifies the color of the AutoSnap marker 2 Under AutoSnap Marker Size you set the display size for the AutoSnap marker Values range from 1 to 20 pixels 3 Under Tracking Settings you control the settings that relate to tracking behavior e Display Polar Tracking Vector Sets polar tracking behavior on or off With polar tracking you can draw lines along angles relative to a drawing command From or To point Polar angles are 90 degree divisors such as 45 30 and 15 degrees e Disp
126. aking place will be displayed Note This command displays many more system variables than are found in Chapter 18 which contains a list of supported system variables Modification of any system variable other than the supported ones found in Chapter 18 is done at your own risk and may result in program errors requiring a re installation of AgStar Menu Location Settings Prerequisite None Keyboard Command VAREDIT Toolbars Function This command allows you to display and hide toolbars Click on a toolbar name and press the Show or Hide button Toolbars Ed Standard Toolbar Surf Show Hide Exit e Show Turns on the selected toolbar If the toolbar is already visible then this does nothing e Hide Turns off the selected toolbar If the toolbars is already hidden then this does nothing If the toolbar is floating you can also turn it off by clicking the x in the upper right corner e Exit Exits this command Menu Location Settings Prerequisite None Keyboard Command TBARCFG Chapter 6 Settings Commands 86 Options Function This command allows you to customize the AgStar settings Files Tab Options a Lx Current drawing Drawingl dwg Files Display Open and Save Plotting System User Preferences Drafting Selection Search paths file names and file locations B Support File Search Path 2 Device Driver File Search Path D Miscellaneous File Names A Text Editor Dictiona
127. al The residual is the difference between the actual point and the point calculated using the alignment trans formation In GPS points view the HRMS and VRMS columns show the horizontal and vertical RMS values when that point was recorded The On Off buttons allow you to switch whether the highlighted point is used for the horizontal and or vertical alignment The HV column shows a Y if this point is used in the calculations Otherwise it shows an N The H column represents horizontal control and the V column vertical control For example you may wish to use 2 points for horizontal alignment and one for vertical The Optimize button will find the combination of turning alignment points on off for horizontal and vertical such that the horizontal and vertical residuals are minimized The Desc field shows an optional description of the alignment points The scale factor and average horizontal and vertical residuals appear at the top of the window These values serve as a check that the alignment is valid The scale factor factor should be closed to 1 0 in range of 0 9 to 1 1 The average residuals should be less than 0 2 XY On Off toggles the highlighted alignment point horizontal component off or on Alignment points with the horizontal component toggled off will not use the northing and easting of that point for adjustment calculations Z On Off toggles the highlighted alignment point vertical component off or on Alignment points with t
128. al power source is being used be sure to plug it into the PWR Port on the front of the Chapter 7 Survey Commands 120 receiver 4 If external power is not being used ensure that there are batteries in one or both of the batter slots on the bottom of the receiver 5 Plug the 9 pin serial connection cable into the serial port of the computer running AgStar and into the Terminal Port on the front of the receiver Configuring AgStar for Use With a 500 Series Receiver 1 Select Configure Survey from the AgStar pull down menu This will open a new window with several buttons on it as well as a pull down list labelled Equipment Type Select Leica 500 Series in the Equipment Type menu then select General Settings 2 Ensure that the COM port is set to the one that the serial cable is plugged into and that the Baud Rate is 9600 the Char Length 8 the Stop Bits 1 and the Parity None Close this menu and the Configure Survey menu 3 In the Survey pull down menu select Equipment Setup This will open another menu with several selectable options and several buttons 4 Use the radio buttons on the top right to select whether the receiver will be a rover or a base station Also be sure to select the antenna types being used from the pulldown menu at left 5 Enter the desired Satellite Elevation Cutoff in the text box above the column of buttons All satellites with elevations less than this number will not be
129. alue should be set to Radio Port unless you want to set up a non wireless Base Rover connection through Port A or Port B The RTK Data Port cannot be the same as the Control Port Configure Radio Submenu The Radio ID is the value used to identify a unit on a wireless network of Navcom units Make sure that no other Navcom unit in your vicinity shares the same Radio ID By default the Radio ID is the same as your Navcom unit s serial number This value can be changed although there isn t usually any need to do so The Local Radio Type can be set to either Master or Slave Radio communication will only work between Masters and Slaves Only one unit on your network should be set to Master It makes sense to make the base unit a Master and all rovers Slaves These settings will be handled automatically by the Configure Base and Configure Rover routines So there generally isn t any reason to set the Local Radio Type manually The Local Antenna Power Level allows you to configure your radio to use more or less power The less power the radio has the less it will be able to communicate over longer distances It may be useful to change the power level if you re rover is not travelling far from your base and you re trying to conserve battery power Within the Navcom Radio Setup menu you will be able to access the following status information for all visible Navcom units on the network External Power Indicates whether the unit is plugged into an e
130. am starts processing the raw file from the top record down The result is displayed in the standard report viewer which you can use to save print or draw the report Angle Balance Reference Closing Angle Ea Measured Closing Bearing N 09 42 29 w Measured Closing Azimuth 350 17 31 Angular Error 0 000000000 From Pt Tort Reference Closing Angle dd mmss 09 4229 CNE CSE CSW NW CA ox This process command applies an angle balance to the traverse lines when calculating the coordinates This com mand displays the same dialog box as No Adjust The angle balance takes the angular error divided by the number of traverse lines and adjusts the angle of each traverse line by that amount The angular error is the difference between Chapter 9 Tools Commands 238 the angle balance shot and a reference angle The angle balance shot is specified as a type AB or CL AB record in the raw file If no AB record is found in the raw file then the command prompts for which traverse shot to use as the angle balance shot The angle from the angle balance shot is calculated as the angle from the occupied point to the foresight point The reference angle can be specified as a bearing as an azimuth or by two point numbers in the dialog box shown The angle balance report shows the unadjusted points the unadjusted closure the angular error the adjusted points and the adjusted closure Typically but not always applying the angle balance corre
131. ame used with Carlson Survey drawings is the drawing name layout name plus the plt file name extension Some plotting device drivers however use a different plot file extension name This option only affects the default plot file name used for plotting scripts created with earlier versions of Autodesk products e Print Spool Executable Specifies the application to use for print spooling You can enter the executable file name as well as any command line arguments you want to use For example you can enter myspool bat s to spool plot files to myspool bat and have a unique plot file name automatically generated 6 Printer Support File Path Specifies search path settings for printer support files e Print Spooler File Location Specifies the path for print spool files AgStar writes the plot to this location e Printer Configuration Search Path Specifies the path for printer configuration files PC3 files e Printer Description File Search Path Specifies the path for files with a pmp file extension or printer descrip tion files e Plot Style Table Search Path Specifies the path for files with an stb or ctb extension or plot style table files both named plot style tables and color dependent plot style tables 7 Search Path for ObjectDBX Applications Specifies the path for ObjectDBX application files You can enter multiple URL addresses under this option Multiple URLs should be separated by a semi colon AgStar searches the speci
132. ample above the total area is calculated and displayed 0 1 mi along with the desired spatial reference coordinate system for our project site Spatial Reference Displays the spatial reference coordinate projection system of the current drawing The projec tion can be set using the Drawing Setup command Extent Current Google Earth View Gets the overall dimensions of the Google Earth session and displays the results in both pixels and the appropriate units of measure Extent Current Drawing View Gets the overall dimensions of the current CAD view and displays the results in both pixels and the appropriate units of measure Extent Select from Drawing Sets the overall dimensions of the Google Earth session to conform with a drawing window from CAD and displays the results in both pixels and the appropriate units of measure Image Type Allows the ability to indicate the type of image to be placed into the drawing Gray scale images can be inserted into the drawing automatically color drawings must be manually saved from Google Earth and then selected for insertion in the CAD drawing see the Prompts section below Image Layer Allows the ability to indicate the layer upon which the image should be inserted Note e Once an image has been inserted into the CAD drawing it may be helpful to create an associated world file for the image in case it needs to be re inserted into the active drawing or an alternate drawing Creating
133. and allows you to manage raster images Image Manager El xi Image Name Status Size Type Saved Path Attach m105041 Loaded 2MB TIFF 07721799 GATWDOTSON Loaded 2MB TIFF 07 21 99 G ATWDOTSON Detach Reload Unload 2 Details Image found at Cancel Help 1 The Image Manager dialog box lists all the image files attached to the current drawing You can view the parame ters and details for selected images You can attach new image files and detach locate reload and unload existing images e List View This button lists the image definitions attached to the drawing Each image name appears only once regardless of how many times you attach insert the image You can sort the list of images by name status loaded unloaded or not found size type TIFF for example date or the saved path and file name By default Carlson Survey displays the list alphabetically by image name To select multiple images hold down SHIFT or CTRL while selecting items To sort the list alphabetically or numerically by a specific column click that column s heading To change the width of the column drag the line between the column headings to the right or left The program saves and restores the settings when you reopen the dialog box To change an image name select it and then click it again or select it and then press F2 You cannot edit names of images that reside in external
134. and averaged 10 is enough 2 With your vehicle positioned over the benchmark point press the Read button When the readings complete click Ok on the Read Average GPS window Z set Benchmark C oem2k oem XPAD WORK testS dwg ae oj x fA Fie Edt view Draw Survey Design Tools Display Window Help 15 x Osa 6 os Sorta AF VRARARA A Monitor F3 SkyPlot F4 Menu F11 A Q del gt SIMULATION LOCK Point Number 128 Rod Height 0 000 N 80 739 E 140 238 Z 7 278 No Eley Desc 3 CS _Note Options F6 Code F7 Number of readings 30 Join Undo store ea Read amp Store FS Exit Start Continuous F12 3 Press the Store button then press Exit You ll probably want to mark this point with a flag Pull Down Menu Location Survey Prerequisite A master benchmark and fixed RTK Keyboard Command store_pt Chapter 7 Survey Commands 141 Survey Perimeter Before surveying the interior of the field you must first survey the perimeter border Any surveyed points outside of the perimeter will not be factored into the field design Steps 1 To survey a point every time a specified horizontal distance is travel select Distance as the interval type and type the desired interval in the Interval x y field Alternatively you can specify an amount of time between surveyed points by selecting the Time interval type Auto Points At Interval C oem XPAD
135. ands 70 e Specify On Screen This option directs input to the command line or the pointing device If Specify On Screen is cleared enter the insertion point in X Y and Z X This field sets the X coordinate value e Y This field sets the Y coordinate value e Z This field sets the Z coordinate value 5 Under Scale you must specify the scale factor of the selected image Specify On Screen directs input to the command line or the pointing device If Specify On Screen is cleared enter a value for the scale factor The default scale factor is 1 6 Under Rotation you must specify the rotation angle of the selected image If Specify On Screen is selected you may wait until you exit the dialog box to rotate the object with your pointing device or enter a rotation angle value on the command line If Specify On Screen is cleared enter the rotation angle value in the dialog box The default rotation angle is 0 Menu Location Draw Prerequisite Raster image Keyboard Command IMAGE Place Image by World File This function allows you to insert Geo Referenced image files into AutoCAD drawings This process requires the presence of an accompanying World file The TFW file contains information about the location and scaling of the actual raster image TIF file This eliminates the guesswork in inserting moving and rotating raster images to the project area You begin by selecting the TFW or JGW file to process If the related TIF file is present
136. ane Similarity or Rigid Body Plane Similarity will apply a scale factor to the transformation The scale factor will be based on the alignment points and should always be very near 1 0 to be correct The Rigid Body option will align by translate and rotate but no scale Any difference in scale between the GPS and local coordinate systems will be distributed equally between the two alignment points These differences will appear as horizontal residuals in the Alignment dialog Two pairs of points are sufficient to define the translation rotation and scale for the transformation But adding more alignment points yields the most accurate results for aligning to existing coordinate systems Since two pairs of coordinates are sufficient to define the transformation there is extra data when there are three or more pairs The program uses a least squares best fit routine to find the transformation that minimizes the residuals This one best fit transformation is used to convert from the GPS to the local coordinate system for all the points The residuals are the differences between the transformed GPS coordinates and the actual local coordinates A multiple point alignment is especially helpful on a survey which covers a large area The error in raw GPS coordinates increases as you get farther from the base Taking alignment points around the perimeter of your job site as alignment points will give you the best geometry for the alignment Align to Benchmark
137. appears at the right This means you are in kinematic rover mode If instead the ROVE option is available select it 10 Ensure that all other forms of output Cycled Output 1PPS output Event Markers etc are disable These options may all be accessed with the submenus accessible through the Control button 11 Ensure that the Synch time of the Rover and Base are the same This setting may be accessed by first pressing Control and then cycling through the menus until the MASKS SYNCH TIME option is available Trimble 4700 4800 Hardware and Equipment 1 Make sure that the computer s serial port is connected to the 4700 4800 in it s COM1 port typically the port that a data collector is normally plugged into Power should be supplied on COM2 and any radio used for RTK should be plugged into COM3 2 All other equipment antenna wires etc should be set up as normally directed by the manuals Software Configuration 1 After selecting the Trimble 4700 equipment type from the configure survey menu open up Equipment Setup This should bring up a new window dialog box with the following options a Receiver Type Select whether you are using a 4700 or 4800 receiver b Station Type Choose what type of RTK station you are setting this receiver up as a base or rover c RTK Correction type Select the type of Corrections you would like a base station to transmit Note that CMR messages should be used for most precision appli
138. arlson Software 200 El al Full Preview Partial Preview i Cancel Help e Plotter Configuration This field displays the currently configured plotting device the port to which it s con nected or its network location and any additional user defined comments about the plotter A list of the available system printers and PC3 file names is displayed in the Name list An icon is displayed in front of the plotting device name to identify it as a PC3 file name or a system printer e Properties The option displays the Plotter Configuration Editor PC3 Editor where you can modify or view the current plotter configuration ports device and media settings e Hints This option displays information about the specific plotting device e Plot Style Table Pen Assignments This option sets the plot style table edits the plot style table or creates a new plot style table e Name This option displays the plot style table assigned to the current Model tab or layout tab and a list of the currently available plot style tables If more than one layout tab is selected and the selected layout tabs have different plot style tables assigned the list displays Varies e Edit This option displays the Plot Style Table Editor where you can edit the selected plot style table e New This option displays the Add a Plot Style Table wizard which you can use to create a new plot style table e Plot Stamp This option places a p
139. ate position Direct Reverse Tolerances are used with total stations to check the pairs of direct and reverse horizontal angles vertical angles and distances When these values are off by more than the tolerance the program will display a warning Field to Finish is explained fully in the Field to Finish command definition Basically it uses a code table which holds information on types of points ie Man Hole or Edge of Pavement When the settings Use Code Table For Symbols For Layers and For Descriptions are selected AgStar will look to the code table for how to draw points of a particular code description The file containing the active code table appears after Code File You can change this with the button Select File The Split Multiple Codes option will draw multiple points from the same point when that point description has multiple codes For example a point with description EP DR will draw the point twice once with the properties of code EP and a second time using code DR When this option is off the program will use the first code and draw the point once The Check Descriptions With Code Table option will display a warning beforing storing a point if that point descrip tion is not found in the code table With this option off the program will go ahead and store the point and the point will be drawn using the default point properties Stakeout Settings Display GPS RMS in Stakeout causes AgStar to report the constantly upd
140. atershed Analysis some of the flow connection data is stored into the triangulation file to speed up reprocessing The Re Process function resets this flow connection data to start the flow calculations from scratch The Detail Inspect function reports flow connection data at the pointer position in real time as the pointer is moved This data includes the current position triangle number connecting flow triangle number sink node number watershed name border elevation ridge elevation low elevation downstream sink number number of source triangles number of source nodes current elevation and spillover elevation The Watershed Inspect function reports runoff flow data at the pointer position in real time as the pointer is moved The runoff data is shown in a tooltip next to the pointer and in the Data tab This data has values for the overall watershed that the position is in including the sink elevation sink name drainage area and average slope percent This data also has values for the watershed above the current point including the drainage area and runoff volume Plus this data shows the elevation and runoff coefficient at the current point When the Hatch Area Being Inspected option is active the watershed area for the current position is hatched during inspection Chapter 9 Tools Commands 165 2 2 ul Ml 1 pS a Tools Options Structures Data Y Display Tooltip Sink Node 11661 Sink Elevation M 383 417 Sink Name M3
141. ating horizontal RMS accuracy values while staking a point The only disadvantage to having this option active is that it slows down a little the stakeout position update Draw Trail displays a line in the stakeout screen showing where you ve been as you move towards the stakeout point This option only applies to GPS Auto Zoom will zoom the drawing display in or out so that both your current position and stakeout target are visable on the screen Zero Horizontal Angle To Target will set the horizontal angle of the total station to zero in the direction towards the stakeout point When stakeout is completed the horizontal angle is set back to the original value This option only applies to total stations Store Cutsheet Stakeout Data in Note File will store stakeout data in the note file NOT for the current coordinate file At the end of staking out a point there is an option to store the staked coordinates in the current coordinate file This stakeout note file option allows you to store more stakeout data in addition to the staked coordinates This Chapter 7 Survey Commands 115 additional data includes the target coordinates and horizontal and vertical difference between the staked and target points This stakeout note data can be used in reports with the List Points or CutSheet Report commands Store Cutsheet Stakeout Data in Excel Spreadsheet will display a cutsheet report in an Excel spreadsheet The spreadsheet will pop up at the e
142. aw Same Size Tree Symbol On the Tree Entry Options dialog tab Begin Tree ID From This is the number to start incrementing tree tags from in case the tree coding is missing tags and you want to assign tags for reporting Draw Point Attribute Block controls whether to draw the point block with the point elevation and description attributes Draw Circle for Trunk Diameter creates a circle with the trunk diameter Draw Treeline by Drip Radius in Scale shrinkwraps the tree driplines to get the overall treeline perimeter Draw Tree Symbol for Drip Radius in Scale draws individual symbols for each tree using the symbols defined in the code table and scaled by the drip size attribute Draw Tree Symbol by Factor of Trunk Size draws individual symbols for each tree using the symbols defined in the code table and scaled by the trunk size attribute multiplied by 12 For example a 10 trunk size is drawn as a 10ft symbol Draw Same Size Tree Symbol draws individual symbols for each tree using the symbols defined in the code table and at size of 6 Tree Survey Settings c xj Chapter 9 Tools Commands 204 On the Layer dialog tab there are optional layer names for different types of tree entities to append either as a prefix or suffix to the layer from the code table Tree Survey Settings xj Tree Entity Options Layer Description Codes GIS Attributes Label Tree Trunk Suffix Tree Drip Sufix
143. ber Settings select the options that determine whether you will be prompted for point numbers by the commands that locate points e Point Numbers When this toggle is checked on points that are inserted by AgStar commands are shown with a point number and a coordinate is stored in the current coordinate crd file When this toggle is off points are shown with no point number plotted and no coordinate is stored in the current coordinate CRD file Automatic Point Numbering If this toggle is checked on commands that locate a point will automatically insert a point number for each point drawn on the screen If Automatic Point Numbering toggle is off commands that locate a point will prompt for a point number 4 In the Configure survey Settings dialog box you set defaults for coordinate geometry calculations and design work General Settings Survey Text Defaults Area Label Defaults Annotation Defaults Stack Label Arc Line Curve Table Chapter 6 Settings Commands 104 5 In the General Settings dialog box under COGO Design you can set defaults for offsets and stakeout COGO Design Module Settings xi m Options for Calculate Offsets Maximum Offset to Calc I Display Offsets Ahead Behind Centerline Store Station Text to CRD File I Label Station and Offsets J7 Sort Report by Stations JV Report Point Coordinates Define Centerline by E Polyline C
144. butes of a Carlson point such as the symbol type point number elevation and description When this command is invoked the command line will prompt the user Select point to edit Enter to end At this point you can select any part of the point including the symbol elevation point number or the description Next a dialog will appear as shown Edit Point Symbol Name Select Symbol History Point Number fase North Y 235852 3909706 East X 1657724 4875421 Elevation 2 120 3500000 Elevation Decimals 0 000 Drawing Description 5 8 rebar found CRD File Description Notes Condition i Cancel Help To change the symbol either type in a new symbol name in the edit box or choose the Select Symbol button where you can choose from a list of symbols To change any of the other properties of the point simply change or replace the contents of the edit box with the new information Both Drawing Description and CRD File Descriptions are displayed When a change to the Drawing description is made this change will not be reflected in the coordinate file This allows the change of a description that is defined in the Field to Finish fld table for a particular code If a change is made in the CRD File description it will be reflected in the coordinate file Take note that if the CRD file description is changed running Field to Finish will change the definitions for the point s changed If you change the p
145. butes to Create these options create GIS attribute data which is stored in the database setup by the GIS Settings command and linked to the entities created by Field to Finish SurvCE GIS Fields This option uses the attribute data generated by SurvCE which is stored in a vtt file with the same file name as the current coordinate file except with the vtt extension Field to Finish Code This option creates an attribute named CODE with a value of the Field to Finish code name ie UP Field to Finish Full Name This option creates an attribute named FULL NAME with a value of the Field to Finish Full Name ie Utility Pole Special Codes This option creates attributes for Field to Finish special codes including OH Offset Horizontal OV Offset Vertical SZ Size ROT Rotation AZI Azimuth and DIST Distance Chapter 9 Tools Commands 202 Point Number This option creates an attribute named POINT NAME with a value of the point number from the coordinate file Drawing Description This option creates an attribute named POINT DWG_DESC with a value of the point description for the point block created in the drawing Coordinate File Description This option creates an attribute named POINT RAW_DESC with a value of the point description from the coordinate file GIS Setup GIS Features Paints CONTROL 2D Linework 3D Linework Attributes to Create SurvCE GIS Fields Field to Finish Code Field to Finish Full Name Specia
146. cations as RTCM is only capable of producing less accurate floating precision positions d Radio Baud Rate The baud rate of the radio port This should be left at the default setting of 9600 in general e Satellite Elevation Cutoff All satellites with elevation from the horizon of less than this numeber will not be used in calculating a position This allows less accurate low elevation satellite to be factored out of a position f Configure Base Station Will configure the receiver to act as a base See Configuring the Base Station below g Cancel without saving will exit this menu without saving any changes that have been made h Save and Exit Will save these settings to the reciever and to AgStar s setup and exit out of this menu Configuring Rover No real configuration is necessary aside from setting up the equipment and setting the appro priate Receiver Type Station Type and Satellite Elevation Cutoff Configuring Base Station 1 After selecting all the appropriate settings in Configure GPS click on the Configure Base Station button 2 In the menu dialog that opens there are a few buttons a Read from GPS Read a position from the GPS and fix to that position b Enter Lat Lon Fix to a manually entered Lat Lon position c Enter State Plane Coord Fix to a manually entered State Plane Northing Easting position d Read From File Fix to a position read from a ref file e Cancel Cancel base setup If Read From GPS i
147. ccessful you will receive a message such as the one below If your registration is unsuccessful please note the reason why and try again Keep in mind that each serial number may be registered to a single computer only Carlson Software xi Please print registration report A Automatic Registration completed successfully for Future reference If you do not have access to the internet and do not have a printer you must write down the information from the User Info tab shown above and fax it to 606 564 9525 or mail it to Carlson Software 102 W Second St Suite 200 Maysville KY 41056 1003 Chapter 1 Product Overview 13 License Agreement Copyright 1992 2012 Carlson Software All Rights Reserved CAUTION READ THIS NOTICE BEFORE USING SOFTWARE Please read the following Software License Agreement before using the SOFTWARE Using this SOFT WARE indicates that you have accepted its terms and conditions Carlson AgStar 2013 END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT FOR CARLSON SOFTWARE IMPORTANT READ CAREFULLY This Carlson Software End User License Agreement EULA is a legal agreement between you either an individual or a single entity and Carlson Software Inc for the software accompanying this EULA which includes computer software and may include associated media printed materials and online or electronic documentation SOFTWARE PRODUCT or SOFT WARE By exercising your rights to use the SOFTWARE you agree to be bound by t
148. ccupied point Use the Inverse command explained previously to define the occupied and backsight points Prompts Exit Line Traverse Inverse lt Angle Bearing Code lt 7 gt 6 Code 6 for angle turned to left Enter Angle dd mmss lt 45 5413 gt 22 3524 Angle of 22 degrees 35 minutes 24 seconds Number inverse lt Distance gt 120 9 Chapter 9 Tools Commands 222 Enter Vertical Angle dd mmss lt 90 0000 gt 88 2548 This prompt only comes up if you have Vertical angle prompting set to 1 or 2 Instrument Height lt 5 0 gt 5 2 Rod Target Height lt 5 0 gt 5 2 These prompts only come up if you have Instrument and Rod height prompting turned on Hz Distance gt 120 86 Enter Point Elevation lt 1033 31 gt Enter Press Enter to use this elevation calculated by the command Enter point description Topo Shot Exit Line Traverse Inverse lt Angle Bearing Code lt 6 gt gt E Pull Down Menu Location Tools gt COGO Prerequisite None EnterAssign Point This command creates a point at the user entered coordinates The point is both stored to the current CRD file and drawn on the screen The program will prompt for the northing and easting Whether the program prompts for point number elevation and description depends on the settings in the Point Defaults command Point Defaults also sets the point symbol and layer Prompts Enter North y 5000 Enter East x 5000 Enter Point Elevation lt gt 00 Enter po
149. ceiver connect your antenna to your receiver s antenna port This step can be skipped for the RT 3010S and other all in one models 3 Plug your receiver into a power supply or insert fully charged batteries into the battery ports Not all units have battery ports 4 Turn your receiver on by holding down the power button for a few seconds or until the status lights flash on 5 Use the serial port cable to connect your computer to port A of your Navcom unit Make sure the port on your computer that you use corresponds to the one you chose during preliminary setup 6 Under the Survey menu choose Equipment Setup 7 If a Port Setup window pops up set Control Port to Port A and RTK Data Port to Radio Port 8 Setup is now complete Steps that follow are optional 9 Click the Navigation Status button From here you can monitor the progress of your Navcom unit as it calculates its position 10 It may take a few minutes for the unit to calculate its position if the unit was reset or newly turned on When the calculation is complete Valid Navigation will read Yes When this occurs the Navcom unit is ready for use Click Close then click Cancel Without Saving 11 To monitor your position choose Monitor GPS Position from the Survey menu and you will see your current position All AgStar GPS functions should now work C Multi unit setup using corrections from a base 1 Base Setup a Perform the preliminary and single unit se
150. circle symbol and a d for degree angles in the report The d can be used for printers that don t handle the degree circle symbol Use Print Settings This option allows you to use settings on the Plot Settings Tab under Plot in the File menu e Use Page This option adds a page number to the bottom of each page in the report Text Size This option specifies text size for the reports e Lines Page This option specifies the number of lines per page of the report viewer e Left Margin This option specifies the left margin of the report e Top Margin This option specifies the top margin of the report e Bottom Margin This option specifies the bottom margin of the report Chapter 6 Settings Commands 102 G Under Title Block you set the height and width of the title block H Under Contour Options you set the smoothing and offset parameters e Smooth Contours This option automatically applies a smoothing factor to the calculated contour line e Low High slider This slider bar determines the amount of smoothing to be applied e Reduce Vertices This option automatically applies a reduction to the number of vertices created in the calculat ing the contour lines e Offset Distance This option determines offset distance of the contour lines 3 In the Drawing Setup dialog box you have options for setting drawing parameters including the plotting scale size of symbols label annotation size and the drawing mode Drawing Se
151. command always occupies the last point it calculated and backsights the point before that There are Angle Bearing code input options for Traverse that are set by entering O for Options The Angle Right option prompts for the angle right and skips the angle bearing code prompt The Azimuth option prompts for the azimuth and skips the angle bearing code prompt Prompts Occupied Point Pick point or point number pick point You will only be prompted for the occupied point the first time you use the command Use the Inverse command to set the occupied and backsight points Exit Options Line Side Shot Inverse lt Angle Bearing Code lt 7 gt Enter Pressing Enter uses the default angle right code Enter Angle dd mmss lt 90 0000 gt 88 1324 You can also enter L or R to define an angle 90 degrees Left or Right Backsight Point Pick point or point number pick point Number inverse lt Distance gt 00 CRD File to process lt c sc data LOT crd gt Enter This prompt comes up only if you have not set a current CooRDinate file with another command Exit Options Line Side Shot Inverse lt Angle Bearing Code lt 7 gt gt 14 9 45 2045 Uses the bearing defined by point numbers 14 amp 9 and subtracts the angle 45 degrees 20 minutes and 45 seconds You can use a or in this type of entry Number inverse lt Distance gt N Chapter 9 Tools Commands 221 Point number inverse i e 1020 14x9 2 Causes the comman
152. conds west Negative longitudes indicate longitudes west The next three items are state plane or local coordinates depending on the transformation in the Align Local Coordi nates command The HRMS and VRMS are measures of the reliability of the position that the receiver has calculated They correspond to the position horizontally and vertically respectively If the receiver is autonomous not receiving Chapter 7 Survey Commands 146 corrections from a base the RMS can be up to a few hundred feet If this rover is computing a Fixed position the RMS values should be less than one foot probably close to a tenth of a foot If the receiver looses the fix and becomes Float the RMS values will jump to between one and ten feet Depending on the type of GPS receiver the Monitor screen will also show more values like radio link status and receiver battery status The Skyplot button will jump you to that window so you can see the satellites the receiver is using Monitor GPS Position Lat 42 21464414 Lon 71 08303648 North 5064 147 East 5049 071 Elev 126 931 HRMS 0 028 VRMS 0 044 Status FIXED Stakeout Design Surface This feature reports the cut fill at each point in the field over which you drive Steps 1 Select Stakeout Design Surface from the Tools menu and begin to pilot your vehicle When complete press Exit 2 Elevation Difference C Documents and Settings Dave C My Documents jerry4 a dw
153. crease contrast Moving the slider to the left decreases the value moving the slider to the right increases the value e Contrast Controls the contrast and indirectly the fading effect of the image Values range from 0 through 100 The greater the value the more each pixel is forced to its primary or secondary color Moving the slider to the left decreases the value moving the slider to the right increases the value e Fade Controls the fading effect of the image Values range from O through 100 The greater the value the more the image blends with the current background color A value of 100 blends the image completely into the background Changing the screen background color causes the image to fade to the new color In plotting the background color for fade is white Moving the slider to the left decreases the value moving the slider to the right increases the value Chapter 3 Edit Commands 51 e Image Preview Displays a preview of the selected image The preview image updates dynamically to reflect changes to the brightness contrast and fade settings e Reset Resets values for brightness contrast and fade to default settings 50 50 and O respectively Menu Location Edit Image gt Prerequisite None Keyboard Command IMAGEADJUST Chapter 3 Edit Commands 52 View Commands 4 Zoom Window This commands zooms to display an area you specify by two opposite corners of a rectangular window Menu Location Vi
154. ction improves the traverse closure Compass Crandall Transit These process commands apply the selected rule of Compass Crandall or Transit to the traverse lines when calcu lating the coordinates The dialog box is the same for all three methods Closure Options Ea m Reference Closing Point Point a North East Elev m Report Angle Format C Bearing Azimuth Angle Right e By File r Calculate Elevations All SideShots Only C None Vertical Error Adjustment Linear Interpolated C Least Squares No Adjustment I Create Point Notes IV Report Unadjusted Points Y Report Point Adjustments Y Apply Angle Balance 7 Point Protect J Report SideShots Decimal Places for Report 0 000 Use Report Formatter Calculate State Plane Scale Factor at Each Setup Zone 27 83 Scale Factor J Correct for Earth Curvature Cancel Help e Reference Closing Point This is the field for entering the point number and coordinates to compare the ending traverse point with The reference closing point is used to calculate the closure e Direct Reverse Vertical Angles For any direct reverse raw data you can choose to process the direct reverse shots using only the foresight direct shot or to balance all shots e Report Angle Format This setting specifies the angle format for the report The By File option specifies that the report should use the angle format in the RWS file e Calculate E
155. cts points with the same code The difference is that instead of using a number after the code for distinct lines you use the same code with an additional code for starting and ending the line For example 0 is used to start a line and 0 to end So the coding for a segment of edge of pavement could be EP 0 EP EP EP 0 Another special code that has been added to Field to Finish is 7 7 This 7 code will use the linetype definition of line 2D polyline or 3D polyline defined by the Draw Field to Finish code For example if EP is defined as a 3D polyline then the coding EP 7 EP EP EP 7 will create a 3D polyline Otherwise codes like 0 0 which is defined as start and end line will draw EP as a line Other PointCAD special codes are 4 starts a curved 2D polyline 4 starts a closed curved 2D polyline 1 begins a 3 point arc 5 starts a 3D polyline 5 starts a closed 3D polyline 6 starts a 2D polyline 6 starts a closed 2D polyline 7 starts a line whose type is specified by the field code definition 05 starts a curved 3D polyline section 50 ends that section 8 starts a 2D and 3D polyline combination 8 starts a closed 2D and 3D polyline combination 08 starts a 2D and 3D polyline combination curved section 80 ends that section followed by a field code concatenates that field code s description on to the point s description For example OAK 04 might become LIVE OAK TREE 4 if the field code OAK translates to LIVE OAK TRE
156. d AgStar displays all grips for each object in the block If this option is cleared the program displays one grip located at the insertion point of the block You can edit an object with grips by selecting a grip and using the shortcut menu e Unselected Grip Color Determines the color of an unselected grip If you choose Other from the color list Carlson Survey displays the Select Color dialog box the program displays an unselected grip as the outline of a small square You can also set Unselected Grip Color by using the GRIPCOLOR system variable e Selected Grip Color Determines the color of a selected grip If you choose Other from the color list Carlson Survey displays the Select Color dialog box The program displays a selected grip as a filled small square You can also set Selected Grip Color by using the GRIPHOT system variable 4 Under Grip Size you control the display size of grips The default size is set to 3 pixels values range from 1 to 20 You can also set the Grip Size by using the GRIPSIZE system variable If you use the command line to set Grip Size values range from 1 to 255 Menu Location Settings Prerequisite None Keyboard Command PREFERENCES Chapter 6 Settings Commands 99 Edit Symbol Library This command allows you to customize the symbol library The symbols are sorted alphabetically within each category while categories are remaining in the order placed to allow the more frequently accessed categories
157. d For GPS Rod Height is the distance from the center of the GPS antenna to the ground The Show AgStar Startup Icon controls whether the AgStar Startup Icon is displayed in the lower right of the screen This startup icon brings up the AgStar function menu for launching AgStar commands without having to pick them from the pull down menu The Use Bold Font toggles between using standard or bold font for the AgStar dialogs The Twist Screen In Direction Of Movement will rotate the drawing view so that your current direction of movement is facing straight up in the view This rotate is for the view only and does not change the coordinates This option only applies to GPS and robotic total stations in commands that show the arrow icon such as Track Position The Station Type chooses the format of centerline station labels Typically 1 00 is used for feet units 1 000 is used for metric and 100 has no plus symbol in the number Serial COM Port The GPS receiver or total station attaches to your AgStar computer us Configure Tsunami General Settings GPS Settings Point Settings Stakeout Settings Depth Sounder Settings Total Station Scale Settings GIS Settings Elevation Difference Settings Equipment Type Simulation GPS ki Chapter 7 Survey Commands 110 General Settings x Rod Height 6 000 Set M Show Tsunami Startup Icon J Twist Screen In Direction Of Movement M Use Bold Font Station Type C 1 00 C
158. d options are set in the dialog shown here The Horizontal Scale controls the size and labels for the barscale For example enter 50 for 1 inch 50 feet in English mode The Barscale Style chooses between different barscale formats x Layer Name ARSCALE Select Horizontal Scale poo 3 Stage y J cs me o 50 100 150 Prompts Draw Barscale options dialog Pick location for barscale pick a point Pulldown Menu Location Draw Keyboard Command barscale Prerequisite None Draw North Arrow This command inserts a north arrow symbol You can select from several styles of arrows and you can add your own by using the Edit Library button which is similar to the Symbols Library command The north arrow symbol library is stored in the narrow dta file in the USER folder Draw North Arrow x Symbol Name NORTHO1 Select FT Specify Rotation On Screen Rotation Azimuth 0 0000 TF Specify Scale On Screen Symbol Size Scaler 1 000 Layer Name NORTH_ARRO OK Cancel Help Prompts Chapter 5 Draw Commands 75 Draw North Arrow Dialog choose an arrow symbol layer and other variables Specify insertion point pick a point X scale factor lt 1 gt Corner XYZ press Enter Y scale factor default X press Enter Rotation angle lt 0d0 0 gt press Enter Select Symbol E Symbol Category NS x VAs a AN 8 NORTHO1 NORTHO2 NORTHO3 NORTHO4 xX x pain Tey 1 B E NORTHOS NORTHO6 N
159. d since this command adjusts an existing design At the first prompt you can pick inside a design subdivision to adjust or choose to adjust the entire field To raise the field enter a positive elevation difference and to lower the field enter a negative elevation difference After the adjustment the program reports the new quantities Prompts Pick inside subdivision area to select or press lt Enter gt to select entire field pick point Elevation difference Pull Down Menu Location Design Prerequisite A design field Keyboard Command dz_pad_agstar Draw Subdivision Line You may wish to divide your field into multiple sub fields in order to assign different designs to each area There are two ways to divide up your field To draw the subdivision line with your vehicle using GPS see instructions on the Survey Subdivision Line feature To draw the subdivision line with your mouse select Draw Subdivision Line from the Design menu Steps 1 Move your mouse to the edge of your field When two arrows appear click on the desired start location for the subdivision line 2 Point and click to draw any number of intermediate points on the subdivision 3 When you are ready to draw the endpoint move the mouse to the edge of the field Chapter 8 Design Commands 151 Pick Intermediate point Enter to pick ending point Pick Ending point on perimeter or divide line 916 2163 89 1415 8 2695 SNAP GRID ORTHO POLAR
160. d to recall the distance from point number 14 to 9 and divide it by 2 Exit Options Line Side Shot Inverse lt Angle Bearing Code b NYZ ZN Coops useq For BEAR NOS qe rr Coge usea for AZ JMUTHS 16 i PIGHT Cages usec For pgles LEFT 2 RIGHT LETT HT Coges useq For Deflection Apgies LEFT RIGHT lt T gt gt L Select Line or Polyline that defines Bearing select line that defines bearing Number inverse lt Distance gt 00 Exit Options Line Side Shot Inverse lt Angle Bearing Code lt 7 gt gt E Input an E to end the command Enter S to execute the Side Shots command or I to execute the Inverse command Pull Down Menu Location Tools gt COGO Prerequisite None Side Shots This command allows the user to input any combination of turned angles azimuths or bearings to define a traverse or figure The command prompts for an Angle Bearing Code which defines the angle or bearing type Codes 1 through 4 define the bearing quadrants 1 being North East 2 South East 3 South West and 4 North West Code 5 is a north based azimuth 6 an angle turned to the left 7 an angled turned to the right 8 a deflection angle left and 9 a deflection angle right The command plots the points calculated and stores them in the current CooRDinate File if point numbering is On If Point Protect is turned On Side Shots checks if the point numbers are already stored in the file All points calculated radiate from the o
161. definition files view and edit the code definitions view and edit the coordinate file view reports and then return to the Draw Field to Finish dialog box to process the files The top section displays the code definitions The bottom section has three columns of functions each pertaining to controls for different elements of the command The Code Table section provides controls for settings sorting and reporting of codes The Code Definitions section provides tools for the creation and editing of codes The Coordinate File section provides controls for coordinate files and points It also contains the Draw controls which starts the processing of the data using Draw Field to Finish The code table editor has a list of categories and a spreadsheet of codes The spreadsheet shows the codes for the currently highlighted category The category toolbar buttons allow you to add remove edit the names and change the order of the categories There are two fixed categories The Unassigned category shows any codes with blank categories The All category shows all the codes You can control which fields are visible in the spreadsheet by using the Column Options button You can make edits to the fields in the spreadsheet or highlight a row and pick the Edit button to bring up a dialog to edit the code Code Table Code Table Settings These options provide tools for defining the coding method to be used for processing of the point data Various import tools allow
162. difications to a read only drawing use the SAVEAS command under the File menu Menu Location File Prerequisite None Keyboard Command QUIT Chapter 2 File Commands 34 Edit Commands 3 Undo This command allows you to reverse the effect of previously issued commands Menu Location Edit Prerequisite None Keyboard Command U Erase This command allows you to remove objects from a drawing Menu Location Edit Prerequisite None Keyboard Command ERASE E Delete Layer This command erases all the entities on the specified layers and deletes the layers from the drawing Erase by Layer Type Ea Layers of entities to erase ROW Select Layers from Screen Select Layers by Name m Types of entities on matching layers to erase FT All M 3DFace Are I Circle I Dimension I Ellipse P Insert M Hatch I Leader V Line M MLine M MTegt I Point IV Polpline M Solid Text I Trace FF xLine Cancel Help 1 In the Erase by Layer Type dialog box you can enter the name of the layer to be deleted or you can specify a layer to delete by picking an entity on that layer e Layers of entities to erase This field displays the layer names to be erased You also have the option of typing layer names in this field e Select Layers from Screen This option allows you to select entities on the layers you want deleted e Select Layers by Name This option allows you to choose a layer name from the list of lay
163. e Use the default settings for this point This option draws a point in the MISC layer with no linework To set your own default define a code called SC_DFLT Use default settings for all undefined codes This option will draw all undefined codes in the MISC layer by default or a user specified layer as defined in the SC_DFLT code A good way to check the data file for unmatched descriptions is to use the Print Table command and choose the Data Points and Distinct Code options This command will print the different codes in the data file and identify any undefined codes Preview Only When checked this option will temporarily draw the points and linework and allow you to review it with zoom and pan Auto Zoom Extents When checked this will force a zoom extents after Draw Field to Finish is done Report Codes Points This routine prints the code table or the data file to the screen file or printer A useful option here is to print the data file CRD Points and choose Sort by Codes which will group the data points by distinct codes Report Codes Points l xj Report Type Code Definition Options Category Match i T Sort By Codes I Only Report Codes in Current CRD I Only Report Undefined Point Codes F Use Leica Format Highest point number 320 Point ange pa I Use Report Formatter Field Code Match F Edit Codes Points The Field to Finish dialog box allows you to load the coordinate and field code
164. e Pause on Undefined Codes Auto Zoom Extents Range of Points Specify the range of points to draw Point Group Specify the point group s to process Entities To Draw The Points option draws only the points and point attributes The Lines option draws only the linework and the Symbols draws only the symbols Any combination of these options can be processed as well as individual processing of each entity Draw Within These options are methods to filter the points to draw The Polyline method prompts for a closed polyline and only draws points inside this polyline The Distance method uses a specified center point and distance to only draw points within this circle The Window Coordinate Range prompts for lower left and upper right points Chapter 9 Tools Commands 174 to define the rectangular area to draw points Point Label Settings Specify whether you want Draw Field to Finish to label the Point Numbers Descriptions and or Points Notes which are contained in the note NOT file that is associated with the coordinate CRD file Elevation Label Settings Specify the elevation labeling options The Label Zeros option will label the elevations of points with z 0 Use Parentheses will place parenthesis around the elevation text Use and Use will place the appropriate symbol in front of the elevation Locate Points on Real Z Axis Choose between locating all the points at real Z elevation all at zero elevation or to use t
165. e 45 56 37 193 59 2025218 Runoff Run Off Tracking 167 RW 109 002 08 233 23 235 037 259 241 Nn ab E a N w 3 al a A ES E e B Screen Pick Point Section Name Set Coordinate File 212 237 Set Data Directory Set Environment Variables Set Perimeter 149 Settings Commands 77 Shade SHP File 259 Shrink Wrap Entities 67 Side Shots 222 Simulation GPS 130 Slope 150 Slope Distance Smart Prompting SMI 235 Smooth Contours 103 Smooth Polyline Softdesk 235 Sokkia Special SQL 250 SRVPNO Stack Label Arc 107 Stakeout Design Surface 147 160 Standard standard deviation 135 Start Point Number Startup Wizard State Plane 2 112 113 121 131 156 557 139 Step 124 125 14011145 147 14911154 157 16 Surface 2 27 46 164 182 193 247 ON o Surface Entities Surface Inspector Surface Model SurvCE SurvCOGO Survey Benchmark Survey Commands 109 Survey Interior Surface 143 Survey Master Benchmark Surveyor Survey Perimeter 142 Survey Subdivision line 144 SurvStar 138 Symbol Library Symbol Size System Requirements TDS 178 233 236 Technical Support 1 17 125 128 Template 10 20 21 47 88 117 199 Template Database 117 250 25 Text 10 22 53 A 03 11054108 1 7 98 2 1 uce 44 Sel Bs aS E O E N N
166. e Check Dual Slope if you would like to specify your slope in terms of rows and columns Uncheck this option if you would like to specify your slope as a single direction value representing the direction along the fall line Both methods are equally effective and the choice between them is merely one of preference Draw Direction Check Draw Direction if you would like to specify the fall direction by drawing it with your mouse Uncheck this option if you would like to enter the fall direction in degrees with respect to North Find Optimal Slope Direction Find Optimal Slope Percent To calculate a best fit both Find Optimal Slope Direction and Find Optimal Slope Percent must be checked Uncheck both of these if you already know your design parameters Approximate Natural Grade Pressing this button will quickly calculate an approximate best fit for you field You must press this button before beginning the exact best fit calculation Minimum Slope Percent amp Maximum Slope Percent Use these fields to specify a range of slope percents to check during the best fit calculation Cut Fill Ratio Use the Cut Fill ratio to define the ratio between the amount the dirt swells when it is removed from the ground and the amount it shrinks when it is put back into the ground This value will vary regionally If you have the local cut swell and fill shrink factors you can divide the fill shrink by the cut swell to obtain the cut fill ratio Balance Volume T
167. e the field area the field grade and other useful information 2 A color coded cut fill spreadsheet cutsheet showing the amount of cut fill for each field segment 3 A color coded contour map depicting the existing or cut fill contour lines 4 An option to Stakeout Design Surface which tells the user the cut or fill with an on screen lightbar while navigating the field Agstar is the latest in a long line of powerful software survey tools produced by Carlson Software including Carlson SurvCE and Carlson Survey In addition to it s basic land survey and design commands it contains many of the useful features of it s predecessors allowing you to view and manipulate your survey data in a wide variety of ways Carlson Software also provides some of the best technical support in the industry If you ever need help with it don t hesitate to contact us for free technical support Quickstart Guide You will find all of the most commonly used Agstar command under the Survey Design and Display menus To survey and design your first field it is recommended that you consult the following sections of the manual in order 1 Survey Configure Survey In this section you must set your Equipment type to the GPS equipment you are using Then in the GPS Settings menu set your Project Type to State Plane 83 and set your Zone to correspond to the local region in which you are working 2 Survey Equipment Setup In this section you must s
168. e Align Local Coordinate settings 1 No points No Adjustment 2 One point Translation Only 3 Two or more points Translate Rotate and Scale Align Local Coordinates Scale 1 000005 Avg HRes 0 1636 Avg VRes 0 0000 NORTHING EASTING ELEVATION HRes URes 147857 460 1836355 750 1941 150 0 26 0 00 1835570 590 1958 000 0 11 0 00 1819917 850 1900 590 0 20 0 00 1820029 180 2005 370 0 08 0 00 HU DESC Align Local Coordinates Scale 1 000005 LATITUDE LONGITUDE ELEVATION HRMS URMS HU DESC 35 33032098 80 42152478 1941 150 35 29244028 80 42382271 1958 000 35 33021993 80 45339956 1900 590 35 35529007 80 45222096 2005 370 Add Edit Delete xY On Off Z On Off Optimize toad swe JE E ox cme Without any alignment points set AgStar will operate with no alignment which directly uses the state plane or UTM coordinates In order for the coordinates to be the true state plane coordinates in this alignment mode the GPS base receiver must be set up over a known point and the true Lat Long for the point must be entered in the base as the base position Otherwise if the base is set over an arbitrary point then the coordinates will not be true state plane Chapter 7 Survey Commands 137 In one point alignment mode one pair of GPS and local coordinates is specified The differences between the GPS and local northing easting and elevation for these points are used as the translation distances in the transfo
169. e CAD LTSCALE system variable and by the field code settings Line Type Spacing Scaler and Line Type Text Scaler The special linetype hedge is drawn with a user specified width You will be prompted for this information when you select that linetype The special linetype userdash is drawn with user specified distances for the length of the dash and the length of the gap between dashes Line Width This controls the width for the linework Only applies to 2D polylines Linetype Text This is the text that is used for the user defined linetype First use Set Linetype to either Other_E or UserDef_C Then this text will be used for the linetype For example if you have a code for a 8 PVC pipeline then you could set this text to 8 PVC Linetype Spacing Scaler This is a scaler value that is multiplied by the CAD LTSCALE system variable to give the distance between symbols in the line Linetype Text Scaler This is a scaler value that is multiplied by the CAD LTSCALE system variable to give the size of the text in a line Flip Linetype This option switches the side for the linetype which applies to non symmetrical linetypes like the treeline or guard rail Smooth Polyline This applies a modified Bezier smoothing to the polyline The smoothed polyline will pass through all the original points Chapter 9 Tools Commands 198 Hard Breakline This will tag the 3D polylines created with this code as hard breaklines In Triangulate amp Cont
170. e Gee eee awe ae aoe ee ee eee A Draw NOCtEATIOWN ie Bede en ee doe eek Bad Miah ee a ee ee ee ee dy is ela ds Be E Chapter 6 Settings Commands Drawing Setup es es ea ga ea eee sw w kw dake we Be ea a a a he ed a RA A bee oe ee ee ed Object Snap oa ek eee BAe a we ee ee a ee Oe as Set Environment Variables 0000 a a ee eee 61 62 62 63 64 64 65 66 67 68 68 68 69 71 71 73 75 75 77 78 79 81 84 86 Contents 111 re Edit Symbol Library papa hapter 7 Survey Commands Configure Survey Equipment Commands oaa ee CSI GBX Pro Impulse Laser Leica GPS System 500 u ogee Be e ea we a ee ee a ee Leica TC Series vige o oia a Shad ee ee alee ed ae ela a ae eS Be Manual Total Station 2 ee Navcom Configuration Guide a Navcom GPS Setup oso E Bk ek Oe e ee Nikon Total Stations Simulation GPS r o a e A ea ee EG A Gs Bo ees Topcon Total Stations a e e e it e e a o a e a a a a E E e E E E a Align GPS To Local Coordinates 2 a Align to Benchmark Typical Alignment Scenarios o aaa a Survey Benchmark hd Survey Interior SUTTACE ss e e svga a a a a a A A Survey Subdivision line j ee Survey Master Benchmark ee Monitor GPS Position Stakeout Design Surface ee Chapter 8 Design Commands Set Perimeter Create Existing Ground GAAL Design Field Adjust Field E
171. e Maintain a Log File Specifies whether the contents of the text window are written to a log file To specify the location and name of the log file use the Files tab in the Options dialog box e File Extension for Temporary Files Specifies a unique extension that allows you to identify your temporary files in a network environment The default extension is ac 3 Under File Open you control settings that relate to recently used files and open files Number of Recently Used Files to List Controls the number of recently used files that are listed in the File menu for quick access Valid values are O to 9 e Display Full Path In Title Displays the full path of the active drawing in the drawing s title bar or in the Carlson Survey title bar if the drawing is maximized 4 Under External References Xrefs you control the settings that relate to editing and loading external references Demand Load Xrefs Controls demand loading of xrefs Demand loading improves performance by loading only the parts of the referenced drawing needed to regenerate the current drawing External Reference File Demand Load is also controlled by the XLOADCTL system variable e Disabled Turns off demand loading e Enabled Turns on demand loading and improves performance Select the Enabled setting to enhance the loading process when you are working with clipped xrefs that contain a spatial or layer index When this option is selected other users cannot edit t
172. e drawing area The default size is 5 percent Open and Save Tab Options Fi x Current drawing Drawingl dwg Files Display Open and Save Platting System User Preferences Drafting Selection r File Save rm File Open Save as 4 7 Carson Software 2002 Drawing dwa y Software 2002 Drawing dwg gt Number of recently used files to list IV Display full path in title IV Save a thumbnail preview image al 50 Incremental save percentage External References Xref s Demand load Xrefs Enabled e Tl Retain changes to Xref layers r File Safety Precautions JV Automatic save f 20 Minutes between saves M Create backup copy with each save I Maintain a log file acs File extension for temporary files Under the Open and Save Tab you control options that relate to opening and saving files 1 Under File Save you control settings related to saving a file in Carlson Survey e Save As Displays the valid file formats used when saving a file with SAVE and SAVEAS The file format selected for this option is the default format that all drawings are saved as when you use SAVE or SAVEAS Saving an AgStar file to any DXF format affects performance Set the Save As option to AgStar 2000 Drawing to optimize performance while saving Save a Thumbnail Preview Image Specifies whether an image of the drawing should be displayed in the Preview area of the Se
173. e essentially large elevation difference models in grid format AgStar has two geoid models available Geoid99 covers the United States at 1 minute grid intervals EGM96 covers the entire globe at 15 minute intervals These Geoid models are huge and take a lot of disk space and memory The Geoid model files are not installed automatically and instead need to be installed by going to the Geoid folder on the AgStar installation CD Once installed onto AgStar you then need to specify your location by lat lon so that the program only needs to load a local portion of the Geoid model To set your local Geoid area pick the Set Geoid Area button Setting the Geoid area will carve out a Geoid model around the specified lat lon covering a square area of 2 degrees by 2 degrees which is about 100 miles by 100 miles AgsStar applies the Geoid model by subtracting the Geoid undulation from the GPS elevation The resulting elevation is then used and displayed In the Monitor function the Geoid undulation is displayed In practice the Geoid model is most applicable to two types of alignment scenarios One of these types is when setting up the base over a known point and having no alignment control points The other is when there is one alignment control point When using multiple alignment control points the Geoid model is not as important because AgStar can model the elevation difference which can generally pick up the local Geoid undulation Project Scale Factor
174. e incoming LandXML file see the Unit Differ ences item below Point Protection When enabled you are prompted for a course of action if an existing LandXML file you ve selected contains COGO points that have the same number s as those that already exist in the drawing When disabled existing point data in the project is updated with the values from the LandXML file Chapter 2 File Commands 26 Destination File Method This option allows you to indicate how the incoming data file s are named as they are imported Load Surfaces into Surface Manager When enabled this option will automatically add surface model TIN data into the Surface Manager and graphically represents draws the surface model contours according to the current settings found in the Triangulate amp Contour command Use Old FLT Triangulation File Format to Import Surface Data When enabled the older ASCII based Carlson FLT file format will be used in place of the newer and more efficient TIN file format Save All Existing Ground Profiles from One Centerline to the Same File When enabled collections of existing ground profiles associated with a particular centerline are combined into a single PRO file Change Directory This option allows you to adjust the folder location where the new data files will be written Import from LandXML Enable or disable various entries that should used to produce the data files found within the LandXML file ee ti La
175. e low either in Topcon or the radios communication problems will arise AgStar Setup Chapter 7 Survey Commands 133 1 In Configure Survey under equipment type there should be Topcon800A remote In General Settings Baud Rate should be set to 9600 2 After Configure Survey go to Total Station Setup and make sure the radio channel or radio frequency matches the channel and frequency in AgStar Press Ok when done Topcon 800A Quick Lock 1 Dismount the handle from the Topcon and mount RC 2H Secure it with the fixing screw 2 Attach RC 2R to the prism and turn it on 3 Using the Y cable attach the RC 2H to the radio and AgStar 4 In Joystick click on Quick Lock and Topcon will do angle turn until it finds a prism in which it will lock to and will start tracking 5 If RC 2H is not attached to the radio with Y cable when Quick Lock is pressed the big yellow button on RC 2H needs to be pressed in order for the Topcon to search for the prism Trimble Trimble NT300D 1 In order to properly configure the NT300D to work with AgStar it must first be powered up in Setup mode by holding down the Setup button on the front panel of the receiver while powering it on so that the advanced setup options are available Once the NT300D is powered up in this mode bring up the Setup menu via the Setup button Page down using the More menu option until the O menu item is available and select it a In the VO menu select
176. e of file to write with the Coordinate Order radio buttons There are several variations on point number northing easting elevation and descriptions as well as specific formats for Leica Geodimeter Zeiss Maptech and D45 formats Chapter 9 Tools Commands 210 In addition there is an option User Defined Format to define the order of the fields output When using the User Defined format after selecting OK the User Define Export Format dialog will appear On this dialog specify the order of the fields by defining a number sequence in each field You can skip fields and omit data in the output file by leaving None in the sequence field for this data The point data to export can be specified by selecting a range of points or by a selection set of points from the screen The desired option is specified by selecting the option under the Selection Method on the Export Text ASCII File dialog A description filter is also available for exporting only points from the range or selection set with certain descriptions After selecting the OK button another dialog appears that allows you to specify a new text ASCII file or to append data into an existing file The standard file selection dialog allows you to specify the export file name Export Text ASCII File x M Coordinate Order e eeeee In in le lw Im io PtH North East Elevation Desc Pt North East Elevation Desc PtH East North Elevation Desc North East Elevation Desc
177. e of each triangle in the triangulation The Major Flow Tracking method draws starting in triangles where the drainage area coming into triangle exceeds the specified Cutoff Area Above value The flow lines can be drawn as either 2D or 3D polylines For 2D polylines the linetype can be specified or the special linetype with flow direction arrows can be used This special flow linetype has controls for the size and frequency of the flow arrows Runoff Tracking Options xj Runoff Method Selection C Single Point Tracking Whole Surface Tracking ci 3 Cutoff Area Above 1000 0 Runoff Layer RUNOFF Select Polylines Type 2D Polyline 3D Polyline r Linetype Settings MV Draw Flow Direction Arrows Arrow Spacing Scaler os Arrow Size Scaler 0 1 Chapter 9 Tools Commands 164 The Draw Connections function draws lines with arrows between the triangles for how the program has determined their flow connections B E ETS f J x A f E AE X os pa 4 gt 7 gt A Y y y f K gt gt 7 a V lt gt y P E y lt 7 j i y EN f f ae e j gt IS k A P R A Y PE U j hi E y NY j e A 4 IN a AS y il AX gt r L e k f l ESA A _ N _ F ME ir ee lt K y j gt When a triangulation file is processed by W
178. e or pline to extend select line or polyline Pick the polyline near the place to extend 2 Enter or pick distance to draw A B C E L M The line is extended to a total length of 50 units 3 Enter or pick distance to draw A B C E L M The pointer is turned to the right 4 Enter or pick distance to draw A B C E L M A polyline is drawn to 75 units 5 Enter or pick distance to draw A B C E L M The pointer is turned toward NE at a bearing of 45 degrees 6 Enter or pick distance to draw A B C E L M A polyline is drawn to 50 units N O P R S T U Help T50 N O P R S T U Help R N O P R S T U Help 75 N O P R S T U Help 50 Sets pointer direction by bearing in format Qdd mmss with Q quadrant d degrees m minutes s seconds e g 130 1005 is NE 30 degrees 10 min utes and 5 seconds Reverses pointer direction Moves pointer to next point Moves pointer to previous point Undo the last Extend by Distance command Closes the polyline Opens the polyline Displays this list N O P R S T U Help B145 0000 7 Enter or pick distance to draw A B C E L M N O P R S T U Help Press Enter Press Enter to end the command Menu Location Edit Extend gt Prerequisite An existing line or polyline with at least one segment from which to start Keyboard Command EXTENDER Break by Closed Polyline This command will force a break where all lines and polylines cross the break polyline In addition to br
179. e second raw data file to the first e Draw Traverse Sideshot Lines This command draws lines for all the traverse and sideshot records Sideshot Traverses are traverses that do not lead to the closing or ending point You can specify different layers so that you can draw different lines with different colors This command does not process the raw file Instead it reads the raw file and for each traverse and sideshot record it looks up the coordinates for the occupied and foresight points in the CRD file You may need to run the No Adjust command under Process Compute Points menu of the Raw Editor before you run this command Draw Options x Traverse Layer Rav SideShot Traverse Layer STRAY Sideshot Layer SHOT 7 Cancel e Renumber Points This command renumbers points in the raw file This applies to all point numbers including TR SS and PT records You specify the range of point numbers to change and the amount to change in the dialog box Renumber Points Ea Range of Points to Renumber 1 20 Number to 4dd to Point Numbers Cancel Format of the Raw File RW5 extension The following are supported record header codes with their field headers BK Backsight OP Occupy Point Number BP Backsight Point Number if 0 the next field s azimuth will be used for BS Back Azimuth BC Back Circle DS Description LS Line of Sight Chapter 9 Tools Commands 241 HI Height of Instrument HR Height of Rod Target
180. e trees drawn in various orientations Rotate To Line This option applies to points that are part of Field to Finish linework This option will align the point attributes and symbol to the associated linework Symbol Size Scaler This is a scaler value that is multiplied by the horizontal scale to obtain the actual size in the drawing The horizontal scale can be set in Drawing Setup Custom Attributes This feature allows you to use customized blocks that have customized attributes the tag value pairs This feature works for both point attribute blocks and symbols For attribute blocks Field to Finish looks for attributes with the tags PT ELEV2 and DESC2 The custom attributes feature allows you to define additional attributes in their custom blocks on a per field code basis The dialog shows five attributes at a time The number of attributes is unlimited Use the Next and Back buttons to show more attributes For an example the custom block could have an attribute with the tag TREE SPECIES and there is a sep arate field code for each species of tree Each of those field codes can specify the value that should be assigned to the attribute that has the TREE_SPECIES tag Then when the points are drawn the tree species is shown Note that the custom attributes must have their Constant and Preset properties set to no The custom attributes settings in F2F should not use those tags that the software already handles PT ELEV2 and DESC
181. eaking lines and polylines you can also put the segments to new layers based on whether the segments are inside or outside the break polyline Polylines with arc segments are not handled To reconnect the broken lines and polylines use the Join Nearest command Prompts 1 Select the clip edge polyline pick a closed polyline Chapter 3 Edit Commands 40 2 Select the polylines and lines to be clipped Select Objects pick the entities to break 3 Specify layer names for Inside segments Yes lt No gt Yes 4 Enter a layer name for the Inside segments lt 0 gt Press Enter 5 Specify layer names for Outside segments Yes lt No gt Yes 6 Enter a layer name for the Outside segments lt 0 gt Final Menu Location Edit Break gt Prerequisite A closed polyline Keyboard Command CLIPLINE Break at Intersection This command allows you to break a line arc or polyline at the intersection of another line arc or polyline This command is often used in conjunction with the Area by Lines amp Arcs command because many times to get the correct area of a figure you must break it from adjoining lines Prompts 1 Select Line Arc or Polyline to Break Select object select entity to break 2 int on Pick Intersection to break at pick intersection point Menu Location Edit Break gt Prerequisite None Keyboard Command BREAKAT Change Properties This command allows you to change certain properties of existing objects
182. ed then the Startup Wizard is finished Draw Locate Points will import the points into the drawing using the same symbol and layer for all the points From the Draw Locate Points dialog set the symbol layer and point attributes to draw description elevation and then pick the Draw All button The Field To Finish command will import the points into the drawing using different layers and symbols depending on the point descriptions that refer to the code table defined in Field to Finish Also Field to Finish can draw linework See the Draw Locate Point and Field To Finish commands for more information on running these routines After drawing the points the wizard will zoom the display around the points Then the wizard is finished Chapter 1 Product Overview 11 AuthorizingA gstar The first time you start Agstar the Registration Wizard is displayed Registration Wizard xi Install Info User Info Authorize m Registration Options Form Fill in information and send registration form response in 48 hours or less Intemet Register on line instantly C Enter change key C Register Later By clicking Next user confirms uninstallation of upgraded copies and or uninstallation of Carlson Software from old hardware 1 Carlson Software has installed an automated procedure for registering your software license Change keys are no longer given over the telephone Please choose one of the following registration
183. ed point and point 3 as the backsight For more information see the Inverse command The current occupied point and backsight are shown in the lower right hand corner of the AutoCAD status bar just below the command line Chapter 9 Tools Commands 220 Prompts Set Occupied Point Pick point or point number pick a point 5000 5000 0 0 Set backsight method Azimuth Bearing None lt Point gt Press Enter to accept the Point default value To select a different option enter the first letter of the desired option and press enter Set Backsight Point Pick point or point number pick a point 5184 76 5381 3 0 0 Pull Down Menu Location Tools gt Cogo Prerequisite None Traverse This command allows the user to input any combination of turned angles azimuths or bearings to define a traverse or figure The command prompts for an Angle Bearing Code which defines the angle or bearing type Codes 1 through 4 define the bearing quadrants 1 being North East 2 South East 3 South West and 4 North West Code 5 is a north based azimuth 6 an angle turned to the left 7 an angle turned to the right 8 a deflection angle left and 9 a deflection angle right The command draws lines between located points if the Line On Off is set to on and plots the points calculated and stores them in the current CooRDinate File if point numbering is On If Point Protect is turned On Traverse checks if the point numbers are already stored in the file This
184. edures including the use of arrow keys and or pointer movements to make changes Once changes have been made you must use the CHANGE options explained below to effect changes Pressing enter at the edit field will have no effect on the item in the list If the item selected is a read only variable the edit field will be grayed out and will not allow input e Description When an item on the list box is picked its definition is referenced and displayed in this field This can be a benefit in learning the uses of the assorted system variables This is a display only field so you can t change the description given Chapter 6 Settings Commands 84 2 Under Type Group the type of variable will be displayed indicated by one of the radio buttons Each of these types are explained below for your benefit For additional information on variable types used by AutoCAD obtain and consult a source of AutoCAD documentation e Integer Defined as a whole number in the range from 32767 to 32768 no decimal value accepted e Real Defined as a real number in the range from 1 797E 308 to 1 797E 308 with extreme decimal accuracy maintained Some real variables have a smaller range than previously stated String Defined as a sequential array of characters in the range from 0 to 65535 characters with a range of ASCII 0 255 Numbers can be included in strings even though they have no mathematical significance e 2D Point Defined as a list of two
185. elect Installation Type Select the desired installation type e Typical All the application features will be installed C Compact The minimum required features will be installed This option is recommended ifthe available disk space is low C Custom Use this option to choose which application features you want installed and where they will be installed Recommended for advanced users lt Back Cancel Typical installs the following features e Program files Executables menus toolbars Help templates TrueType fonts and additional support files e Internet tools Support files e Fonts SHX fonts e Samples Sample drawings e Help files Online documentation Chapter 1 Product Overview 6 Compact installs only the program files and fonts Custom installs only the files you select By default the Custom installation option installs all Agstar features To install only the features you want choose a feature and then select one of the following options from the list e Will be installed on local hard drive Installs a feature or component of a feature on your hard drive e Entire feature will be installed on local hard drive Installs a feature and its components on your hard drive e Feature will be installed when required only Installs a feature on demand e Entire feature will be unavailable Makes the feature unavailable 6 On the Destination Folder dialog box do one of the following ii AgStar 2002 S
186. elect the codes for processing and turn them on Also it can be used to make a global change to all the codes Add The new code definition is inserted in the list in the position after the currently selected one If none are selected for positioning the new code is placed at the top Only one code definition may be highlighted before running this routine Copy This option copies the definition of a selected code It opens the Edit Field Code Definition dialog and copies the definition of the selected code to the appropriate settings It does not copy the name of the code It is a time saving tool to use when creating codes that are similar with only a couple of differences Cut This command will remove the highlighted code definitions from the list and puts them in a buffer for retrieval with Paste Paste This command will insert the code definitions put in the buffer by the Cut command These codes will be inserted after the row of the currently highlighted code or at the top Search Allows you to search for a specific code in the list Coordinate File Set CRD File This command allows you to specify a coordinate CRD CGC MDB ZAK file to process Edit Points This command opens the Edit Points spreadsheet editor See Edit Points for more details Draw This command returns to the Draw Field to Finish dialog box Coding Examples Chapter 9 Tools Commands 199 Under the Carlson Projects folder there is an example that shows the differ
187. ent ways for linework coding along with examples for many of the special codes The examples are in f2f_example crd and f2f example fld Here is a breakdown of the features that the points illustrate Point 1 Point Entity by itself Points 2 3 Using Begin code to start a line end line using Begin code for next line Points 4 5 Using Begin and End to start and stop linework Point 6 Point Entity by itself after End code Points 7 11 Linework by code defined as Polyline entity type using End as break between linework Points 12 15 Linework by code defined as Polyline entity type using Begin as break between linework Points 16 19 Linework by code defined as Polyline entity type using after code instead of Begin End to separate linework Points 20 22 Linework by code defined as Polyline entity type without using Begin End to start stop linework Points 24 26 3 point curve using on PC code Points 27 30 3 point curve using PC Point codes Points 32 33 2 point tangent curve using PC Point codes Points 35 39 reverse curve using PC Point codes Point 40 Regular point without extra descriPointion Point 41 Using to use a code descriPointion as a suffix Point 42 Using to use a code descriPointion as a prefix Point 43 Using to append a descriPointion Point 44 Using to add a descriPointion as a prefix Point 45 Using ROT and a Point to rotate to that Point Point 46 Using ROT and a value to set the rotation Point 47 Using
188. enterlines Profiles etc and adding the single Road Network file will also add the referenced file s into the Export to LandXML File dialog box Export to LandXML File Add remove using standard Windows click shift click and or ctrl click functional ity or otherwise organize the data file s that is to be incorporated into the LandXML file Change Directory This option allows you to adjust the folder location from where selected data files should be referenced often used for project revision purposes Chapter 2 File Commands 31 Report Create a report suitable for file transmission or archival purposes of the file s selected to be incorporated into the LandXML file ii x Land lt ML Units Imperial USSurveyFoot had Land lt ML Info Y Point Protection IV Exported Element Protection m Precision Distance je Elevation e Angle je Area jo Station e e Diameter Export Help LandXML Units Specify the desired Units of Measure that reflect the outgoing data Point Protection When enabled you are prompted for a course of action if an existing LandXML file you ve selected contains COGO points that have the same number s as those being selected for the LandXML file When disabled point data you ve selected for the LandXML file are automatically written to or updated into the existing LandXML file Exported Element Protection When enabled you are prompted if existing data such as a ce
189. er releases of an Autodesk product that have never been saved in Carlson Survey 2000 format The list displays the default value Normal and alphabetically displays any plot styles defined in the currently loaded plot style table Default Plot Style for Objects Sets the default plot style that is assigned when you create new objects The list displays a BYLAYER BYBLOCK and Normal style and it alphabetically displays any plot styles defined in the currently loaded plot style table e Add or Edit Plot Style Tables Displays the Autodesk Plot Style Table Manager a Windows Explorer window You can create or edit plot style tables with the Autodesk Plot Style Table Manager System Tab Options a Lx Current drawing Drawingl dwg Files Display Open and Save Plotting System User Preferences Drafting Selection m Current Pointing Device m General Options T 5 Pointing Devi TT Single drawing compatibility mode ur Aa bb dc V Display OLE properties dialog M Show all warming messages Beep on error in user input JV Allow long symbol names Accept input from Digitizer only Digitizer and mouse r Live Enabler Options Check Autodesk Point A for Live Enablers C Never When Autodesk Point A is available in Today C Always Bo Maximum number of unsuccessful checks OK Cancel Apply F Under the System Tab you control AgStar system settings 1 Under Current Pointing Device
190. ers use the Save As command and change to Drawing Template DWT under Save as Type The default drawing template that is used is named Carlson12 DWT This template name will correspond to the version of AutoCAD that is being used You can overwrite this default template or make a new drawing template If you make a new one you may want to edit the Carlson icon to use the new one To edit the icon highlight the icon with one click and then click the right mouse button Choose Properties and then Shortcut and change the drawing template name There are two different methods for connecting linework One method creates line work by connecting points with the same code The linetype is defined by the code as either points only no line work lines 2D polylines both 2D and 3D polylines or 3D polylines breaklines Distinct lines with the same code are defined by adding a group number to the end of the code name in the data file With this method all points with the description CODE1 will be one line while points with CODE2 will be another line Both CODE1 and CODE2 use the definition for CODE For example the code EP could be a code for edge of pavement that is to be connected as 3D polylines If there are two separate edge of pavement lines on the left and right sides of a road all the points for the left side could have the description EP1 and the points on the right side could be EP2 The second method is the PointCAD format This method also conne
191. ers in the drawing 2 Under Types of entities on matching layers to erase you specify which types of entities to erase You can clear All and specify which entity types to include in the selection set For instance if you have both linework and points on the same layer and you want to erase only the linework you can clear All and select Line and Polyline Menu Location Edit Prerequisite None Keyboard Command LDEL Move This command allows you to displace objects a specified distance in a specified direction Chapter 3 Edit Commands 36 Menu Location Edit Prerequisite None Keyboard Command MOVE M Copy This command copies all objects you select to the Clipboard You can paste the contents of the Clipboard into a document or drawing as an OLE object You can also use CTRL C to run this command If the cursor is in the drawing area Carlson Survey copies the selected objects to the Clipboard If the cursor is on the command line or in the text window the program copies the selected text to the Clipboard Menu Location Edit Clipboard gt Prerequisite None Keyboard Command COPYCLIP Explode This command allows you to break a compound object into its component objects Results differ depending on the type of compound object you re exploding The following is a list of objects that can be exploded and the results for each e All Explodable Objects Produces object geometry that may look the same but the color
192. ertex is calculated for you Prompts 1 Select polyline to add to pick a polyline 2 Pick or enter point to add pick a point Menu Location Edit Polyline Utilities gt Prerequisite A polyline Keyboard Command ADDPL Close Polylines This command allows you to close a selection set of open polylines Menu Location Edit Polyline Utilities gt Prerequisite Open polyline s Keyboard Command CLOSEPL Edit Polyline Vertex This tool allows you to make changes in the coordinates of vertices on all polyline types Upon execution you will be asked to select a polyline to edit Upon selection a temporary marker will be placed at all of the vertices of the polyline making them easy to distinguish Then pick near the vertex you wish to edit and the following dialog appears At the top of the dialog it identifies the type of polyline being 2D or 3D In the case of 2D polylines it allows you convert the polyine You have the ability to type in new northing easting or elevation values You can also determine the 3D coordinate position by using distances and slope to from adjacent points As you change the values in the dialog new values for derivatives are being calculated For example if you change the horizontal distances the coordinates will change Edit Polyline Yertex 3D Polpline F Convert 2D Polpline to 3D Northing Easting Elevation E From Previous Point Hz Distance Slope m To Next Point Hz Distance Slope
193. es list this item is enabled When By Scaler is selected and the area is less than this minimum the area label is sent to a table Area Reference Numbering There are three different methods for setting the reference number Next Available will automatically use the lowest available number Specified With Prompt will prompt you for a number for each area Specified with Auto Numbering will automatically use the lowest available number starting with the specified number Auto Place Table References When checked will automatically place the area reference label according to the settings for the area labels as specified in the Label Field and Settings tab see above Otherwise you will be prompted to pick each label location manually Chapter 9 Tools Commands 226 Area Defaults Pq Label Fields and Settings Table Process Settings rea Commands Maz Gap to Join Areas by Lines and Arcs 0 000100 C Prompt whether to retain polylines created by Area by Interior Point Polyline Layer Area Commands Tab Max gap to join You use this option during Area by Lines amp Arcs command When connecting lines and arcs that define the perimeter the program will join endpoints if the distance between the two points is less than the specified gap Otherwise the program will report an error and will not report an area Prompt whether to retain polylines created by Area by Interior Point When checked the user will be asked w
194. et up your equipment specific setting This usual requires configuring your stationary GPS unit to base and your mobile GPS unit to rover 3 Survey Survey Master Benchmark In this section you will survey a reference point defining the origin of the coordinate system 4 Survey Survey Perimeter In this section you will survey the border of your field 5 Survey Survey Interior Surface In this section you will survey the interior of your field 6 Design Create Existing Ground Grid In this section you will define a grid interval a necessary step when your survey is complete and you want to begin designing the field 7 Design Design Field In this section you will generate a design for you field 8 Now use any of the command under the Display menu to generate design information To inspect the field design with your mouse run Design Surface Inspector To view the cuts and fills at your vehicle s position using an onscreen lightbar go to Tools Stakeout Design Surface To create field subdivisions consult the following commands in order Chapter 1 Product Overview 2 1 Survey Survey Subdivision Line or Design Draw Subdivision Line The first of these allows you to create a subdivision line with your vehicle The second allows you to create a subdivision line by drawing it with the mouse 2 Design Assign Subdivision Area Names Use this command to name or rename a subdivision area 3 Design Area Name Inspector
195. eter should match the channel station and remote address in AgStar 8 To set the Geodimeter for remote mode press on RPU then 3 for remote and 1 for ok you can answer NO to Define Window If ENT is pressed the instrument will ask Aim to A Press Ent for which the user have aim to upper lower left boundary and press ENT for Aim to B Press Ent aim to the upper lower right boundary and press ENT For Measure ref obj press ENT if you want a reference object otherwise press NO Than the instrument is going to say remove keyboard however the keyboard can stay on 9 After Geodimeter display screen turns itself off it s ready for AgStar AGSTAR 1 In Configure Survey under equipment type there should be Geodimeter In General Settings Baud Rate should be set to 9600 2 After Configure Survey go to Total Station Setup and make sure GeoRadio is checked and the channel station and remote address is the same as it is in the total station NOTE We recommend using channel 3 3 If calibration box is checked the instrument will calibrate to turn of calibration the box should be unmarked 4 In setup there is also an option to turn on off tracking lights Geodimeter 600 For Direct Connection 1 Connect the instrument to the battery pack and the control unit to AgStar 2 Under AgStar go to Configure Survey and place Geodimeter in Equipment type 3 Click on General Settings make sure that the baud rate is set to 9600
196. etup HI Instrument and Rod Height This record sets the instrument and rod heights used in elevation calculations This record should precede any traverse and sideshot records that you want the heights applied to BK BackSight The backsight record contains the occupied point number backsight point number backsight azimuth and the set azimuth This record should precede any traverse and sideshot records that use this setup If no backsight point is entered the program uses the backsight azimuth to turn angles from The Set Azimuth is the circle reading of the instrument when sighting the backsight A Set Azimuth of zero is the default PT Store Point The store point record consists of a point number northing easting elevation and description When processing this data will be stored as a point in the coordinate file DS Description The description record is an additional note appears in the spreadsheet editor and printouts This record is not used in processing CL Closing Shot The closing shot record is the traverse record where the foresight point is the closing point for the traverse This record is used by the adjustment commands in the Process menu There should be only one CL record in each Traverse loop Name Record in the raw file If there is no CL record the process adjustment routines will prompt for which shot is the closing shot AB Angle Balance The Angle Balance is the traverse record that the Angle
197. etup 15 x Destination Folder Select the destination folder The AgStar Installation Wizard will install the files for AgStar 2002 in the following folder CAoem2k Oem xPAD Browse DiskCosting lt Back Cancel Choose Next to accept the default destination folder directory Choose Browse to specify a different drive and folder where you want Agstar to be installed Choose any directory that is mapped to your computer including network directories or enter a new path Choose OK and then Next Setup installs some files required by Agstar in your system folder for example c Windows System or c Winnt System32 This folder may be on a different drive than the folder you specify as the installation folder for example d Program Files Agstar You may need up to 60 MB of space in your system folder depending on the components you select to install Setup alerts you if there is insufficient free space on the drive that contains your system folder 7 On the Start Installation page choose Next to start the installation Chapter 1 Product Overview 7 i AgStar 2002 Setup 01 x Start Installation Are you ready to begin installation Press the Next button to begin or the Back button to reenter the installation information lt Back Cancel 8 The Updating System dialog box is displayed while Agstar is installed ii AgStar 2002 Setup Updating System The features you selected are cu
198. ew Zoom gt Prerequisite None Keyboard Command ZOOM W Zoom Previous This command zooms to display a previous view You can restore up to 10 previous views Menu Location View Zoom gt Prerequisite None Keyboard Command ZOOM P Zoom Center This command zooms to display a window you define by picking a center point and a magnification value or height A smaller value for the height increases the magnification A larger value decreases the magnification Prompts 1 Specify center point pick a point 2 Enter magnification or height lt 226 66 gt enter a value Menu Location View Zoom gt Prerequisite None Keyboard Command ZOOM C Zoom Extents This command zooms to display the drawing extents You can use Zoom Extents transparently but it always regen erates the drawing Menu Location View Zoom gt Prerequisite None Keyboard Command ZOOM E Zoom IN This command increases the zoom factor of the current viewport by a factor of 2 0 Menu Location View Zoom gt Prerequisite None Keyboard Command ZOOM 2 0x Zoom OUT This command decreases the zoom factor of the current viewport by a factor of 0 5 Menu Location View Zoom gt Prerequisite None Keyboard Command ZOOM 0 5x Chapter 4 View Commands 54 Pan This command moves the drawing display in the current viewport The cursor changes to a hand cursor By holding down the pick button on the pointing device you lock the cursor to its cu
199. f the dialog box Attribute Format This chooses the type of point entities to create The Attribute Block format creates the Carlson point entity which is block with attributes for point elevation and description The Text Attribute format creates text entities for each of the point attributes When the Text Attribute format is selected the Set button is available where you can control which attributes to draw as text and the position rotation decimals style prefix suffix and layer for each attribute The Offset Scalers control the distance for the text from the point for the different positions These offset distances are calculated by multiplying the scaler by the horizontal scale for the drawing The Avoid Overlap With Block Attributes option expands the offset distance starting point from the point to the bounding box that encloses the point block attributes Point Attributes as Text Settings Musim e _ vas General Attributes Rotation Prefix Suffix Position Layer Style 7 Point 0 0 Lower Right PNTTXT Set STANDARD Set E Nothing 0 0 N Lower Right PNTTXT Set STANDARD Set E Easting 0 0 E Low ght PNTTXT Set STANDAR Set Y Eevation 0 0 Lower Right PNTTXT Set STANDARD l Set Y Description 0 0 Lower Right PNTTXT l Set STANDARD Set Note and SurvCE GIS Attributes Notes ny Rotation 0 0 Position Lower Right gt Layer PNTTXT Set Style STANDARD set Settings
200. fied URLs when an associated ObjectDBX application cannot be located Only URL addresses can be entered in this option 8 Automatic Save File Location Specifies the path for the file created when you select Automatic Save on the Open and Save tab 9 Drawing Template File Location Specifies the path for the template files used by the setup wizards 10Log File Location Specifies the path for the log file created when you select Maintain a Log File on the Open and Save tab 11Temporary Drawing File Location Specifies the location AgStar uses to store temporary files The program creates temporary files on disk and then deletes them when you exit the program If you plan to run the program from a write protected directory for example if you are working on a network or opening files from a CD specify an alternate location for your temporary files The directory you specify must not be write protected 12Buttons You use the following buttons to manipulate the files and paths e Browse Displays the Browse for Folder or Select a File dialog box depending on what you selected in the List of Folders and Files e Add Adds a search path for the selected directory e Remove Removes the selected search path or file e Move Up Moves the selected search path above the preceding search path Move Down Moves the selected search path below the following search path e Set Current Makes the selected project or spelling dictionary current
201. following in order 1 Verify that your BASE and ROVER are both set to the same correction type 2 Under Configure Radio check that your ROVER is set to slave and that your BASE is set to master 3 Under Configure Ports check that both your base and your rover s RTK Data Ports are set to the proper value Usually Radio Port 4 Under the Edit Base Position check that your BASE is set to a valid position Note that if the given position is too far away from the position the BASE is reading the BASE will not send corrections 5 If you re trying to use RTCM make sure the BASE and ROVER have the same station ID s 6 Try increase the RTK Max Age constraint 7 Under Navigation Status verify that the Navigation is valid on both units If either unit does not have a valid position solution correction wills not work 8 Under Monitor Corrections verify that the corrections you re using are arriving regularly If they aren t you may need to reset both units 9 Try configuring the base and rover again 10 If all else fails Soft Reset both units through the Reset Unit menu After doing so you will have to reconfigure the port settings of each device through the Configure Ports menu and wait a few minutes for the devices to recalculate their position 11 If none of these steps work contact Carlson Software Technical Support Troubleshooting when you can t establish communication with the unit If all of your commands in the GPS
202. for any traverse or sideshot record is already a stored coordinate in the coordinate file then the program shows a list of conflicting point numbers You can either continue processing and overwrite the coordinate file coordinates with the calculated raw file coordinates or you can cancel the processing to go back to the editor to change foresight numbers Chapter 9 Tools Commands 237 e Create Point Notes This option will generate a note file NOT named after the coordinate file The note file contains additional descriptions for points With this option active the text from all note records DS records will be stored to the note file for the foresight point number preceding the note records e Decimal Places for Report Controls the number of decimals used in the report ranging from zero to four Use Report Formatter Allows you to customize the process results report by selecting the layout of the fields to display The report formatter can also output the report to Microsoft Excel and Access Without the report formatter the program generates a standard results report e Calculate State Plane Scale Factor at Each Setup This will calculate a scale factor for each TR and SS record This scale factor is calculated as the average of the scale factors at the occupied and foresights points At these points the scale factor is calculated as the state plane grid factor minus the elevation divided by the earth radius SF Grid Factor Ele
203. for metric english conversion See the Scale Points command in this chapter for more information Translate Points This option translates a range of points based on entered delta x and delta y entered coordinates or translation point numbers See the Translate Points command in this chapter for more information Rotate Points This option rotates a range of points based on entered degrees or rotation entered azimuths entered bearings or rotation point numbers See the Rotate Points command in this chapter for more information Align Points This option does a translate based on a source point and destination point and then rotates to align the first source point and a second source point with the first destination point and a second destination point See the Align Points command in this chapter for more information Duplicate Points This function searches the CRD file for points with the same northing easting and elevation The tolerances for considering points to have the same coordinate are set in the dialog separately for northing easting and elevation To be counted the same coordinate both the northing easting and elevation must be within the tolerance distance The duplicate points can be erased or only reported For the erase option the first point number is kept and any higher point numbers with duplicate coordinates are erased from the CRD file Point Number Report This routine list the used and unused point numbers in the CRD file
204. foresight point to account for the earth curvature Depth Sounder Settings AgStar can use depth sounders in combination with GPS to collect points of underwater surfaces AgStar supports depth sounders that output standard NMEA data the Odom Digitrace model and the Hydrotrac model For the Odom Digitrace you also need to specify the depth unit mode that the instrument is set to The depth sounder must be connected to a separate serial port than the GPS The Baud Rate between the computer serial port and the depth sounder is also specified here The Store Depth In Notes option will record the water depth in the current note file NOT when a point is stored to the coordinate file The Debug number can be used when contacting technical support if the depth sounder is not communicating to AgStar Total Station Scale Settings Projection Type C State Plane 27 State Plane 83 Zone ma Mainland y I Calculate State Plane Scale Factor At Each Setup Project Scale Factor 1 000000000 Calculate TF Correct For Earth Curvature Prism Offset 0 0000 I Cancel Help Elevation Difference Settings These setting apply to the Elevation Difference command Grading Tolerance is the target difference between the actual elevation and the design surface AgStar can use an external Light Bar to indicate whether your current position is in cut fill or on grade Currently AgStar supports light bars made by Apache and Mikrofyn The Lig
205. formation on the uses and acceptance of the LandXML initia tive Pulldown Menu Location s File gt Export Keyboard Command landxml_export Prerequisite Carlson project data files to convert Export Google Earth File The Export Google Earth File allows you to produce a KML Keyhole Markup Language or alternatively a KMZ file of Carlson points lines arcs and polylines for rendering in other mapping and GIS applications such as Google Earth Throughout this discussion KML will be used to also describe KMZ files unless explicitly noted xi Elevation Option Drape on Google Terain 2D Use Elevation from the Drawing 3D m Export Options IV Include Selected Points JV Include Layer Information J Shade Closed Regions JV Export to KMZ Format JV Display Results in Google Earth Drape on Google Terrain 2D When this option is selected entities written to the KML file will have an Altitude setting of Clamped to ground Use Elevations from the Drawing 3D When this option is selected entities written to the KML file will have an Altitude setting of Absolute Include Selected Points When enabled this option exports selected Carlson point information to the KML lt Place mark gt lt Point gt lt Point gt lt Placemark gt tag structure Include Layer Information When enabled this option organizes exported information based on the layer of each entity with each CAD layer becoming a KML lt
206. g Layout Landscape Portrait Paper Size C 4 8 5X 11 C B 11x17 C Cl 22 34 C C2 18X 24 D1 24 36 C D2 30 42 o o o El 36 X 42 E2 36 48 Other Cancel e Layout This option lets you specify landscape or portrait paper orientation Landscape layout is where the width of the page is greater than the height of the page Portrait layout is the opposite e Paper Size This option allows you to specify the paper size The numbers in parenthesis represent drawing units and will be multiplied by the horizontal scale to determine the rectangle to be drawn If you select the Other option you will be prompted on the command line for the horizontal and vertical sizes of the paper Prompts 1 Pick or Type lower left corner point for border lt 5000 00 5000 00 0 0 gt pick point 2 Erase existing Set Paper boundary lt Yes gt No Y This prompt only appears if there is an existing paper boundary in this drawing 3 Set Limits Yes lt No gt Y If you answer Yes to Set Limits drawing limits are enabled and AgStar restricts the coordinates you can enter to within the paper boundary Drawing limits also determines the area of the drawing that can display grid dots and the minimum area displayed by the Zoom All command on the View menu To turn drawing limits off type in LIMITS on the command line and set to Off Menu Location Settings Prerequisite None Keyboard Command
207. g draws a symbol at the low point for each drainage area The High Point Locations option draws a triangle symbol at the highest point within each watershed Typically this high point will be along the watershed boundary polylines that follow the high points along the ridges between the watersheds The Pond Areas option draws a solid fill hatch in blue for the area covered by the runoff volume of low points In the example shown the Fill Watershed Areas and Sink Locations options are active The Max Flow Lines option draws polylines for the longest flow line within each watershed These longest flow polylines can be used to calculate the time of concentration The Spillover Location option draws symbols at low points within the watershed area that fill up with runoff and spillover on the way to the lowest sink location of the watershed The Setup button allows you to specify criteria for identifying spillover points These settings include the minimum drainage area storage volume drainage volume and ponding depth These settings allow you to filter out small spillover points ie a pothole and only draw the significant ones The Group Watershed Entities option will make AutoCAD groups for the set of entities drawn for each watershed The Symbol Options and Layer Options buttons allow you to set the symbols and layers to use for the entities created by Watershed Analysis The Above Point function reports the watershed data of the current pointer position i
208. ghlighted 1 e 0001 or Road the fields for this GIS table are displayed to the right in the Select Fields column Up to 6 fields or lines of GIS data can be defined for display for each GIS code table including one picture To add a field to the display list double click on the field name To remove a field from the display list highlight the GIS table to remove from and then use the Clear Settings buttons The Last Option button will remove the last field to display from the current GIS table The Picture Name will remove the image from the display list The Entire Line button removes all the fields from display for the current GIS table Chapter 11 GIS Commands 254 Quick View Settings Number of entities in C Carlson Projects CE LAD WGS base dwa with Gis Data 1 Output MDB C CARLSON PROJECTSAGIS20081GIS2008DEMO MDB Select Available Feature Select Attributes to view Clear Settings COND Last Option DATE GIS KEY Picture Name EOC PT_ID Entire Line TIME Add Attribute Gis Quick View Line Settings Mark objects Select Color Feature Name At 1 Att 2 Att 3 At At At Database Name COND DATE LOC CACARLSON PROJECTS GIS2008 G1S2008 E C Display empty line Pulldown Menu Location GIS Keyboard Command set_inspector Prerequisite MDB GIS Prompting must be created in Define Template Database and points or entities must have linked GI
209. gment When you specify the Continuous option the two vertices of the removed segments are averaged together to keep the polyline continuous When you specify the Break option the segment is left missing in the polyline resulting in two separate polylines Prompts 1 Break polyline at removal or keep continuous lt Break gt Continuous C 2 Select polyline segment to remove pick point on polyline segment Menu Location Edit Polyline Utilities gt Prerequisite A polyline Keyboard Command REMOVEPL Chapter 3 Edit Commands 49 Remove Polyline Vertex This command allows you to remove the selected vertex from a polyline Prompts 1 Select polyline vertex to remove pick point on polyline Select the vertex to remove Menu Location Edit Polyline Utilities gt Prerequisite A polyline Keyboard Command RMVERTEX Image Clip This command allows you to create new clipping boundaries for an image object Prompts 1 Select image to clip select the edge of an image 2 Enter image clipping option ON OFF Delete New boundary lt New gt enter an option or Press Enter The boundary you specify must be in a plane parallel to the image object e On Turns on clipping and displays the image clipped to the previously defined boundary e Off Turns off clipping and displays the entire image and frame If you reclip the image while clipping is turned off the program automatically turns clipping back on The program prompts you to delete
210. gn Field Design Contours Shows Hides the contours lines for the proposed field Design Grid Shows hides the grid created in the Design Field routine Cutfill Contours Shows Hides the cut fill contour lines Cutfill Labels Shows hides cut fill labels CutFill Spreadsheet After designing the field select Cut Fill Spreadsheet from the Display menu to view a spreadsheet of the resulting field If there are multiple subdivisions you will be prompted to choose the subdivision you would like displayed If you want the entire field displayed press ESCAPE A cut fill spreadsheet will be displayed with cut areas in red fill areas in blue and no grade areas in green Cut Fill Spreadsheet jerry4 2 dwg 44525 164800 289200 329600 354175 116600 339800 165300 326899 107450 222425 174600 145625 271825 106250 296100 123225 302250 77875 261300 82475 291750 65975 166950 00010000 OK BRR Re e le ololo ooo oO oO oa GS ooeoaoeo oc oo oO 6 4 i E E o a EE EE N NIN NH NWN NY bp pot i mo g p p g g E E 1 1 6 1 a D D o o 0 161525 1950 0 o 2692850 42000 186750 495375 862799 2156125 The following options are available Chapter 10 Display Commands 244 Print If you only wish to print part of the cutsheet drag your mouse over the desired region while left clicking the mouse The desired region should now be highlighted Select Print from the File menu a Print All C Print Selection Orienta
211. grid factor at the first destination point averaged with the elevation factor at the transform point times the grid factor at the transform point The other local transformation options are used when there are more than two pairs for translation points Since two pairs of points are sufficient to define the translation and rotation more than two pairs of points provides more than enough information Over Determination by Plane Similarity is used to find the least squares best fit transformation for all the given source and destination points Besides doing a translation and rotation this option will also scales the points during the transformation The Rigid Body Transformation also does a best fit least squares transformation but applies only translation and rotation with no scale Chapter 9 Tools Commands 213 Coordinate Transformation X Source Coordinates Destination Coordinates m Coordinate Format Coordinate Format C Local C Local Lat Long DD MMSS C Lat Long DD MMSS C Lat Long Decimal Degrees C Lat Long Decimal Degrees C State Plane 27 C State Plane 27 C State Plane 83 Metric C State Plane 83 Metric State Plane 83 US Ft E State Plane 83 Intl Ft C cn Plane 83 Intl Ft CUM Gerke 1886 C UTM C Other Other m Input Output to Screen Entities Ovenwrite Existing Coords f Point Numbers C Enter Coordinates New Point Numbers Cancel
212. hat do not exactly meet You specify the maximum distance to join along with other options in the dialog box shown below You can join many entities at once Chapter 3 Edit Commands 44 Max separation to join Pick Connection Method Average Endpoints Together C Directly Connect Endpoints C Eillet With Radius Zero JV Convert lines into polylines JV Join only identical layers JV Join only common elevations Cancel Help 1 You must specify the maximum separation distance parameter Entities beyond this distance will not join 2 Under Connection Method you must determine how entities are connected e Average Endpoints Together This option averages together the endpoints of the two entities when joined Directly Connect Endpoints This option directly connects the endpoints of the two entities with a polyline e Fillet With Radius Zero This option will perform a tight fillet on the two entities 3 In the Join Nearest Options dialog box you can choose to join only lines with common elevations or layers Convert lines into polylines The option will automatically convert any lines in the selection set into polylines e Join only identical layers This option will join entities on the same layer e Join only common elevations This option will join entities with identical elevations Menu Location Edit Prerequisite Lines or Polylines to be joined Keyboard Command NEARJOIN Offset 3D Polyline T
213. he RECT special code causes a rectangle to be formed on a 2D or 3D polyline using one of two different methods If a number follows RECT e g RECT10 a rectangle will be drawn 10 units to the right of the last two points ending on the point with the RECT code Use a negative offset to place the rectangle on the left side e g RECT 2 5 For example if locating the left side of a 10 rectangular concrete pad using the code conc for concrete the description of the two left points would be conc for the first point and conc rect10 for the second If no number follows RECT then the polyline will be closed by shooting right angles from the first point of the polyline and the current point and creating a new point where those two lines cross This method requires three points be established on the pad LTF The LTF LineType Flip special code switches the side for the linetype This option applies to non symmetrical linetypes like the treeline or guard rail for when you want the linetype to face the other way CIR The CIR special code stops the linework on the previous point and causes this point to create a circle in one of three different ways The first way uses just the current point as the center with the CIR special code followed immediately by the radius For example CIR5 0 will create a circle centered on this point with radius 5 and at the elevation of the current point The second method uses two points the first point
214. he application used to create the OLE object when plotting a drawing with OLE objects You can use this option if you want to optimize the quality of plotted OLE objects This setting is saved in the drawing You can also control this option by using the OLESTARTUP system variable e Hide System Printer Controls whether Windows system printers are displayed in the Plot and Page Setup dialog boxes under the File menu This option hides standard Windows system printers only You can control the size of the list of devices in the Plot and Page Setup dialog boxes by moving a device s PC3 file out of the Plotters directory and its subdirectories 3 Under Default Plot Style Behavior you control options related to plot style behavior in all drawings Changing the default plot style behavior using the Options dialog box does not affect the current drawing A plot style is a collection of property settings defined in a plot style table and applied when the drawing is plotted The default setting is Use Color Dependent Plot Styles The plot style list on the Object Properties toolbar is disabled by default You enable the list after you select the Use Named Plot Styles option and open a new drawing You can also control Default Plot Style Behavior by using the PSTYLEPOLICY system variable e Use Color Dependent Plot Styles Uses color dependent plot styles in both new drawings and drawings created in earlier versions of Autodesk products Color dependent plot sty
215. he coordinate values using the point number and associated coordinates stored in the current coordinate file The Line command links the line with the points when the line is drawn using point numbers if the Link Linework with Points option is turned on This option is set under General Settings in the Configure command in the Settings menu With links active changing a point with a command like Move Points automatically updates the line This command always draws 2D lines with a zero elevation Prompts 1 Pick point or point numbers 1 3 You may enter a single point number or a range of point numbers 2 Undo Distance lt Pick point or point numbers gt 16 3 Undo Close Distance lt Pick point or point numbers gt 35 4 Undo Close Distance lt Pick point or point numbers gt The or activates an additional prompt option that allows you to plot line segments at a 90 degree deflection angle from the last line 5 Perpendicular Distance Right 80 6 Undo Close Distance lt Pick point or point numbers gt The or activates an additional prompt option that allows you to plot line segments at a 90 degree deflection angle from the last line 7 Perpendicular Distance Left 105 12 8 Undo Close Distance lt Pick point or point numbers gt D The distance option allows you to input a distance for the next line segment The position of the cursor determines the angle 9 Enter distance 174 32 10Undo Close Distance lt
216. he file while it is being referenced Enabled with Copy Turns on demand loading but uses a copy of the referenced drawing Other users can edit the original drawing e Retain Changes to Xref Layers Saves changes to layer properties and states for xref dependent layers When the drawing is reloaded the properties currently assigned to xref dependent layers are retained This setting is saved in the drawing Plotting Tab Chapter 6 Settings Commands 91 Options El El Current drawing Drawingl dwg Files Display Open and Save Plotting System User Preferences Drafting Selection Default plot settings for new drawings Default plot style behavior for new drawings Use as default output device Use color dependent plot styles ES Acrobat PDF Writer y C Use named plot styles Use last successful plot settings Default plot style table Add or Configure Plotters None z Default plot style for layer O r General plot options When changing the plot device Keep the layout paper size if possible Default plot style for objects C Use the plot device paper size System printer spool alert Add or Edit Plot Style Tables Always alert and log errors y eee fT Use Page Setup to change the plot style table OLE plot quality uy forthe current layout in the current drawing Text e g text document y Use OLE application when plotting OLE objects Tl Hide system printer
217. he following items for further controlling area label generation Use Commas in Labels This allows you to use commas in the area labels Use MText Check this box to turn on the use of MText for area labels If this is checked all area labels will be grouped into as few MText entities as possible Area labels with different text styles justification or layers will not be combined into the same MText entity Erase Previous Labels When checked previous area labels for the area being relabeled will be erased Label Placement When auto placement of area labels is used the labels can be placed either at the centroid of area or at the rear side This is accomplished by selecting either the Center or Rear Side radio button respectively When Center is selected the user can choose to have the labels oriented according to the side lines of the area by checking the Align By Sides checkbox When either Align By Sides or Rear Side is selected the checkbox Flip Text for Twist Screen can be selected to have the label rotated 180 degrees to present it in the best reading orientation relative to the current Twist Screen rotation setting Draw Symbol Around Lot Description When the Lot Description field is included in the Used Fields list the user can check this checkbox to have a symbol drawn around the Lot Description field When this box is checked you specify the symbol name in the Symbol Name field or click on the current symbol drawn to the right to gra
218. he real Z setting as defined in the individual codes PC PT Curve Type Sets the method for drawing curves with more than 3 points The Bezier option draws a smooth polyline through all the curve points The Sequential Arcs method draws multiple arcs with arc end points at each of the curve points These arcs are tangent to the preceding line segment The Best Fit method creates a single best fit curve for all the curve points between the PC and PT Layer Prefix Optional layer prefix added to all entities drawn with Draw Field to Finish Erase Existing Draw Field to Finish Entities When checked this option will erase from the drawing any old entities created by previous Field To Finish runs before drawing the new entities In Range This option only erases and redraws those Draw Field to Finish entities that are within the specified range of points to process Creating Point Groups Point Groups can be created in one or two different ways Each field code definition can specify Point Group s that all point numbers that use that code will be added to Multiple field codes can use the same Point Group name Check the By Code Definition checkbox for that option The second method is to automatically create Point Groups for each code that is processed Check the Automatically By Code checkbox for that option Ignore Code Suffix if checked will cause the codes to be considered after removing the numeric suffix For example points with the EP10 and E
219. he runoff volume to determine when the volume is enough to spillover a local depression in the surface Besides the Rainfall amount the runoff coefficients as defined in Define Runoff Layers are also used to calculate the runoff volumes When the local depression is small enough the runoff will continue through Otherwise this spot is called a sink for where the runoff stops The Round to dZ is a process option that rounds the elevations of the surface model to simplify the processing Set this value to zero for no rounding The Allow Overflow Along Boundary option applies to watersheds that have runoff that hits the surface border This option will check whether this border runoff can spillover and merge with the neighboring watersheds along the border Chapter 9 Tools Commands 162 The Draw Watersheds function draws the watershed areas using the settings under the Draw tab The back arrow next to the Draw Watersheds button will erase any previous Draw Watershed entities The Watershed Perimeters option will draw closed polyline perimeters for each watershed area The Fill Watershed Areas option will solid fill hatch each area using different colors The Buffer Hatch option will hatch the perimeters of the watershed areas with the specified width instead of hatching in the entire watershed area The Hatch Structure Areas option will hatch the drainage areas covered by structure inlets defined in the Structures tab The Sink Locations settin
220. he terms of this EULA If you do not agree to the terms and conditions of this EULA you may not use the SOFTWARE IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS EULA DO NOT INSTALL OR USE ANY PART OF THE SOFTWARE Carlson Software Inc referred to as LICENSOR develops and or licenses proprietary computer programs and sells use licenses for such proprietary computer programs together with or apart from accompanying copy righted material and documentation and End User desires to obtain the benefits thereof and in return for which is willing to abide by the obliga tions and fee agreements applicable to LICENSOR s use licenses in LICENSOR s proprietary computer programs For good and valuable consideration including but not limited to license grant in accordance with this Agreement by LICENSOR to End User s covenant regarding LICENSOR s proprietary rights LICENSOR agrees to permit End User to utilize materials representing LICENSOR s product or products subject to the following terms and conditions 1 License Grant Subject to the terms conditions and limitations of this EULA LICENSOR hereby grants End User a personal limited non exclusive non transferable license to utilize the Software Product you have pur chased The license granted in this EULA creates no license express or implied to any other intellectual property of Licensor except for the specific Software Product which they have lawfully purchased from LICENSOR
221. he text size of labels created by Surface Inspector Cut Fill Label Interval Sets how many grid cells to skip between labels Set this value lower to increase the density of the cut fill labels Label Existing Surface Elevation Controls whether to label the existing elevation along with the cut fill labels Label Design Surface Elevation Controls whether to label the design elevation along with the cut fill labels Contour Interval The elevation difference between each contour line Color Contouring Check this option to show the contour lines with a color gradient Label Interval Controls how many elevation labels per contour Contour Interval The elevation difference between each contour line Chapter 10 Display Commands 247 Contour Label Size Sets the text size for the contour labels Break Contours at Label Controls whether to create a gap in the contours under the labels Display Options i ER General Options Point Size Benchmark Size Surface Inspector Label Size Cut Fill Labels Label Interval Label Existing Surface Elevation TF Label Design Surface Elevation o o Contour Options Contour Interval I Color Contouring Label Interval Three Per Contour y Contour Label Size Break Contours at Label i Cancel Help Pull Down Menu Location Display Prerequisite None Keyboard Command ag display_options Chapter 10 Display Commands 248 GIS C
222. he vertical component toggled off will not use the elevation of that point for adjustment calculations Note When you toggle either the XY or Z component off or on for any alignment point the scale factor and Horiz Vert residuals are recalculated automatically Breifly toggling XY or Z components off or on and reviewing the scale factor and residuals changes is a quick approach to finding the best alignment points AgStar can handle an unlimited number of alignment points Highlight an existing alignment point entry and pick Delete to delete that alignment point Pick the Add button to create an alignment point The Add Alignment Point dialog box appears There are two ways to enter the local coordinate points by entering the N E Z or by using an existing point number stored in the current coordinate CRD file The GPS values can also be specified by two methods by entering in the Latitude Longitude and Height or by occupying the control point with the rover and taking a GPS reading at this location Manually entering the Lat Lon can only be done when the base is setup on a known location using a true lat lon position Otherwise AgStar needs to use the Read GPS method For this method the base can be setup with a lat lon that only needs to be close within 100 feet of the actual lat lon This type of position can be read from an autonomous GPS posiiton With the base setup on this approximate lat lon go with the rover to the control points and use
223. he video display pointing devices printers and plotters 3 Miscellaneous File Names Specifies the names and locations of various types of files e Menu File Specifies the location of the menu file Default Internet Location Specifies the default Internet location used by both the Connect to Internet option on the Help menu and the Launch Browser button on the Standard toolbar 4 Text Editor Dictionary and Font File Names Specifies a number of optional settings Text Editor Application Specifies the text editor application to use for editing mtext objects e Custom Dictionary File Specifies a custom dictionary to use if you have one Alternate Font File Specifies the location of the font file to use if Carlson Survey cannot locate the original font and an alternate font is not specified in the font mapping file If you choose Browse the program displays the Chapter 6 Settings Commands 87 Alternate Font dialog box from which you can choose an available font e Font Mapping File Specifies the location of the file that defines how Carlson Survey should convert fonts it cannot locate 5 Print File Spooler and Prolog Section Names Specifies settings related to plotting e Plot File Name For Legacy Plotting Scripts Specifies a default name for the temporary plot files used with plotting scripts created with earlier versions of Autodesk products The default name is the drawing name plus plt file name The default n
224. hese different descriptions one sequence definition can store these descriptions in order Then just the sequence code such as RD is used in the field The cross section can be shot in left to right then left right order right to left then right to left order or alternating left to right then right to left order The alternating method is known as the Zorro style The one restriction is that the shots always start from a right or left edge To set up a sequence choose the Sequence toggle in the Edit Code dialog Then pick the Define Code Se quence button This brings up a dialog for entering the sequence codes in order These sequence codes should be defined as normal codes somewhere else in the Draw Field to Finish code table ie SHD as a 3D polyline In the field the one template code is used for all the cross sections shots ie RD for all the points Then Draw Field to Finish will substitute this template code with the sequence codes ie substitute RD with SHD Chapter 9 Tools Commands 189 Define Code Sequence X Order of Shots Code 1 1611 Code 2 A E Code 3 38 13 Code 4 4914 Code 5 5 10 15 Code 6 ss Code 7 Code 8 ll 3 Code 9 Code 10 Code 11 ss Code 12 I Zorro Style f E Cancel Help a 111 ie 113 11 114 SAD 115 101 SHD 104 10 SHD Resulting points and linework showing Zorro style template Define Code Sequence This sets the code names that make up the sequence
225. hether to retain the polylines created by the Area by Interior Point command Polyline Layer Will be enabled when Prompt whether to retain polylines created by Area by Interior Point is checked to allow the user to select the layer that any such created polylines will be placed in Load Save These buttons save and recall all the Area Default settings to a ARS settings file Tip Keep in mind that changes in Area Defaults if changed from the Area Layout pulldown menu only apply to that work session If changed within the Configure command the changes apply to all new work sessions as well Pulldown Menu Location Tools gt Areas Keyboard Command defarea Prerequisite None Inverse with Area This command generates a report of the angle and horizontal distance between a series of points and calculates the area of the closed figure defined by the points Curve data can also be entered and reported The points can be either picked on the screen or entered by point number You can also enter a range of point numbers 1 e 1 9 The closure is reported using the total distance inversed and the difference between the starting and ending points as the closure error At the first command prompt you can enter O for Options to bring up the command options The Different Radius Tolerance checks that the distance between the PC and radius point and the PT and radius point match for curves There is an option to report the distances in both fee
226. his command allows you to offset a 3D polyline entity in both the horizontal and vertical directions There are five offset methods The Interval method applies one horizontal and one vertical offset to all the vertices of the polyline The Constant method has a horizontal offset and sets the elevation of the polyline to one constant eleva tion The Variable method allows you to specify each horizontal and vertical offset individually either by polyline segment or for each point The vertical offset can be specified by actual vertical distance percent slope or slope ratio The surface method allows to offset project a 3D polyline entity on to a surface tin flt grd based on cut and fill outslope ratio The multiple method allows multiple offsets of a 3D polyline with separate layers User can add insert and delete offsets rows and set individual layers The option Progressive Offsets draws offsets progressively i e successive offsets uses last drawn offset as base Chapter 3 Edit Commands 45 Offset 3D Polyline slope Type Vertical Offset Vertical Offset Vertical Offset Vertical Offset Vertical Offset Prompts Enter the offset method lt Interval gt Constant Variable Surface Multiple press Enter Vertical lt Horizontal offset amount gt 5 Percent Ratio Vertical offset amount lt 0 gt 10 Select a polyline to offset Enter for none select a 3D poly Select side to offset pick a point Select a point on the graphics sc
227. ht Bar must be connected to a separate serial port than the GPS GIS Settings A standard point is stored in the coordinate file with a maximum 32 character description The GIS Settings allow you to store more data with each point The Store Data In Note File option will record additional fields for each point in the note file The note file has the same name as the current coordinate file except with a NOT instead of CRD file extension The fields that are recorded are defined by the GIS File GIS This file defines a sequence of field names and prompts For example a GIS file for manholes could contain Location Depth and Condition fields Choose the Select File button to choose the GIS file to use Or use the Select GIS File Automatically by Point Description to use different GIS files depending on the point description With this option the program will look for a GIS file with the same name as the point description For example if the point description is MH then the GIS file will be MH GIS See the Define Note File Prompts command for more information The Store Data Direct To Database option will store additional fields for each point in a Microsoft Access database The database to store the data is set in the Output File line The Template File is a database that defines the fields to record See the Define Template Database command for more information Chapter 7 Survey Commands 117 Equipment Commands CSI GBX Pro Geodimete
228. ical RMS values typically jump up to sub meter 1 or higher values In AgStar one foot is the default for the GPS RMS Tolerance Some operators set the GPS RMS Tolerance low to 0 2 to check for high RMS values while still Fixed Store Fixed Only The position of the GPS rover is considered either Autonomous Float or Fixed based on the solution status from the GPS base corrections When you are storing points and the Store Fixed Only box is checked AgStar will only store points if your position is Fixed We suggest you leave this box checked It ensures that you do not record inaccurate points Chapter 7 Survey Commands 111 GPS Settings x HRMS Tolerance 1 00 VRMS Tolerance 1 00 T Store Fixed Only Alignment Settings Laser Offset Settings Projection Type Use Laser For Offsets C State Plane 27 State Plane 83 C UTM Lat Lon Zone ma Mainland y Model Transformation Laser Type Laser Atlanta v m Laser Serial Port Settings C Rigid Body No Scale Plane Similarity Bie E Baud 9600 Y One Point Alignment Azimuth E COMI C Geodetic State Plane Grid i C COM2 Data Bits 8 v m Geoid To Apply i Pari C None Geoid99 C EGM96 __ SetGeoidArea pS C COM3 pone Project Scale Factor 1000000000 EE LEER i Cancel Help Suggestion When walking in light to heavy canopy the rover might remain Float and display RMS accuracies
229. ified by the definition of the single code TC in the field code library TC TCI When used in conjunction with the Draw Field Codes Without a Suffix as Points Only toggle TC will be recognized as the node and TC1 will be recognized as the line so that if the code TC in the field code library Chapter 9 Tools Commands 177 is defined as a polyline line or 3D polyline duplicate lines will not be unintentionally placed when this shot only pertains to a single element Keep in mind that all line work must have a numeric suffix when using this toggle TREE OAK Result on screen would be TREE OAK TREE OAK Result on screen would be OAK TREE TREE OAK Result on screen would be OAK TC1 TC2 VLT6 Stops TC1 continues TC2 as a point on a curve and closes VLT6 as a rectangle using the Bearing Close code Note The use of the Use Multiple Codes for Linework Only toggle is recommended when using Eagle Point Coding Process CAiCE Coding When checked coordinate files are processed based on the CAiCE Data Collection method Examples of supported coding are as follows 169 is just the code 169 145C10 is the code 145 and line 10 169C25C is the code 169 line 25 and the point is on a curve 172C12B is the code 172 line 12 and this point closes the line Process SDMS Coding This option processes coordinate files based upon SDMS coding method When active the program will prompt for an SDMS PRJ file to process Spl
230. ifies whether to include the sideshot data in the process results report e Decimal Places for Report Controls the number of decimals used in the report ranging from zero to four e Use Report Formatter Allows you to customize the process results report by selecting the layout of the fields to display The report formatter can also output the report to Microsoft Excel and Access Without the report formatter the program generates a standard results report e Calculate State Plane Scale Factor at Each Setup This will calculate a scale factor for each TR and SS record This scale factor is calculated as the average of the scale factors at the occupied and foresights points At these points the scale factor is calculated as the state plane grid factor minus the elevation divided by the earth radius SF Grid Factor Elev Earth Radius In order to calculate the state plane scale factors the traverse coordinates must be in state plane coordinates When this option is selected the program will prompt for the state plane zone to use Select either Zone 27 or 83 e Scale Factor This factor is multiplied by the slope distance for the traverse and sideshot records e Correct for Earth Curvature This adjusts the calculated points for the effect of the Earth s curvature Typically this adjustment is small and adjusts the elevation more than the horizontal After the command adjusts the traverse it also recalculates the sideshots The closure error
231. ile with the Add a Plotter wizard The paper size you select is saved with a layout and overrides the PC3 file settings If you are plotting a raster image such as a BMP or TIFF file the size of the plot is specified in pixels not in inches or millimeters e Plot Device This field displays the name of the currently selected plot device e Paper Size This field displays a list of the available paper sizes e Printable Area This field displays the actual area on the paper that is used for the plot based on the current paper size Inches This option allows you to specify inches for the plotting units e MM This option allows you to specify millimeters for the plotting units e Drawing Orientation This option specifies the orientation of the drawing on the paper for plotters that support landscape or portrait orientation You can change the drawing orientation to achieve a 0 90 180 or 270 degree Chapter 2 File Commands 24 plot rotation by selecting Portrait Landscape or Plot Upside Down The paper icon represents the media orientation of the selected paper The letter icon represents the orientation of the drawing on the page e Portrait This option orients and plots the drawing so that the short edge of the paper represents the top of the page e Landscape This option orients and plots the drawing so that the long edge of the paper represents the top of the page e Plot Upside Down This option orients and plots the drawi
232. iles PointM PolylineM and PolylgonM Both Arc and Polygon SHP files are brought into Carlson as polylines in the drawing with attribute data stored in an external Access MDB database file if that option is selected Chapter 11 GIS Commands 257 Point SHP files are imported in a three step process The first step uses the Import SHP File command to create a coordinate file crd for the points in the SHP file and a corresponding table in the output MDB file for the points database The second is to use Draw Locate Points to draw the points from the CRD file into the drawing The third step uses Create Links to select the points in the drawing and link the database to these plotted points Import SHP File Output MDB File C Carlson Projects 2010_1 DATA out mdb Select MDB File Input SHF File CA Documents and Settings grosen My Documents 4U074GIS gloucester sh Select SHP File Output CRD File elect CRD File Select Table for Database Input Layers in Current DWG NORTH GLOU PAR 0 CL CTEXT CTR CTRINDEX CTR RD CTR RDS DISTXT ENVELOPE EXISTING EX PRO FG PRO FINAL GRID GRID_SPOT GRIDTEXT PERIMETER J lontocer C Use attribute to assign Entity ID C Use attribute to assign elevation C Use attribute to assign layer E Import Options Geometry with GIS Data Geometry Only Create Select Table for Database Input Layer Used to Create E
233. ime choose this reason Home use See License Agreement Choose this reason if you are installing on your home computer See your license agreement for more details Re Installation of Carlson Software Choose this reason if you are reinstalling on the same computer with no modifications e Windows or AutoCAD upgrade Choose this reason if you have reinstalled Agstar after installing a new version of Microsoft Windows New Hardware Choose this reason if you are installing Agstar on a new computer or if your existing computer has had some of its hardware replaced such as the hard disk network adapter etc 4 After you choose the reason for installation press Next Registration Wizard xi Reg Method Install Info User Info Authorize User Name ohn Does Company ohn Doe Surveying Serial Number foooo no000 n0000 0000 Phone Number PA Fax Number 800 585 1212 0 E Mail Address fjohndoe johndoesuveying org System Fingerprint Win 38697912 Disk 131137804 MAC 0 3 47 48 29 38 AutoCAD S N 000 00000000 5 Next enter the required information into the dialog If you are using the Form method press the Print Fax Form button to print out the form You may fax this form to the number printed on the form or mail it to Carlson Software 102 W Second St Suite 200 Maysville KY 41056 1003 If you are using the Internet method press Next After a few seconds your registration will complete If your registration is su
234. inework and sometimes for just points but it is preferred to number the lines rather than using start and stop codes For example if the field code EP is defined to use the Line Entity type then EP25 will be drawn as a Line however if just EP is used no linework will connect to that COGO point Use Multiple Codes for Linework Only When checked and multiple codes are detected only linework will be drawn for the secondary codes Points are only created based on the primary code If you want symbols for all multiple codes then this setting should not be checked Max Delta Height for Linework Use this option to specify the maximum elevation difference that Draw Field to Finish should draw any section of linework This option is for use with 3d polylines and lines Max Length for Linework Specify the maximum length that Draw Field to Finish should draw any section of linework GIS Special Codes This option allows you to use GIS attribute for Field to Finish special coding For a select group of special codes a GIS attribute can be assigned When processing the points if a point has GIS data for the specified attribute then that attribute value is used for the special coding For example you can have a GIS attribute of COMMENT set to the Append Description special code Then if a point has a GIS attribute for COMMENT the value of that COMMENT will be added to the description label for that point GIS Special Codes E x m Ge
235. int description lt gt START Enter North y Press Enter to end the routine Pull Down Menu Location Tools gt Cogo Prerequisite None Area Defaults This command allows you to specify default settings for area labeling The Area Defaults dialog is divided into 3 tabs The first is the Label Fields and Settings tab The top portion of the Label Fields and Settings tab contains two listboxes which are used to control which of the possible ten area fields will be used for area labeling You use the Add and Remove buttons to control which fields will be included in area labels You can also add to the Used Fields list by double clicking on items in the Available Fields list The area label will include the values in the order as specified in the Used Fields listbox To change the order you use the Move Up and Move Down buttons When a grid projection is defined in Drawing Setup the Available Fields with include geodetic areas where the areas are adjusted by the projection The Base Z from Drawing Setup is used for the elevation factor for this adjustment Chapter 9 Tools Commands 223 Area Defaults A Label Fields and Settings Table Process Settings Area Commands Available Fields Used Fields Sq Yards A lUser Defined Sq Miles Acres Lot Description sq Feet Sq Meters Scaled Sq Feet Cuerdas Sq Kilometers Scaled Sq Meters Scaled Acres Eto ald a Move up Move Dow _ Ed Move U Move Down Pe
236. ion solution correction wills not work 8 Under Monitor Corrections verify that the corrections you re using are arriving regularly If they aren t you may need to reset both units 9 Try configuring the base and rover again 10 If all else fails Soft Reset both units through the Reset Unit menu After doing so you will have to reconfigure the port settings of each device through the Configure Ports menu and wait a few minutes for the devices to recalculate their position 11 If none of these steps work contact Carlson Software Technical Support Navcom GPS Setup AgStar supports Navcom s NCT 2000D GPS message protocol firmware versions 2 6 and later If your Navcom unit has an earlier firmware version contact Navcom for a free upgrade AgStar has been tested extensively with Navcom models RT 3010S and RT 3020M From the Navcom GPS setup menu or any of its submenus the current device settings can be obtained by clicking the Retrieve Settings button New settings can be saved by clicking the Save Settings or the Save Settings and Exit button To cancel your changes click Cancel without Saving Chapter 7 Survey Commands 125 By changing the SV Elevation Mask you can prevent the Navcom Unit from using any satellite below a specified elevation angle Range 0 90 By changing the PDOP Mask you can prevent the Navcom Unit from using any GPS solution with a PDOP above a specified value Range 1 25 By changing the RTK Ma
237. iption 2 and the field code OAK has the description oak tree then 02 OAK will result in the point having the description of 2 oak tree If the character has been replaced with a different character for example with a amp character then the code would become 42 ee This special code is the same as except that field code s description is then prefixed instead of appended to the first field code s description MULT This code applies when the Split Multiple Codes under Code Table Settings is set to None and you want to override this setting and explicitly spilt selected codes Multiple codes apply to points with dual code definitions for drawing two different style points or for connecting different linework to the same point For example if a point is both a sidewalk and driveway corner then the point description could be SW MULTDR PC This code begins a three point arc or a curved line when used with the PT code see below The point with this special code is the first point on the arc The next point with the code is considered a point on the arc and third point with the code is the arc endpoint For example in point number X Y Z description format 10 500 500 0 EP PC start curve 11 525 527 0 EP second point on curve 12 531 533 0 EP end point of curve PT Chapter 9 Tools Commands 181 This is a special code that can be used with PC to define a curve with more than three poi
238. ir actual elevation otherwise points will be located zero elevation Attribute Layout ID Controls the location of the point number elevation and description These attribute layouts are defined in AutoCAD drawings that are stored in the AgStar SUP directory with the file name of SRVPNO plus the ID number i e SRVPNO1 DWG SRVPNO2 DWG etc If you want to change the attribute positions for a layout ID then open and edit the associated SRVPNO drawing Symbol Name Enter the default symbol name to use You may also pick the Select Symbol button to select a symbol from the symbol library Prompt for Symbol Names When checked you will be prompted for each symbol name instead of using the default symbol Point Numbers When this toggle is OFF no point number will be created and no points will be stored in the coordinate CRD file Automatic Point Numbers When this toggle is OFF commands that locate a point will prompt for a point number Otherwise point numbers are numbered sequentially If the Start Point Number field is set to 0 no point will be plotted An exception to this is when you use the Draw Locate Points command and use the Range option then a point entity is plotted Point Defaults X Point Prompt Label Settings V Descriptions IV Elevations P il H M Locate on Real Z Axis ELEYE DESC FT Instrument and Rod Height Attribute Layout ID fi Symbol Name SPT62 Select Symbol
239. is calculated as the difference between the closing shot and a reference point The closing shot is specified as a type CL or CL AB record in the raw file If no CL record is found in the raw file then the command prompts for which traverse shot to use as the closing shot The foresight point is used as the closing coordinate The reference point can be specified by point number or by entering the northing easting and elevation The process results report shows the unadjusted points closure error adjustments to each traverse point and adjusted points Tools The Tools menu of the Raw Editor contains commands to help you manage points and angles in the raw file e Direct Reverse Report This command creates a report of direct and reverse shots along with the resulting averaged shots The residuals are the difference between the measurement and the final average A sample report is shown below Observations Type Setup FSight HorzAngle Distance Vertical BD 2 1 359 5958 173 8240 89 5368 BR 2 1 186 6066 173 8310 276 6654 FR 2 3 84 3443 176 9736 269 2822 FD 2 3 264 3439 177 0150 96 3142 BD 2 1 359 5953 173 8290 89 4926 BR 2 1 179 5957 173 8500 276 1659 FR 2 3 84 3536 177 0080 269 3238 FD 2 3 264 3524 177 0190 96 2722 Reduced Sets HorzAngle Residual FS Diff BK Diff 264 3446 0 0024 6 6664 6 6616 264 3535 6 6624 6 6612 6 6664 Vertical Residual Diff Distance Residual Diff 96 3146 6 6269 6 6664 176 9946 6 6698 6 6426 96 2722 0 0209 6 6
240. is is a point number from the current coordinate file 7 Undo lt Pick point or point numbers gt pick point 8 Percent slope Ratio slope Elevation lt 99 5 gt P for Percent slope 9 Ratio slope Elevation Percent slope lt 2 53 gt 2 Sets the elevation of this point to make a 2 percent slope from the previous point 10Undo Close lt Pick point or point numbers gt Press Enter Pressing Enter ends the command 11Draw another 3D polyline Yes lt No gt N Menu Location Draw Chapter 5 Draw Commands 63 Prerequisite None Keyboard Command 3DPLINE Circle This command allows you to draw a circle Prompts 1 Pick center point or point number or 3P 2P TTR pick point or specify option e 3P This option draws a circle based on three points on the circumference e 2P This option draws a circle based on two endpoints of the diameter e TTR Tangent Tangent Radius This option draws a circle with a specified radius tangent to two objects 2 Specify radius of circle or Diameter enter a value Sometimes more than one circle matches the criteria specified in the command The circle whose tangent points are closest to the selected points is drawn Menu Location Draw Prerequisite None Keyboard Command SCIRCLE Insert This command allows you to place a named block or drawing into the current drawing Insert EE Name FIRE_HYD X Browse Path m Insertion point Scale Rotation IV Specify On screen
241. is that the rigid body method does a transformation with a translation and rotation and without a scale The plane similarity does a rotation translation and scale This option only applies when two or more points are used in Align Local Coordinates One Pt Align Azimuth This option applies to the rotation when using one point in Align Local Coordinates For this alignment method the state plane coordinate is translated to the local coordinate Then the rotation can use either the state plane grid or the geodetic as north No scale is applied in this transformation The state plane and geodetic true north diverge slightly in the east and west edges of the state plane zone This option allows you to choose which north to use Geoid To Apply This option will account for the geoid undulation in determining the orthometric elevation of the measurement The definition of the geoid model as currently adopted by the National Geodetic Survey is the equipotential surface of the Earth s gravity field which best fits in a least squares sense global mean sea level Orthometric elevation measurements are used in survey calculations In order to convert ellipsoid heights He as measured by GPS into orthometric elvations Eo you must provide for a correction between the GPS measured ellipsoid reference ellipsoid and a constant leval gravitational surface the geoid This correction is the geoid undulation Ug The formula is He Eo Ug The Geoid models ar
242. isite None Keyboard Command NEW Chapter 2 File Commands 20 Open This command allows you to open an existing drawing file AgStar displays the Select File dialog box a standard file selection dialog box Select a file and click Open Menu Location File Prerequisite None Keyboard Command OPEN Close Function This command allows you to close the current drawing AgStar closes the current drawing if there have been no changes since the drawing was last saved If you have modified the drawing the program prompts you to save or discard the changes You can close a file that has been opened in Read only mode if you have made no changes or if you are willing to discard changes To save changes to a read only file you must use the SAVEAS command Menu Location File Prerequisite None Keyboard Command CLOSE Save If the drawing is named Carlson Survey saves the drawing without requesting a file name If the drawing is unnamed the program displays the Save Drawing As dialog box see SAVEAS and saves the drawing with the file name you specify If the drawing is read only use the SAVEAS command to save the changed file under a different name This command allows you to save the drawing under the current file name or a specified name Menu Location File Prerequisite None Keyboard Command SAVE or QSAVE Save As This command allows you to save an unnamed drawing with a file name or renames the current drawing AgsSta
243. it Multiple Codes Multiple codes are defined by including each code in the point description field separated by a space A single data point can be used in different lines by assigning it multiple codes For instance a point might be part of both a curb line and a driveway line with a description of CURB DRW Field to Finish uses spaces as the delimiter for multiple codes You should avoid spaces in the descriptions except for where multiple codes are intended or after the character For example a code for light post should not be LGT POST but instead should be LGTPOST There are three options for the handling of multiple codes when encountered The All option will split all multiple codes and process each code based upon their code definition When None is select both codes will be processed based upon their code definition If the Prompt option is checked on when Field to Finish detects multiple codes on a point the following dialog will be displayed with options for handling the codes Possible Multiple Codes Found X Multiple codes may have been found on a single point BLDG FACE Split all multiple codes Split no multiple codes Split this one for now Don t split this one Import Land Desktop Desc Key This option imports and converts a Land Desktop Description Key into a Carlson Draw Field to Finish fld code definition file The Land Desktop Description Key file is a mdb file and is found in
244. ith a lowercase g suffix and radians appear with a lowercase r suffix The de grees minutes seconds format uses d for degrees for minutes and for seconds for example 123d45 56 7 Surveyor s units show angles as bearings using N or S for north or south degrees minutes seconds for how far east or west the angle is from direct north or south and E or W for east or west for example N 45d0 0 E The angle is always less than 90 degrees and is displayed in the degrees minutes seconds format If the angle is precisely north south east or west only the single letter representing the compass point is displayed e Clockwise This option calculates positive angles in the clockwise direction The default direction for positive angles is counterclockwise When the program prompts for an angle you can point in the desired direction or enter an angle regardless of the setting specified for Clockwise 3 Under Drawing Units for AgStar DesignCenter blocks you can control the unit of measurement used for block insertions A block created in units that differ from the units specified in this option is scaled and inserted in the specified units Select Unitless to insert the block as is and not scale the block to match the specified units Source content units and Target drawing units settings in the User Preferences tab of the Options dialog box under the Settings menu are used when Insert Units are not defined 4 Sample Output displays an exa
245. ith the layer for the code followed by the attribute type For example the DWL code shown in this dialog has a layer name DRIVEWAY The point attributes would then be DRIVEWAYNO DRIVEWAYELEV and DRIVEWAYDESC With Symbols or Both the symbol attribute layer begins with the layer for the code followed by MARK Attribute Layout ID Controls the location of the point number elevation and description These attribute layouts are defined in the drawings that are stored in the Carlson SUP directory with the file name of SRVPNO plus the ID number i e SRVPNO1 DWG SRVPNO2 DWG etc If you want to change the attribute positions for a layout ID then open and edit the associated SRVPNO drawing Point Groups This field is for the name of the point group that all points with this code will be added to If the points for this code belong to multiple point groups you can specify multiple point group names in this field separated by commas Under Draw in Additional Draw Options there is an option whether to automatically use the code name as the point group name or to use the name defined in the code definition Text Size Scaler This is a scaler value that is multiplied by the horizontal scale to obtain the actual size Set Color The line work will be drawn in this color The default is BYLAYER Entity Type This defines the line entity to be created Points only does not create any line work 3D Polyline can be used for breaklines 3D and
246. ius point and PT point The points can either be picked on screen or specified by point number Given these points the arc can be drawn clockwise or counterclockwise The program shows one direction and asks if it is correct If you want the arc to go in the other direction enter No Prompts 1 Pick PC point or point number 101 2 Pick Radius point or point number 102 3 Pick PT point or point number 103 4 Is the direction of this arc correct No lt Yes gt N The arc draws in the other direction Menu Location Draw Curves gt Prerequisite None Keyboard Command PCA PC Radius Chord This command draws an arc given the PC point radius length chord length and chord bearing The PC point can either be picked on screen or specified by point number Given these points the arc can be drawn clockwise or counterclockwise The program shows one direction and asks if it is correct If you want the arc to go in the other direction enter No Prompts 1 Radius of Arc lt 40 00 gt 500 2 PC Start Point Pick point or point number pick a point 3 Chord bearing or chord endpoint lt Bearing gt Point Press Enter 4 Enter Bearing Qdd mmss lt 90 0000 gt 145 1041 for NE 45 10 41 5 Chord Length lt 200 46 gt 200 Chapter 5 Draw Commands 68 6 Is this arc in the correct direction lt Yes gt No Press Enter Menu Location Draw Curves gt Prerequisite None Keyboard Command SRCB Raster Image This comm
247. izontal scale to determine the actual drawing units For example SZ0 2S The X Y Z V and H can be combined For example to scale a symbol by 10 horizontally and 25 vertically use SZ10H25Z Or to scale a symbol by 2 in the X direction and 4 in the Y direction use SZ2X4Y When multiple SZ codes are used in the same point description the symbol is drawn multiple times at the different sizes For example a point description of TREE SZ5 SZ10 will draw the tree symbol twice One symbol will be size 5 and the other size 10 ROT This code is used to set the rotation of the point symbol If a point number follows the ROT code then angle from the current point to this point number is used for the rotation For example ROT45 would rotate the symbol towards point number 45 If there is no point number after the ROT code then the rotation point is the next point number with the same code as the current point or a companion code for the current code ROT can also be used to rotate towards an angle clockwise from north by using or in front of the number For example ROT 45 rotates the point symbol to the northeast and ROT 90 rotates the point symbol to the west SMO This code is used to smooth the polyline AZI amp DIST The AZI and DIST codes are used together to locate an offset point The AZI sets the offset azimuth and DIST sets Chapter 9 Tools Commands 183 the distance The values should directly follow the code For e
248. l Codes Point Number Drawing Description Coordinate File Description Default Code Tables Default code tables are installed under Carlson Projects Settings including Carlson fld and the following DOT s CA CO FL IA IL IN LA MA MD MN MO MS NC ND NE NY OH SD TX WA and WI Tree Surveys Tree surveys can be coded simply by using general Field to Finish coding methods such as defining a code for a tree OAK with a tree symbol and using the SZ special code for sizing the symbol For tree survey specific features go to the Tree Survey button on the first Field to Finish dialog This function brings up a dialog with tree survey settings The tree survey works with three attributes for each tree trunk drip and tag Trunk is the diameter of the tree trunk Drip is the radius of the tree canopy Tag is an id for the tree for reporting Important The Tree Survey Settings apply to codes that are set to a Feature Type of Tree To set the Fea ture Type go to Edit Codes and then the General tab of the Edit Field Code Definition dialog Chapter 9 Tools Commands 203 xi Tree Entity Options Layer Description Codes GIS Attributes Label Begin Tree IDfrom i00 I Draw Point Attribute Block M Tree Trunk Dripline Options Y Draw Circle for Trunk Diameter Dripline Options Draw Treeline by Drip Radius in Scale Default Draw Tree Symbol for Drip Radius in Scale Draw Tree Symbol by Factor of Trunk Size Dr
249. l Z Axis When checked points are located at their actual elevation otherwise points will be located zero elevation Notes Works with the note file not associated with the current CRD file The note file contains unlimited point descriptions in addition to the fixed 32 character point descriptions in the CRD file When creating points with Notes on the program will prompt for point notes to be stored with the point When drawing existing point with Notes on any notes for the points are drawn as text entities below the point description Use When checked labels the positive elevations with a leading Only applies when drawing points from a coordinate file Use When checked labels the negative elevations with a leading Only applies when drawing points from a coordinate file Label Zeros When checked points with zero elevation will be labeled when the Elevations option is on Otherwise only points with nonzero elevation will be labeled Decimals Specify the display precision for the elevation labels Point Numbers When this toggle is OFF no point number will be created and no points will be stored in the coordinate CRD file Automatic Point Numbers When this toggle is OFF commands that locate a point will prompt for a point number Otherwise point numbers are numbered sequentially Start Point Number Specify the next point number to use Wildcard Match of pt description Can be used to filter the points
250. l read once from the GPS receiver and then fix to that position If Enter Lat Lon is selected a dialog box will open and a Latitude and Longitude must be input manually If Enter State Plane Coord is selected a dialog box will open allowing the input of a set of Northing Easting coordinates by hand Read from File will open a File gt Open dialog and ask for the file name of the file to open Regardless of which option is selected after the position is determined this position will be displayed and dialog boxes will open to enter a station id and the measured base antenna height Once these values are entered base setup 1s complete and the Exit and Save button can be selected to exit the GPS Setup menu Sokkia 500 Series 1 Turn on Sokkia 2 Turn 1t Horizontally and Vertically to set it 3 Connect Sokkia to AgStar 4 In AgStar go to Configure Survey and under equipment type put Sokkia Chapter 7 Survey Commands 131 5 To make sure the baud rate matches under the Configure Survey menu click on General Settings and check the baud rate On Sokkia press ESC then CNFG Scroll down or enter 4 for Comms setup The baud rate can be changed using the arrow keys when done press ESC 6 Exit the Configure Survey menu 7 To check if units Ft M matches for correct results in AgStar under Inq Set go to Drawing Setup and select the appropriate button On Sokkia in CNFG scroll to or enter 5 for unit and select appro
251. lay AutoTrack Tooltip Controls the display of the AutoTrack tooltip The tooltip is a text flag that displays the tracking coordinates You can turn Object Snap Tracking on and off on the Object Snap tab in the Drafting Settings dialog box You can also enable the AutoTrack tooltip by setting AUTOSNAP to 32 4 Under Aperture Size you set the display size for the Autosnap aperture When Display AutoSnap Aperture Box is selected or when APBOX is set to 1 the aperture box is displayed in the center of the crosshairs when you snap to an object The size of the aperture determines how close to a snap point you can be before the magnet locks the aperture box to the snap point The smaller the aperture the closer you must be to the snap point to activate the magnet Values range from 1 to 50 pixels You can also set Aperture Size by using the APERTURE system variable Selection Tab Options 2 xi Current drawing Drawing dwg Files Display Open and Save Plotting System User Preferences Drafting Selection r Selection Modes m Grips V Noun verb selection IV Enable grips Use Shift to add to selection Enable grips within blocks J Press and drag Unselected grip color Y Implied windowing D Bl MV Object grouping Associative Hatch Selected grip color E Red v r Pickbox Size Grip Size o o oo OK Cancel Apply Under the Selection Tab you control settings
252. lay Margins Specifies whether margins are displayed in a layout Margins appear as dashed lines Objects drawn outside of the margins are clipped or omitted when the drawing is plotted e Display Paper Background Specifies whether a representation of the specified paper size is displayed in a layout The paper size and plot scale determine the size of the paper background e Display Paper Shadow Specifies whether a shadow is displayed around the paper background in a layout Show Page Setup Dialog for New Layouts Specifies whether the Page Setup dialog box is displayed when you create a new layout Use this dialog box to set options related to paper and plot settings e Create Viewport in New Layouts Specifies whether a viewport is created when you create a new layout 3 Under Display Resolution you control the quality of the display of objects If you set high values to improve display quality the impact on performance is significant Arc and Circle Smoothness Controls the smoothness of circles arcs and ellipses A higher number produces smoother objects but requires more time to regenerate pan and zoom the objects You can improve performance by setting this option to a low value such as 100 for drawing and increasing the value for rendering The valid range is 1 to 20 000 The default setting is 100 This setting is saved in the drawing To change the default for new drawings consider specifying this setting in the template file
253. le defines the layer symbol size and other actions to apply with each code These file names are displayed at the top line of the Draw Field to Finish dialog box Draw Field to Finish can translate the field points into Carlson points also called coordinate geometry points or cogo points with a symbol layer and size defined by the code The point settings of whether to label the description point number and elevation and whether to locate the point at zero or at the real Z can be found in the Additional Draw Options of the Draw Field to Finish dialog box The Draw Locate Points command has these point settings stored separately in the Point Defaults menu Draw Locate Points provides a simpler method for Chapter 9 Tools Commands 172 drawing points compared with Draw Field to Finish Field to Finish will layerize the points and linework according to the code definitions If the layers to use are not already defined Field to Finish will create the necessary layers and assign different colors To have the same colors for these layers in all your drawings define the layers in the prototype drawing The prototype drawing is the default drawing that is loaded whenever a new drawing is created To define layers in the prototype drawing save your current drawing and then start a new drawing with the New command Don t give the new drawing a name just click OK Then define the layers as desired with the Layer command When you are done creating lay
254. lect File dialog box Incremental Save Percentage Sets the percentage of potential wasted space in a drawing file When the Chapter 6 Settings Commands 90 specified percentage is reached the program performs a full save instead of an incremental save Full saves eliminate wasted space If you set Incremental Save Percentage to 0 every save is a full save Although incremental saves increase the size of your drawing avoid setting a very low value Low values degrade performance because the program performs time consuming full saves more often For optimum performance set the value to 50 If hard disk space is scarce set the value to 25 If you set the value to 20 or less performance of the SAVE and SAVEAS commands slows significantly 2 File Safety Precautions settings help you avoid data loss and detect errors e Automatic Save Saves your drawing automatically at the interval you specify You can specify the location of all Autosave files by using the SAVEFILEPATH system variable SAVEFILE read only stores the name of the Autosave file e Minutes Between Saves Specifies how often the drawing is saved when using Automatic Save The value is stored in SAVETIME e Create Backup Copy with Each Save Specifies whether a backup copy of a drawing is created when you save the drawing The backup copy is created in the same location as the drawing The ISAVEBAK system variable controls whether a backup copy of the drawing is created
255. les use the numbers from the color index to create a plot style table with a ctb file extension Each color is defined by a name or number ranging from 1 to 255 You can assign each color number to a different pen on a pen plotter to achieve different property settings in the plotted drawing If this option is selected a plot style is created for each color setting You can also control Use Color Dependent Plot Styles by setting the PSTYLEPOLICY system variable to 1 If you want to change the default plot style behavior for a drawing select this option or Use Named Plot Styles before opening or creating a drawing Changing the default plot style behavior using the Options dialog box affects only new drawings or drawings created in an earlier release of an Autodesk product that have never been saved in AgStar 2000 format This setting is saved with the drawing Once a drawing is saved with Use Color Dependent Plot Styles as the default you can change the default to Use Named Plot Styles with a migration utility with a migration utility However once a drawing is saved with Use Named Plot Styles as the default you cannot change it to Use Color Dependent Plot Styles e Use Named Plot Styles Uses named plot styles in both new drawings and drawings created in earlier versions of Autodesk products AgStar plots the drawing according to the property settings you specify in the plot style definition The plot style is defined in the plot style table attached
256. levation Draw Subdivision Line s s s s es ee Assign Subdivision Area Name Area Name Inspector 109 110 118 118 118 120 120 122 123 123 125 129 130 130 132 134 137 140 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 149 149 151 151 152 153 Contents ie RA Mah w o ead i Ba bee aes Packs a Bale a 154 ra Eien sono eee bare ao 154 Chapter 9 Tools Commands 156 E ewe ee ee Oe a 157 Peek Se a eee Be A ae a 158 fared wae Pada bG ae bake eR a Ha ha oh PG dow OG dank 160 Mere Sue Rea G ae ae purge kane ea ees eae as 160 Lee ee Te ee ee ee ee eee ee 161 Se Eh eh wth ew Sod ea a hd he E Bead wh ew a he bs 167 te Sak a GPa as ee Deere oy Bek Boa os ae ae ee Oe 167 Raha ha bX ese amp aS a ee Soe a alae dh a ald we a ee ds a 169 Od beg be ERY RO eae AG ER ba Leb Dae Se be ee 172 Dees od Bink Goa a ob eR a wale bl Go Bate we we ew re 208 fe che ae ee RANE eevee dd hd ody SNE BOE E Bh a Oe a ee 208 PEE a ba ea Edad wR OS SEES OR ad bam a ako Gd a ede Be eee x 209 ee eee ee eee ee ee eee eee 209 Te ee ee ae A ee ee ee 210 ps Sk gis aes are A eng ea ers Sd gh eae ego ee ee 212 idan h eeaeeaeaca dae had walt ua ad aces aka amp 212 ia al 217 bb ok Hea EO a A a a AR ai 218 o Gee Wee a oe a a dd e ee oe Pe ee ee 219 bag aka wae Dad amp dG doe awe aw a gah ta Goa Pe dw Oa dea 219 ds ite awe e es ow ee Mee ee Gee we ae Ge 219 liek Ae Mette ae ge My eae th ee A de at ee E a ee Rae ah ee a Sa See 2 ae 220 sy et
257. levations The Calculate Elevations option controls for which points elevations will be calculated For example if the traverse point elevations have already been adjusted and you need to recalculate the sideshot elevations then use the SideShots Only option e Create Point Notes This option will generate a note file NOT named after the coordinate file The note file contains additional descriptions for points With this option active the text from all note records DS records will be stored to the note file for the foresight point number preceding the note records e Report Unadjusted Points Includes the unadjusted points in the report e Vertical Error Adjustment Adjusts the vertical error for elevation difference Report Point Adjustments Reports the adjustment of each point Apply Angle Balance Applies the Angle Balance method to the traverse lines for calculating coordinates Chapter 9 Tools Commands 239 e Point Protect This option will check the coordinate file for existing point data before processing If the foresight point number for any traverse or sideshot record is already a stored coordinate in the coordinate file then the program shows a list of conflicting point numbers You can either continue processing and overwrite the coordinate file coordinates with the calculated raw file coordinates or you can cancel the processing to go back to the editor to change foresight numbers e Report SideShots This option spec
258. linetype and lineweight of the object may change e Block Removes one grouping level at a time If a block contains a polyline or a nested block exploding the block exposes the polyline or nested block object which must then be exploded to expose its individual objects Blocks with equal X Y and Z scales explode into their component objects Blocks with unequal X Y and Z scales nonuniformly scaled blocks might explode into unexpected objects When nonuniformly scaled blocks contain objects that cannot be exploded they are collected into an anonymous block named with a E prefix and referenced with the nonuniform scaling If all the objects in such a block cannot be exploded the selected block reference will not be exploded Body 3D Solid and Region entities in a nonuniformly scaled block cannot be exploded Exploding a block that contains attributes deletes the attribute values and redisplays the attribute definitions e 2D and Lightweight Polyline Discards any associated width or tangent information e Wide Polyline Places the resulting lines and arcs along the center of the polyline Carlson Survey discards any associated width or tangent information e 3D Polyline Explodes into line segments Any linetype assigned to the 3D polyline is applied to each resulting line segment e Leaders Explodes into lines splines solids arrow heads block inserts arrow heads annotation blocks Mtext or tolerance objects depending
259. lineweights are plotted By selecting Plot with Plot Styles you plot using the object plot styles that are assigned to the geometry as defined by the plot style table Plot object lineweights This option plots lineweights e Plot with Plot Styles This option plots using the plot styles applied to objects and defined in the plot style table All style definitions with different property characteristics are stored in the plot style tables and can be easily attached to the geometry This setting can replace pen mapping in earlier versions of AutoCAD Chapter 2 File Commands 25 e Plot Paperspace Last This option plots model space geometry first Paper space geometry is usually plotted before model space geometry e Hide Objects This option plots layouts with hidden lines removed for objects in the layout environment paper space Hidden line removal for model space objects in viewports is controlled by the Viewports Hide property in the Object Property Manager This is displayed in the plot preview but not in the layout e Full Preview This option displays the drawing as it will appear when plotted on paper To exit the print preview right click and choose Exit e Partial Preview This option quickly shows an accurate representation of the effective plot area relative to the paper size and printable area Partial preview also gives advance notice of any warnings that you might encounter when plotting The final location of the plot de
260. ling Agstar on Microsoft Windows NT 4 0 and Windows 2000 you must have permission to write to the necessary system registry sections To do this make sure that you have administrative permissions on the computer on which you re installing Before you install Agstar close all running applications Make sure you disable any virus checking software Please refer to your virus software documentation for instructions Note If you are upgrading from an older version of Agstar you must uninstall the older version before installing Agstar This is required for successful software installation and to meet the guidelines of the EULA End User License Agreement 1 Insert the CD into the CD ROM drive If Autorun is enabled it begins the setup process when you insert the CD To stop Autorun from starting the installation process automatically hold down the SHIFT key when you insert the CD To start the installation process without using Autorun from the Start menu Windows choose Run Enter the CD ROM drive letter and setup For example enter d setup 2 The Windows Installer dialog box is displayed Windows Installer A Preparing to install 3 After reading the initial Agstar dialog box press Next If this is the initial installation you will see the dialog shown below Chapter 1 Product Overview 4 ii AgStar 2002 Setup Welcome to the AgStar 2002 Installation Wizard Itis strongly recommended that you exit all
261. lock a shape or text e Perpendicular Snaps to a point perpendicular to an arc circle ellipse elliptical arc line multiline polyline ray solid spline or xline AgStar automatically turns on Deferred Perpendicular snap mode when the object you are drawing requires you to complete more than one perpendicular snap You can use a line arc circle polyline ray xline multiline or 3D solid edge as an object from which to draw a perpendicular line You can use Deferred Perpendicular to draw perpendicular lines between such objects When the aperture box passes over a Deferred Perpendicular snap point the program displays a Snaptip and marker A A Tangent Snaps to the tangent of an arc circle ellipse or elliptical arc AgStar automatically turns on Deferred Tangent snap mode when the object you are drawing requires you to complete more than one tangent snap For example you can use Deferred Tangent to draw a line that is tangent to two arcs polyline arcs or circles When the aperture box passes over a Deferred Tangent snap point the program displays a marker and Snaptip If you use the From option in conjunction with the Tangent snap mode to draw objects other than lines from arcs or circles the first point drawn is tangent to the arc or circle in relation to the last point selected in the drawing area eo ee e Nearest Snaps to the nearest point on an arc circle ellipse elliptical arc line multiline point polyline spline
262. lot stamp on a specified corner of each drawing and or logs it to a file e On This options turns on plot stamping e Settings This option displays the Plot Stamp dialog box where you can specify the information you want applied to the plot stamp such as drawing name date and time and plot scale e What to Plot This field defines the tabs to be plotted e Current Tab This option plots the current Model or layout tab If multiple tabs are selected the tab that shows its viewing area is plotted e Selected Tabs This option plots multiple preselected Model or layout tabs To select multiple tabs hold down CTRL while selecting the tabs If only one tab is selected this option is unavailable All Layout Tabs This option plots all layout tabs regardless of which tab is selected Chapter 2 File Commands 23 Number of Copies This option denotes the number of copies that are plotted If multiple layouts and copies are selected any layouts that are set to plot to a file or AutoSpool produce a single plot e Plot to File This option plots output to a file rather than to the plotter e File Name This option specifies the plot file name The default plot file name is the drawing name and the tab name separated by a hyphen with a plt file extension e Location This option displays the directory location where the plot file is stored The default location is the directory where the drawing file resides e This opti
263. ly Import Points When this option is selected KML Placemark entries will be placed into the drawing and active coordinate file Point Protect When enabled existing points in the active coordinate file will not be over written Use Folders as Layers When enabled KML Folder entries will be used to create layer names in CAD and the supported KML options described above will be placed onto the layer that conforms the the Folder to which they belong Default Layer The supported KML options described above that are not contained in a KML folder will be placed into the specified layer Note e Placemarks paths or polygon entries that have an altitude value specified will be imported at the proper Z elevation in the CAD drawing e KML or KMZ files can be specified for the import process Prompts Chapter 2 File Commands 28 Google Earth File to Read Select a previously saved KML or KMZ file e To import a Google Earth image into your drawing use the Place Google Earth Image command e To import a Google Earth terrain data into a Carlson TIN surface model use the Place Google Earth Image command e To export content from your drawing to a KML file use the Export Google Earth File command Pulldown Menu Location File gt Import Keyboard Command kmlread Prerequisite A KML or KMZ file with Placemark Path and or Polygon information an active coordinate file with an established projection zone through Drawing Setup
264. mand REVPLINE Reduce Polyline Vertices This command removes points from a polyline without significantly changing the polyline The offset cutoff is the maximum distance that the polyline can move when you remove a point For example in a polyline with three points in a Straight line the middle point can be removed without changing the polyline Prompts 1 Enter the offset cutoff lt 0 1 gt 5 2 Select polylines to reduce Select objects pick polylines Menu Location Edit Polyline Utilities gt Prerequisite A polyline Keyboard Command REDUCE Smooth Polyline This command allows you to smooth selected polylines using a modified Bezier method The resulting polyline passes through all the original points and only the segments between the original points are smoothed The looping factor controls the smoothing amount A higher factor gives more looping Prompts 1 Enter the looping factor 1 10 lt 5 gt 7 2 Enter the offset cutoff lt 0 05 gt Press Enter 3 Select polylines to smooth Select objects pick polylines Menu Location Edit Polyline Utilities gt Prerequisite A polyline Keyboard Command SMOOTHPL Chapter 3 Edit Commands 47 Add Polyline Vertex This command allows you to add points to a polyline Select the polyline to modify then pick or enter the coordinates for the new point The new point is inserted into the polyline at the nearest polyline segment On a 3D polyline the elevation of the new v
265. ming of all subdivision areas Keyboard Command view_subperim Label Area Names This command draws text labels inside each field subarea Besides labeling the area name there is an option to label the area of each subarea The labels are automatically drawn in the center of each subarea Prompts Text size lt 10 0 gt press Enter Label area size Yes lt No gt press Enter Pull Down Menu Location Design Prerequisite Named subdivision areas Keyboard Command label_subperim Surface Inspector Select Surface Inspector from the Design menu Drag the mouse to a point to view its existing elevation design elevation and cut fill value When finished press ESCAPE Note that this feature cannot be used until you ve run Design Field Steps 1 Drag the mouse over the field to view the existing elevation design elevation and cut fill values at each point 2 When finished press ESCAPE Chapter 8 Design Commands 154 AgStar CRD JERRY4 2 C Documents and Settings Dave My Docu os ale lar PUED Existing Elevation 7 246 Design Elevation 4 854 238204 in Tm Mode layout Layos 14 A Reading Cell L Select E aA or pick point J A Pull Down Menu Location Design Prerequisite A field design Keyboard Command grdvals2 Chapter 8 Design Commands 155 Tools Commands 9 Follow Elevation This routine will direct you along a chosen elevation using GPS readings
266. mode is available e Zoom Pan Toggles whether the cursor will zoom or pan Text Resize Toggles whether text in the graphics screen should resize when zoom factor changes Add You can add records by pressing the Insert key pressing the down arrow key from the last line in the spreadsheet or by choosing one of the add records from the Add menu of the Raw Editor Record types are shown above in this section Chapter 9 Tools Commands 236 CRD The CRD menu of the Raw Editor contains commands for manipulating points in a coordinate file e Edit Point This command creates new points in the coordinate file or edits existing points e List Points This command generates a list of points from the coordinate file The dialog box gives the total number of points and allows for listing a certain range of points The list is displayed in the report viewer See List Points in the Points chapter for more details e Set Coordinate File Allows you to change the current coordinate CRD file Process Compute Points The commands under the Process Compute Points menu of the Raw File Editor provide various methods for processing the raw file and for storing the calculated points in the coordinate file The different types are described separately for each adjustment No Adjust This command processes the raw file and stores the calculated coordinates to the coordinate file The name No Adjust means that no angle balance or traverse adjustment
267. mple of the current settings for units and angles Direction displays the Direction Control dialog box described below Chapter 6 Settings Commands 80 Direction Control HEI r Base Angle e East E North N West Ww C South 5 C Other Pick Type Es Angle E Y Cancel A The Base Angle determines where 0 degrees is located when the program calculates angles The base angle sets the direction of the base angle These options affect the entry of angles object rotation angles the display format and the entry of polar cylindrical and spherical coordinates Choose East North West or South or choose Other to indicate an alternative direction The default direction for the zero angle is East In AgStar the base angle is relative to the orientation of the user coordinate system East Sets the base angle to east default is zero degrees North Sets the base angle to 90 degrees north West Sets the base angle to 180 degrees west South Sets the base angle to 270 degrees south Other Sets a direction different from the points of the compass Angle Sets the angle Available only when Other is selected Pick an Angle Uses the pointing device to define the angle based on the angle of an imaginary line connecting any two points you specify Available only when Other is selected Menu Location Settings Prerequisite None Keyboard Command UNITS Object Snap Function The Drafting Se
268. mport files can be stored to the current CRD file or to separate files for each import file The separate file option will name the CRD files by the import file with a CRD file extension For example the import file job125 txt would create job125 crd The special formats of Leica gsi files TDS cr5 files Geodimeter obs raw files Laser Atlanta txt files Trimble pos files Zeiss txt files Traverse PC x trv files Maptech and Benchmark dat files can be directly imported by choosing that File Format at the top of the dialog Text File Format X Source File Format User Defined Select Text ASCIl Files Remove File Available Identifiers P Point Number D Description Y Northing x Easting Z Elevation 5 Skip Py XZD H Common Formats Coordinate Order PYXZ D Preview Window 1 79409 67094850 15565 275544831357 00000000 2 79257 05119416 15502 93972361 1452 00000000 3 79577 07125310 15880 13786903 56 18000000 Wildcard Description Match Fo Header Lines to Skip o Value to Add to Point s jo M Point Protect Process Multiple Files Options Alliinte Corent Gey fe Greate Separate GHD Files For Each Cancel Help Pull Down Menu Location Tools gt Points Prerequisite A text file to read Keyboard Command readpt Export TextASCII File This command outputs point data from the current AgStar coordinate file to an ASCII text file Specify the typ
269. n real time as the pointer is moved around The watershed data is shown in a tooltip next to the pointer position This data has values for the overall watershed that the position is in including the sink elevation sink name drainage area and average slope percent This data also has values for the watershed above the current point including the drainage area and runoff volume Plus this data shows the elevation and runoff coefficient at the current point If the position is picked with the mouse then the program draws a polyline perimeter for the drainage area above the current point The Above Line function is similar to Above Point except that you pick two points and the program draws the watershed for all flow that crosses the line between these two points For example you can pick points at the left and right banks of a stream to get the drainage area for that stream above these points Chapter 9 Tools Commands 163 Draw Tools Structures Data Runoff Tracking Troubleshooting Tools Draw Connections ve Re Process Detail Inspect Reports Watersheds Ponds Watershed Inspect M Hatch Area Being Inspected Under the Tools tab there are several analysis routines The Runoff Tracking function draws flow lines that follow the surface The Single Point Tracking method draws the flow lines starting from the picked high points The Whole Surface Tracking method draws a flow line starting from the middl
270. n the object by selecting two points on it The user is then prompted to choose the new angle which can again be entered at the keyboard or selected by choosing two points on an exisiting object This option of rotating by reference is particularly useful when objects need to be aligned by rotation Prompts Select objects pick an objects to be rotated press lt ENTER gt after selecting required objects to end selection Base point pick base point lt Rotation Angle gt Reference 40 objects will be rotated by 40 units about the base point the units and direction depending on the settings in the Units Control dialog box lt Rotation Angle gt Reference type ref to choose rotation by reference angle Reference angle lt E gt Choose the direction which is meant to be the reference angle For example if a line at 45 to the horizontal needs to be at 120 in the resultant figure then the reference angle needs to be chosen as 45 This can be done in two ways typing 45 at the keyboard or choosing two points on the reference line which is oriented in the required angle 45 in this case New angle Choose the direction that the reference angle previously chosen needs to be oriented In the example under consideration the new angle will be 120 Once again it can be specified in two ways from the keyboard or by specifying two points on the drawing Chapter 3 Edit Commands 43 Edit Text This command allow
271. n your point coordinates are wrong but your work is not wasted AgStar records the latitude longitude and height of every point in a RWS file You can input the correct projection zone settings later and reprocess your data using the Edit Process Raw File command Model For UTM this option sets the ellipsoid constants for converting the lat lon to UTM coordinates The following is a list of the models Model Earth Radius m Flattening factor Airy 1830 6377563 396 0 00334085064038 Modified Airy 6377340 189 0 00334085064038 Bessel 1841 6377397 155 0 00334277318217 Clarke 1866 ellipsoid 6378206 4 0 00339007530409 Clarke 1880 6378249 145 0 00340756137870 Everest EA India 1830 6377276 345 0 00332444929666 Everest EB Brunei amp E Malaysia 6377298 556 0 00332444929666 Everest ED W Malaysia amp Singapore 6377304 063 0 00332444929666 International 1924 6378388 0 0 00336700336700 Chapter 7 Survey Commands 112 Helmert 1906 6378200 0 0 00335232986926 Hough 1960 6378270 0 0 00336700336700 Geodetic Reference System 1980 6378137 0 0 00335281068118 South American 1969 and Australian National 6378160 0 0 00335289186924 World Geodetic System 1972 6378135 0 0 00335277945417 World Geodetic System 1984 6378137 0 0 00335281066475 Transformation The transformation in the Align Local Coordinates command can either be by plane similarity or rigid body methods Both methods use a best fit least squares transformation The difference
272. nce is the maximum gap that will be joined to make the closed polyline For open polylines as in the bottom figure the Gap method works better as it jumps across the gaps and connects the end points Before After Prompts Shrink wrap across gaps or bounded linework only lt Gap gt Bound G Shrink wrap layer lt FINAL gt Select points and linework to shrink wrap Select objects select entities to process Reading points 46 Inserted 46 points Inserted 23 breakline segments Perimeter reduction level 0 3 0 None 3 Most lt 2 gt 2 Reduce Perimeter Pass 1 Removed 5 Reduce Perimeter Pass 2 Removed 3 Reduce Perimeter Pass 3 Removed 4 Reduce Perimeter Pass 4 Removed 2 Reduce Perimeter Pass 5 Removed 1 Reduce Perimeter Pass 6 Removed 0 Create 2D or 3D Polyline lt 2D gt 3D 2D Pulldown Menu Location Draw Keyboard Command swplines Prerequisite Entities Chapter 5 Draw Commands 67 3 Point Curve This command draws an arc between three points The first point is the PC the second is a point on the arc and the third is the PT The points can either be picked on screen or specified by point number Prompts 1 Pick PC point or point numbers 101 2 Pick Second point or point number 102 3 Pick PT point or point number 103 Menu Location Draw Curves gt Prerequisite None Keyboard Command 3PA PC PT Radius Point This command draws an arc between the PC point rad
273. nd Load From File functions read and write the collection of queries to a QRY file for managing different sets of queries and sharing with others Pick the Execute button to process the query The Mark Screen Entities option will set the color of entities with GIS data that match the query to the specified color The Build Selection Set option creates a selection set of the entities that pass the query To use this selection set in other commands enter P for previous at the Select objects prompt With the Generate Report option the program will bring up the Report Formatter which allows you to choose the fields to include in the report and the report format If the Highlight Screen Entities option is on then Chapter 11 GIS Commands 256 the program will highlight the entities with GIS data that pass the query Point entities are highlighted by drawing a box around the point and polylines are highlighted by solid fill Shown here is the report for all manholes with a Condition of Good Report Formatter Options Format QUERY1_REPORT w QUERY1_REPORT Available Used Sort PT ID 4 LOC Ur GIS KEY COND DATE TIME Add gt Remove lt Columnar format C Use commas in numbers Auto width Fixed width 20 C Ignore repeating fields C Totals Only Total Grand Spread View User Attrib HTML Report Table Entity Attrib Options Report MS Excel Import Export Pulldown Menu Location
274. nd of each point stakeout The report can be saved in Excel format and processed by Excel Store Stakeout Points To Separate Coordinate File will store the staked points to a different coordinate file besides the current coordinate file This allows you to use the same point number for the target and staked points The staked point coordinate file can be specified by picking the Select Coordinate File button Check Total Station Turn Angle will compare the angle from the instrument and the angle to the target point If this difference is greater than the specified tolerance then AgStar will display a warning message Stakeout Tolerance controls the maximum difference between the target location and actual staked point When the staked point is beyond the tolerance AgStar displays a warning dialog GPS Number of Reads for Final Avg specifies how many times AgStar will read the GPS receiver position for the final staked point These reading are averaged Averaging several readings while occupying one point yields a more accurate result but inevitably takes longer Stakeout Settings M Display GPS RMS in Stakeout I Draw Trail M Auto Zoom J Zero Horizontal Angle To Target FT Store Cutsheet Stakeout Data in Note File M Store Cutsheet Stakeout Data in Excel Spreadsheet Cutsheet Report File CAscadces WORK ttxls Select Cutsheet File J Store Stakeout Points to Separate Coordinate File Stakeout CRD File Discdev DATA stake crd
275. nd the intellectual property Licensor grants to End User is subject to applicable law other than bankruptcy law End User may not transfer or assign the SOFTWARE rights under this EULA or accompanying user documentation or any updates of the SOFTWARE which may be provided under this EULA to a third party unless End User receives written consent from Licensor at least 30 days prior to the completion of transfer Licensor reserves the right to deny transfer or assignment if in its sole discretion Licensor determines the transfer not to be a necessity Whether or not a transfer or assignment is allowed shall be determined in Licensor s sole discretion after taking into consideration certain factors to find the existence of a necessity including but not limited to merger or acquisition of an entity complete asset acquisition change of control severe economic hardship severe loss of human resources or significant loss in business divisions or winding down of entity affairs If Carlson consents to a transfer such transfer shall be allowed only as a one time permanent transfer of this EULA and Software to another end user provided the initial End User retains no copies or previous versions of the Software The transfer must include all of the Software including all component parts any media and printed materials any upgrades this EULA and any associated license key The transfer may not be an indirect transfer such as a consignment rental or lease
276. ndXML Units different than drawing units Land lt ML Intl Feet Drawing US Feet Apply Scale No Scale Cancel Help Unit Differences If the Units of Measure specified in the LandXML file are different than those found in Drawing Setup you will be prompted for a course of action Sewer Network x Some or all pipes don t have Manning s n Set the manning s n for the pipes Manning s n pns S Manning s n If you are importing sewer data from a LandXML file and if the LandXML file does not carry Manning s n values you will be prompted to specify a default Manning s n value for all incoming sewer entities that don t already have a Mannings n value Sewer Network k x The following structure dimensions are not found in the library Highlight structures to import Structure ID Type Size TYPE C Box Structure 2 00 x 2 00 TYPE 7 MH Box Structure 2 00 x 2 00 Import Structures If you are importing sewer data from a LandXML file and structure values specified in the LandXML file do not exist in the Structure Library you will be prompted to indicate the structure s that should be imported into the Structure Library Use standard Windows click shift click and or ctrl click functionality to Chapter 2 File Commands 27 select multiple structures at the same time Skip Invisible Triangles This option applies to importing TIN surfaces from Civil 3D When this option is active triangles marked by
277. ne distances Scenario One known state plane coordinate and you want to work in the state plane coordinate system Chapter 7 Survey Commands 140 Alignment Either setup the base over the known state plane coordinate or do a one point alignment on this known state plane point In Configure Survey gt GPS Settings set the One Point Align Azimuth to Grid and set the scale factor to 1 0 Scenario Multiple known control points Alignment Choose two or more control points to align to It is best to use control points around the perimeter of the site Use as many control points as are available or enough to envelope the site In Configure Survey gt GPS Settings set the Transformation to Plane Similarity to fit the GPS points onto the control points and set the Project Scale Factor to 1 0 After making the alignment stake out another control point ideally one the is not used in the alignment to make sure the alignment is good Survey Benchmark It is common practice to put intersperse five or more benchmark points across your field Benchmark point surveys are more accurate then interior or perimeter surveys because they are taken while motionless and because they average over many GPS readings After surveying a benchmark you may want to mark it with a flag in case you return to the field later and need to realign to a benchmark see Align to Benchmark Steps 1 Set the Number of Readings field to the number of readings to be taken
278. neral Special Codes Append Description FOMMENT Prefix Description a Point Symbol Attribute Special Codes Rotate Symbol Size hz Substitution Codes This option defines a lookup table for translations of the raw point descriptions This translation is done as a pre processing step before the regular Field to Finish processing For example if you had a substitution setup for 25 EOP then a point description of 25 would get translated to EOP and then this EOP would be processed with Field to Finish Use the Import and Export functions to load and save substition codes to a comma separated text file Chapter 9 Tools Commands 179 Substitution Codes x Raw Desc F2F Desc 25 EOP Special Codes This section allows you to substitute the existing predefined special codes and characters with your own Draw Field to Finish recognizes several special codes A special code is placed before or after the regular code with a space separating the code and special code Here is a listing of the default special codes and characters Special Characters General Special Codes NE Code No Elevation MULT Code Multiple Field Code Character Character Character __ Character Underscore Point Symbol Attnbute Special Codes ROT Code Rotate ROT AZI Code Azimuth AZI Muki Poirt 2ND Code 2ND Linework Special Codes BEG Code Begin Linework 7 PC Code Start Curve
279. new location pick point Pick new angle pick new angle or press Enter Pulldown Menu Location Tools gt Points Keyboard Command movepnt Prerequisite Carlson points Resize Point Attributes This command sets the size of the selected point attributes point number elevation description and point symbols This command is similar to Scale Point Attributes but instead of scaling the size by a factor all the select points are set to the same specified size Points can also be chosen based upon Point Groups Prompts Enter point attribute and symbol size lt 4 0 gt press Enter Scale symbols only point labels only or both Symbols Labels lt Both gt press Enter Select points from screen group or by point number lt Screen gt Group Number press Enter Select Carlson Software points Select objects pick the point entities Finding Carlson Software Point Attributes Number of entities changed gt 10 Pulldown Menu Location Tools gt Points Keyboard Command sizepnt Prerequisite Carlson points Erase Point Attributes This command allows you to erase point attributes like the number elevation or description individually by picking on the attribute to erase Prompts Select Point No Elev or Desc to Erase select point attribute Pulldown Menu Location Tools gt Points Keyboard Command erasepnt Chapter 9 Tools Commands 219 Prerequisite Carlson points Inverse This command returns inverses the bea
280. ng 3 1 5 10 would draw 3D Line segments from point number 3 to 2 to 1 to 5 to 10 You can choose to pick points from a surface model that is stored in a file which can be either a grid GRD file or triangulation FLT file When a point is picked or a point number is entered the program uses the northing and easting of this point and calculates the elevation from the surface model When you create a 3D polyline by picking points from the screen be careful not to miss a point resulting in a zero elevation This creates a 3D polyline that drops to zero at one point As points are picked Draw 3D Polyline reports the coordinate so you can check that the correct elevation was used If you miss a point and see a zero elevation you can type Undo at the next prompt Prompts 1 Layer Name for 3DPoly lt BREAKLINE gt Press Enter 2 Prompt for elevations XY filter Yes lt No gt Y Using the XY filter allows you to pick the X and Y coordinate from the screen and type in the elevation If you enter N then the Z coordinate of the point picked will be applied 3 Use surface model from file Yes lt No gt No If you choose Yes then when a point is picked the elevation of the picked point is calculated using a surface model The surface model can be either a grid GRD file or triangulation FLT file 4 Undo lt Pick point or point numbers gt pick point 5 Elevation lt 0 0 gt 99 5 6 Undo lt Pick point or point numbers gt 15 Th
281. ng message and uses the paper size specified either in the plotter configuration file PC3 or in the default system settings if the output device is a system printer You can also set Keep the Layout Paper Size If Possible by setting PAPERUPDATE to 0 e Use the Plot Device Paper Size Uses the paper size specified either in the plotter configuration file PC3 or in the default system settings if the output device is a system printer You can also set Use the Plot Device Paper Size by setting PAPERUPDATE to 1 e System Printer Spool Alert Determines whether to alert you if the plotted drawing is spooled through a system printer because of an input or output port conflict Always Alert And Log Errors Alerts you and always logs an error when the plotted drawing spools through a system printer Alert First Time Only And Log Errors Alerts you once and always logs an error when the plotted drawing spools through a system printer Chapter 6 Settings Commands 92 Never Alert And Log First Error Never alerts you and logs only the first error when the plotted drawing spools through a system printer Never Alert Do Not Log Errors Never alerts you or logs an error when the plotted drawing spools through a system printer OLE Plot Quality Determines the quality of plotted OLE objects The values are Line Art Text Graphics Photograph and High Quality Photograph e Use OLE Application When Plotting OLE Objects Launches t
282. ng of objects is determined by a random sort order This setting is saved in the drawing e Regens Controls how objects are sorted when using the REGEN command If this option is selected the program sorts and regenerates objects in the drawing from those created first to those created last If this option is cleared the regeneration of objects is determined by a random sort order This setting is saved in the drawing e Plotting Controls how objects are sorted during plotting If this option is selected the program sorts and plots objects in the drawing from those created first to those created last If this option is cleared the plotting of objects is determined by a random sort order This setting is saved in the drawing e PostScript Output Controls how objects are sorted in PostScript output If this option is selected the program sorts and exports objects in the drawing from those created first to those created last If this option is cleared the exporting of objects is determined by a random sort order This setting is saved in the drawing e Lineweight Settings Displays the Lineweight Settings dialog box Use this dialog box to set lineweight options such as display properties and defaults and also to set the current lineweight 6 Associative Dimensioning this section does not apply to Carlson Survey Chapter 6 Settings Commands 96 7 Lineweight Settings Displays the Lineweight Settings dialog box Use this dialog box to
283. ng upside down e Plot Area This option specifies the portion of the drawing to be plotted e Layout This option plots everything within the margins of the specified paper size with the origin calculated from 0 0 in the layout Available only when a layout is selected If you choose to turn off the paper image and layout background on the Display tab of the Options dialog box the Layouts selection becomes Limits e Limits This option plots the entire drawing area defined by the drawing limits If the current viewport does not display a plan view this option has the same effect as the Extents option Available only when the Model tab is selected Extents This option plots the portion of the current space of the drawing that contains objects All geometry in the current space is plotted AgStar may regenerate the drawing to recalculate the extents before plotting e Display This option plots the view in the current viewport in the selected Model tab or the current paper space view in the layout e View This option plots a previously saved view You can select a named view from the list provided If there are no saved views in the drawing this option is unavailable e Window This option plots any portion of the drawing you specify If you select Window the Window button becomes available Choose the Window button to use the pointing device to specify the two corners of the area to be plotted or enter coordinate values e Plot Scale
284. nly appears if description prompting is turned on To locate a point in the coordinate file point number 3 in this example Locate Point dialog Choose Draw Range Point numbers to draw 3 PtNo North y East x Elev z Description Chapter 9 Tools Commands 171 3 4154 28 4147 35 0 00 Point numbers to draw 2 Locates a range of points From 1 to 2 PtNo North y East x Elev z Description 1 4252 76 4158 32 0 00 RADPT 2 4258 11 4059 38 0 00 Point numbers to draw Press Enter This ends the routine Pull Down Menu Location Tools Keyboard Command LP Prerequisite You may want to execute Drawing Setup to set the scale and size Draw Field to Finish This command turns data collector field notes into a final drawing by matching the descriptions of the field points with user defined codes The points are brought into the drawing with attributes defined by the code including the layer symbol size and linetype Draw Field to Finish also uses an improved coding method Example drawing results using the example points and example code definitions Two files are used in Draw Field to Finish a coordinate file and a field code definition file The coordinate file consists of point x y z points with text description fields The description fields contain codes for the Draw Field to Finish processing An ASCII data file can be converted into a coordinate file using the Import Text ASCII File command The field code definition fi
285. ns The open window shows the time since each correction type was last received delta time In NCT RTK mode the delta time of 5b should stay around 1 second and the delta time of message 5c should not go above 30 seconds If these numbers are high or if they read NEVER try repeating the setup process or calling Carlson Software technical support i Click Save Settings and Exit and then choose Monitor GPS Position from the Survey menu The Status display should eventually go to Lock Troubleshooting Base Rover Configuration If you ve configured a base to output corrections and you re rover does not appear to be receiving the corrections try each of the following in order 1 Verify that your base and rover are both set to the same correction type 2 Under Configure Radio check that your rover is set to slave and that your base is set to master 3 Under Configure Ports check that both your base and your rover s RTK Data Ports are set to the proper value Usually Radio Port 4 Under the Edit Base Position check that your base is set to a valid position Note that if the given position is too far away from the position the base is reading the base will not send corrections 5 If you re trying to use RTCM make sure the base and rover have the same station ID s 6 Try increase the RTK Max Age constraint 7 Under Navigation Status verify that the Navigation is valid on both units If either unit does not have a valid posit
286. nt attribute layers None The point symbol point number elevation and description use the layer names PNTMARK PNTNO PN TELEV and PNTDESC Points The point number elevation and description layers are composed by concatenating the point layer and the string NO ELEV and DESC respectively For example if the point layer is UTIL then the attribute layers will be UTILNO UTILELEV and UTILDESC Symbols The point symbol layer is composed by concatenating the point layer and the string MARK For example 1f the point layer is UTIL then the symbol layer will be UTILMARK Both The point symbol point number elevation and description layers are composed by concatenating the point layer and the string MARK NO ELEV and DESC respectively For example if the point layer is UTIL then the symbol attribute layers will be UTILMARK UTILNO UTILELEV and UTILDESC Layer for Points Specify the layer name for AgStar points Auto Zoom When checked AutoCAD will perform a Zoom Center around new points to keep the display cen tered around current working area This only applies during commands such as Traverse This setting is also available in Configure Survey under General Settings where it is called Auto Zoom Center for New Points Use Field to Finish For Allows you to use the code definitions from Field to Finish for the point symbols and or layers when creating new points For example when creating a point with description EP AgStar would lo
287. nterline in a LandXML file should be updated with data of the same name that you have selected for the LandXML file Precision Set the desired level of precision for each of the various measurement categories Profiles There are two major different types of profiles in LandXML ProfSurf and ProfAlign ProfSurf is typically an existing surface that is usually created using existing surface data The data for this type of profile it is stored in a series of station elevation values as a representation of a PntList2D list ProfAlign is for a design profile The data for this type of profile is stored in LandXML elements starting from the simplest one PVI element CircCurve element ParaCurve element etc Carlson differentiates the two types mentioned above by using the profile type in the Carlson pro file Generic ProSurf Road ProAlign Note e The LandXML initiative is being driven by the land development industry as an acceptable means to share and transfer land data rather than the traditional graphical representation of that data It also provides an effective means for transferring a variety data points centerlines profiles surface models sewer data etc Another Chapter 2 File Commands 32 advantage of LandXML is that the LandXML data structure is CAD and software vendor neutral meaning you don t have to own or use the CAD or software product used by your data provider e Visit http www landxml org for additional in
288. ntersect This command creates a point at the distance distance intersection from two base points The program prompts for two distances and two base points The two possible intersections A B are shown on the screen You can either pick near the desired intersection or type in the letter A or B The A intersection is clockwise from the first point Prompts Select 1st base point Pick point or point number Points lt 1st distance gt 46 72 Select 2nd base point Pick point or point number 2 Points lt 2nd distance gt 38 96 Pick near solution or Enter A or B pick a point Pull Down Menu Location Tools Locate at Intersect gt Prerequisite None EditProcess Raw File This program reads or creates a raw data RW5 file that contains various lines of data records that could be likened to a surveyor s field book You can specify point coordinates job information notes and the angles and distances that make up traverse or sideshots records Once the raw data is created or read 1t can be processed reduced to coordinates that are stored in the current coordinate CRD file Chapter 9 Tools Commands 232 The raw file can also be created or appended using the Locate Point Traverse Sideshot and Inverse commands on the Cogo menu To store the data inputs from these commands into a raw file first toggle on the Raw File ON OFF command on the Cogo menu It is possible to always have the raw data file open to store data inputs
289. ntities NORTH_GLOU_PAR C Use Inclusions NORTH_ J NORTH_GLOU_PAR Import Polpines from SHP Note If the SHP file you are Importing is in a different Projection or Units than that specified in the Drawing Setup then a transformation will occur during Import as long as the PRJ Projection file is present with the SHP set of files If there is no PRJ file with the SHP then no transformations will occur Chapter 11 GIS Commands 258 Drawing Setup Scale and Size Settings English Tin ft Metric 1m m Horizontal Scale Symbol Plot Size Drawing Units Text Plot Size Drawing Units 4 0000 Line Type Scaler LTSCALE 25 0000 Angle Mode Bearing Azimuth C Gon Other Coordinate System System Grid Local Projection State Plane 83 y English Units US Feet Zone AL East Lat Lon Datum Naps Project Scale Factor 1 00000000000000 Distance Scale Factor for Labels and Reports Report Scale Factor 1 00000000000000 Calculate Cancel Set Paper Help Pulldown Menu Location GIS Keyboard Command import shp Export SHP File This command creates a SHP file from the selected entities in the drawing After selecting entities to be converted a dialog shows the number of Points Polylines Arcs and Closed Polylines Polygons found in the drawing selection set Those Points Arcs and Polygons with database information linked are displayed with their database table names Any P
290. nts or a tangent two point curve Starting at the point with the PC the program will look for a PT If the PT is found all the points between the PC and PT are used for the curve which is drawn as a smoothed polyline that passes through all points and only curves the polyline between points If no PT is found then the regular three point arc is applied as explained above If no points are found between the PC and PT then the point prior to the PC and the point after the PT are used to create tangents for the resulting curve CTOG This special code toggles curve mode on and off Instead of using PC to start a curve you can use CTOG Likewise instead of using PT to end a curve you can use CTOG CLO This code forces the lines drawn between a series of points with the same code to close back to the first point with the same code For example shots 1 4 all have the BLD description with the exception of point 4 Its description is BLD CLO This will force the linework drawn for the BLD code to close back to point 1 which is the first point with the description of BLD GAP This special code makes a single segment break in the current linework For example if you have a curb polyline that you want to break to skip over a driveway then you could add the GAP code at the start of the driveway and continue the curb as normal on the other side NE This code represents no elevation A point with this special code is located a
291. nts the plotted size in inches In Metric mode this value is the plotted size in centimeters The Symbol Plot Size is not entered in Drawing Units e Text Size This value is a scaler that represents the size on the plot The Drawing Units are determined by multiplying the scaler by the horizontal scale In English mode the scaler represents the plotted size in inches In Metric mode this value is the plotted size in centimeters The Text Plot Size is not entered in Drawing Units Line Type Scaler This option sets the linetype scale by multiplying this scaler by the horizontal scale Symbol Name This option allows you to set the default symbol name for points Chapter 6 Settings Commands 103 e Select Symbol Click this button to graphically select the default symbol B Under Point Prompt Label Settings select the options that determine how the points are to be labeled and how you will be prompted for point entry e Descriptions Determines whether you are prompted for a point description when creating points and whether the point descriptions are labeled in the point block Elevations Sets prompting and labeling for point elevations e Locate on Real Z Axis Switches between locating points at zero elevation and at the actual stored elevations Instrument amp Rod Height Turns on prompting for instrument and rod heights when creating points Prompt for Symbol Name When checked the program will prompt for a symbol name a
292. numbers blank spaces and any special character not used by Windows and Carlson Survey for other purposes When this option is enabled long names can be used for layers dimension styles blocks linetypes text styles layouts UCS names views and viewport configurations This option is saved in the drawing 3 Under Live Enabler Options you specify how Carlson Survey checks for Object Enablers Using Object Enablers you can display and use custom objects in Carlson Survey drawings even when the ObjectARX application that created them is unavailable Never Prevents the program from checking for Object Enablers regardless of your settings in the Today window When Autodesk Point A is Available in Today Carlson Survey checks for Object Enablers only if Autodesk Point A is open in the Today window It is not necessary for the Today window to be open However the program checks for Object Enablers only if a live Internet connection is present e Always Carlson Survey always checks for Object Enablers regardless of your settings in the Today window Maximum Number of Unsuccessful Checks Specifies the number of times AgStar will continue to check for Object Enablers after unsuccessful attempts User Preferences Tab Options 2 xi Current drawing Drawingl dwg Files Display Open and Save Plotting System User Preferences Drafting Selection Windows Standard Behavior Priority for Coordinate Data Enty
293. o insertion points can be used to insert a tree symbol to size the tree where the first point is for the tree center and the second is for the drip line With three insertion point definitions the program will rotate and scale the symbol in both X and Y For example three points can be used to insert a car symbol with the first point being the front drivers side the second point as the back driver side to rotate and scale the length and the third as the back passenger side to scale the width Besides the insertion point coordinates you can define a description for each point which is used for the drawn point description and is used for prompting in the Insert Multi Point Symbol command and in Carlson Field data collection Define Symbol Placement Points x TF Description Point 1 10 200 2 900 Front Driver Side Point 2 7 400 2 900 Back Driver Side Point 3 7 400 2 900 Back Passenger x Cancel Help i il Chapter 9 Tools Commands 195 Three Point Symbol Drawing The coordinates for the insertion point definitions are for the symbol at unit size To figure these coordinates you will need to open the symbol drawing DWG file By default the symbols are located in the Carlson SUP directory For example to make an insertion point for the tree drip line open the tree symbol drawing and find the coordinate at the edge of the tree symbol in this case 0 5 0 0 lx x H Description Point 1 Center Point 2 Drip Cover p
294. o make changes to it Each of these types are explained below Read Only Some variables such as PLATFORM and CDATE are read only and therefore cannot be changed Read Only variables are marked and the edit field will be grayed indicating that you can t change the variable e Read Write Most variables are read write and can be changed These variables are marked and the edit field will be active so you can change the variable 6 Under Binary Group depending on the type of variable the value may be off or on yes or no If the variable type is not binary this group will be grayed out entirely e Off 0 Indicate an off condition Some variables such as ATTREQ are simply on or off toggles You may change a binary item by clicking in this group to change the variable or changing the value in the edit field e On 1 Indicate an on condition Binary variables are simply on or off toggles Their range is from 0 to 1 You may change a binary item by clicking to change the variable or changing the value in the edit field 7 Control Buttons These buttons are the main controls in the use of the Variable Editor Each buttons purpose is explained below e OK Used to accept the changes made during the variable editing process returning you to the command prompt with changes in effect e Cancel Used to cancel the changes made during the variable editing process returning you to the command prompt without the changes in effect e Load
295. o set Shortcut Menus in Drawing Area and the right click customization settings by using the SHORTCUTMENU system variable 2 DesignCenter this section does not apply to Carlson Survey 3 Under Hyperlink you control settings that relate to the display properties of hyperlinks e Display Hyperlink Cursor and Shortcut Menu Controls the display of the hyperlink cursor and shortcut menu The hyperlink cursor appears alongside the crosshairs whenever the pointing device moves over an object that contains a hyperlink The hyperlink shortcut menu provides additional options when you select an object that contains a hyperlink and then right click in the drawing area If this option is cleared the hyperlink cursor is never displayed and the Hyperlink option on shortcut menus is not available if shortcut menus are enabled e Display Hyperlink Tooltip Controls the display of the Hyperlink tooltip If this option is selected a hyperlink tooltip is displayed when the pointing device moves over an object that contains a hyperlink Display Hyperlink Cursor and Shortcut Menu must be selected to enable this option 4 Under Priority for Coordinate Data Entry you control how Carlson Survey responds to input of coordinate data Running Object Snap Specifies that running object snaps override coordinate entry at all times You can also set OSNAPCOORD to 0 to enable Running Object Snap e Keyboard Entry Specifies that coordinate entry overrides running object
296. o use for dimensions e Arrow Line This option draws a line with an arrowhead from the dimension text to the figure e Standard Line This option draws a line with no arrowhead from the dimension text to the figure e Curved Leaders This option draws a curved line with an arrowhead from the dimension text to the figure e Dimension Only This option draws the dimension text with no line 7 In the Area Label Defaults dialog box you can set parameters for labeling area calculations See the Area Label Defaults command in the Area chapter of this manual for a complete description of this dialog box 8 In the Annotation Defaults dialog box you can set parameters for displaying annotation text See the Annotate Defaults command in the Annotate chapter of this manual for a complete description of this dialog box 9 In the Stack Label Arc dialog box you can set parameters for the labeling of arcs Stack Label Arc xi m Label Options Label SequenceH Are Length Radius Delta Angle Chord Angle Chord Lenath Tangent Degree of Curve Extemal Y Use Symbol for Delta Angle Label Label Chord Angle in C Azimuths Bearings C Gons m Type of Curve Roadway Railroad Cancel Help d A Under Label Options you can determine the label abbreviations and sequence in the label stack e Options You must set the sequence and the label abbreviations for all the attributes of the arc label
297. oe tae se eee 51 og Kee Oe a BSR ni Mid a A 51 Chapter 4 View Commands 53 Gone ee See AA wears ae a eld et 54 La ha eA Ra ka ek REE RRS Sa Ga ke be Ba Wa ka e Gee ae es Pes 54 Oe erg be Wt We Bie ats oa ea ge AO de a ee rd A a 54 td GRAM Gd he es he 54 DG tah A RR TO O 54 Rage e a tbe ep O O E ar ah gees ee Kod ee ato wg 54 Pan arar ee We aaa a ea isn aa e he lt ee a es a oa 55 iii a did ria ae ee A 55 ba a AG pi dada dea E 56 Contents ii Twist Screen Standard ociosa ed a we ee Ee ed ewe ey Twist Screen Line ie eo Ba A ed we Pee OS ee ew a ae Twist Screen Surveyor saskes a a eee ee Restore Die North io eae Ged oe ew shot ge do Ta ee eras eR a ee ged Aw he ea List Polyline Into s eit sace aee e Ra e ee a a a e Daa Drawing Inspector ca so secer ea ee Chapter 5 Draw Commands 2D PONNE e e uria it Be a ee a nt ad e PE PA Ge IT E a a a A ew a a Circlel Insert Insert Symbols ss 6 44 oe ee he ee A a al a aa A Shrink Wrap Entities ic a5 ac be ea e ee ee eae ke a Be Sg dite go gare a doe WS doe Pa ae oar oa le doe Hd doa PC PT Radius Pomtl o o ge aw de a we ew a BO Be oe Swe Bw ee PC Radius Chord vs s Spee Bk we a al BO a ew A ee a BO Be te cee aa aa Was ae dae ete Geese ee ee te ae Ge ee Se ae ee ee Place Image by World File aoaaa aaa ee Place Google Earth Image 2 e Custom Linework Label Formatterl 20 00 0000 00000000000 0848 oe anes ave ane ee Pky es ee ee
298. oint number to a number that already exists in the current CRD file and point protect is ON you will be prompted O verwrite w new coordinates overwrite A Il or use number lt 1000 gt You can choose to use the next available point number in the CRD file this is the default or overwrite the point number The properties that you modify with the exception of Drawing Description will update the current CRD file All modifications will update screen entities Selecting the History button will bring up another dialog box that displays the point history of the point chosen A history of the point will be listed but only if under General Setting the Maintain CRD History File had been set to ON selected for the coordinate file that you are working with With the CRD History feature of Carlson all point changes can be rolled back You may also choose to use the AutoCAD DDATTE command to change the attributes of a point If you do this then the CRD file will not be updated and if you change the elevation attribute the point will not change its current Z location Chapter 9 Tools Commands 218 Pulldown Menu Location Tools gt Points Keyboard Command editpnt Prerequisite Carlson points Move Point Attributes This command allows the user to move Carlson point attributes including the point number elevation or description one at a time Prompts Select Point Number Elevation or Description to Move select point attribute Pick
299. oints Arcs and Polygons without linked database information display as unknown Highlight the Point Arc and Polygon tables to output or selects Export All to select all entities including the UN KOWN entities to export into SHP files The Export SHP File commands outputs all entities selected into SHP files with the same name as their table name into a subdirectory selected Also Points can be stored in the ESRI Arcview database as 3D X Y and Z coordinates when Include Z Coordinates is toggled on SHP files do not have arc entities So the export routine will convert arcs and polyline arcs into a series of small chords segments The Offset Cutoff field sets the maximum horizontal shift allowed between the original arc and the chord segments These SHP files can be imported into ESRI s Arcview product Database GIS links in Carlson are converted to SHP files by storing the GIS database information into DBF files for ESRI s Arcview product to read and link to Prompts Specify Name for SHP File dialog select SHP file name Select objects select entities Export Carlson Entities to SHP File dialog choose settings click OK Chapter 11 GIS Commands 259 Export Carlson Software Entities to SHP File Carlson Software Points 1 Carlson Software Open Polylines 23 Carlson Software Closed Polplines 14 Features used Features used Features used POINTDATA NEWTABLENAME UNKNOWN C Export All l C Include Z Coordinates C Add Ext
300. oints to erase can either be selected from the screen or specified by point number Erasing a AgStar point will erase the point symbol point attributes and point node The points may optionally be erased from the coordinate file As long as the points are not deleted from the coordinate file they can be redrawn with Draw Locate Points Prompts Select points from screen or by point number Screen lt Number gt Press Enter Point numbers to erase 5 Delete points from coordinate file Yes lt No gt Press Enter Erasing AgStar Points Number of points erased gt 5 Pull Down Menu Location Points Keyboard Command DELPT Prerequisite AgStar points to be erased Import TextASCII File This command converts point data from an ASCII text file into the current AgStar coordinate CRD file Each line of the text file can contain any combination of point number northing easting elevation and description All point information should be on one line with the values separated by a comma space or other delimiter Under the Source File Format setting you can choose from some specific formats or User Defined For User Defined the format of the text file is specified in the Coordinate Order field where the value identifiers are listed with the appropriate delimiters For example For a text file with northing easting elevation and comma delimiters 5100 0 5150 5 485 1 5127 1 5190 3 487 3 The Coordinate Order would be Y X Z For a
301. ok up EP in the Field to Finish table and will use the symbol and layer defined in this code table instead of the symbol and layer set in Point Defaults GIS File This option lets you specify a GIS file to be used when creating new points The GIS file contains a list of fields to prompt for For each point that is created the program will prompt for these fields and store the results to the note file not associated with the current CRD file Pull Down Menu Location Tools gt Points Prerequisite None Keyboard Command ptsetup DrawLocate Points This command inserts either new or existing points into the drawing New points are created by picking points or by entering northing and easting coordinates Existing points are placed by entering the points numbers which reference the current coordinate file You will be prompted to choose a coordinate file if no coordinate file is set current Symbol Name Enter the symbol name to use You may also pick the Select button to select a symbol from the symbol library Symbol Rotation Azimuth Specifies the rotation angle that will be used for the point symbols This angle is used in a counterclockwise direction relative to the current twist screen Chapter 9 Tools Commands 169 Layer by Desc When checked points are inserted in the layer named by the point description Using Layer by Desc organizes the points by description and allows for layer management such as using Isolate Layers to
302. olerance Setting this value smaller will cause your cuts and fills to balance more equally but may also take longer The recommended value is 0 1 Balance Import Volume amp Balance Export Volume To import dirt from another field specify the amount to import in cubic yards in the Balance Import Volume field To export dirt to another field specify the amount to export in cubic yards in the Balance Export Volume field Steps If you have split your field into multiple subdivisions you will now be prompted to select a subdivi sion to design Do so with your mouse or press ESCAPE to override existing subdivisions and create a design for the entire field If you have not divide up the field this step is skipped Now take one of the following steps To find the optimal field design press the Approximate Natural Grade button Verify that both Find Optimal Slope Direction and Find Optimal Slope Percent are checked and then press Ok to begin the iterative calculation To specify your own field design verify that Find Optimal Slope Percent is unchecked enter your desired slope and direction parameters and then press Ok Chapter 8 Design Commands 150 Pull Down Menu Location Design Prerequisite An existing ground grid Also a named subdivision if applicable Keyboard Command slope_pad Adjust Field Elevation This command raises or lowers an entire field by a specified amount Before running this command a field design must be complete
303. ollowing three points Point Northing Easting Description 1 4994 73 4923 15 OAK 24 38 301 2 5034 59 4881 40 PINE 18 24 302 3 4987 32 4975 79 PINE 12 20 303 Chapter 9 Tools Commands 206 T301 Ook 24 T302Pine 19 T303Plne 12 Dripline drawn as Treeline method along with a tree table Another feature of Tree Survey is the Tree Report under the Report Codes Points function The Report Formatter option can be used to make a custom report and output to Excel or create a custom table in the drawing e ma x Format TREE TABLE y TREE TABLE Save Delete Export import Available Used Sort Trunk Spread Canopy radius Elevation Description SotField Hold Up Down lanore IV Columnar format TF Mirror the columns IV Display table header I Use commas in numbers Auto width C Widths by Field C Fixed width p T Ignore repeating fields I Totals Only Total Grand Report MS Excel Import Export Settings asen Display Spread View HTML Repot Table Entity Report Viewer Tree ID Botanic Name Trunk T301 Oak 24 T302 Pine 18 T303 Pine 12 Pulldown Menu Location Tools gt Points Keyboard Command fid2fin Prerequisite A data file of points with descriptions Chapter 9 Tools Commands 207 List Points This command generates a report of point numbers northings eastings elevations and descriptions Selection Method Range Allows you to specify the points to list by poin
304. om the current position in the direction indicated by the current position arrowhead You start by selecting an existing line or polyline Initially the current position is the closest vertex to the location where the line or polyline was selected Extending from the endpoint of a polyline will add a new point to that polyline while extending from any other point will create a new polyline There are two modes of operation draw mode D and move mode M When you are in draw mode extending will draw line or polyline segments When you are in move mode the current position arrowhead can be moved without drawing segments The orientation of the current position arrowhead can be changed with the Right Left and Angle commands Here is a list of the Extend by Distance options Key Name Action D Draw mode M Move mode Number R Right rotate L Left rotate E Extend to edge T Total distance A Angle change A Align Actions draw or extend the line or polyline Actions only move the pointer Distance to draw or extend Rotates clockwise 90 degrees Rotates counterclockwise 90 degrees Extends to intersection with a selected line or polyline Sets current segment to specified dis tance l Rotates pointer by specified number of degrees Rotates pointer to align with segment Chapter 3 Edit Commands 39 B Bearing S Switch N Next P Previous U Undo C Close O Open Help Help Prompts 1 Select lin
305. ommands 11 GIS Database Settings This command sets the current GIS Features and GIS Data Format The GIS Features file GIS defines the GIS features and the attributes for each feature This file is set by the Define GIS Features command The Data Format defines where the GIS data will be stored For Single File Type Database the data is stored in an external database in either SQLite format DB or MicroSoft Access MDB The Esri MSC Data stores the GIS data within the drawing file in a format that both Carlson and Esri use Starting with ArcGIS 9 3 Esri added support for MSC which makes the DWG file a type of geodatabase with the feature definitions GIS data and geometry all stored in the file GIS Settings x M GIS Features GIS Features File je sample spatial gis i M Data Format Single File Type Database C ESRI MSC Data Output Database File je Asample output db Select Exit Help Prompts GIS Setting dialog Click both file buttons and select new or existing files New or Existing File x File type gt DB MDB New SQLite Format New Access 97 Format New Access 2000 Format Help Pulldown Menu Location GIS Keyboard Command gis_config Prerequisite None Define GIS Features This command creates the Feature Attribute data structure or schema for GIS functionality The structure is stored in a special Carlson file with a GIS file extension
306. on displays a standard Browse for Folder dialog box where you can choose the directory location to store a plot file 3 Under the Plot Settings Tab you specify paper size orientation plot area and scale offset and other options Plot 21x Layout name Page setup name Wot Y Save changes to layout lt Select page setup to apply gt y Add Plot Device Plot Settings m Paper size and paper units Drawing orientation Plot device E DWF eView optimized for viewing pc3 C Portrait Paper size ar CH expand E1 30 00 x 42 00 Inches y Landscape Printable area 41 15 x 29 54 inches inches C mm Plot upside down m Plot area r Plot scale C Limits Scale 1 50 y Extents Custom fi inches 50 drawing units J Scale lineweiahts Display m Plot offset Plot options C Vj T Center the plot JV Plot object lineweiahts x foo A IV Plot with plot styles C Window Window lt IV Plot paperspace last Y fo 00 inches Hide objects Full Preview Partial Preview Cancel Help e Paper Size and Paper Units This field displays standard paper sizes available for the selected plotting device Actual paper sizes are indicated by the width X axis direction and height Y axis direction If no plotter is selected the full standard paper size list is displayed and available for selection A default paper size is set for the plotting device when you create a PC3 f
307. ormat P Use South Azimuth 7 Link Points with CRD File Numeric Only JV Use Dview Twist Angle I Link Linework with Points Alphanumeric J Set PDSIZE to Symbol Size J7 Link Labels with Linework eee C Access 97 Point Layer J Group Point Entities Access 2000 Cancel Help A Under General you can choose options relevant to points angles and start up e Use Startup Wizard This option controls whether the wizard appears when you create a new drawing e Generate Report Log This option allows output from several commands to be accumulated in a report buffer Any report that is displayed in the standard report viewer is also added to the report log While activated the report log resides in the lower left corner of the desktop as a minimized title bar displaying the number of lines in the report buffer To view the report log pick the maximize icon on this title bar You can edit the report log save it to a file or print it To quickly turn the report log on and off you can type REPORT at the command prompt which toggles the report log on off e Save Drawing INI Files This option creates an ini file with the same name as the dwg file to store the project data files for the drawing e Put Data Files in DWG Directory This option sets the Data Path to the directory of the drawing The Data Path is the default directory for data files such as the coordinate file crd e Auto Zoom Center for New Points Thi
308. ormity with this EULA End User will obtain immediately and pay for a valid license to bring End User s use into compliance with this EULA and other applicable terms and pay the reasonable costs of the audit In addition to such payment rights LICENSOR reserves the right to seek any other remedies available at law or in equity whether under this Agreement or otherwise 7 Warranty THE PRODUCT IS PROVIDED AS IS WITH ALL FAULTS TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW LICENSOR HEREBY DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANITIBILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND WARRANTIES THAT THE PRODUCT IS FREE OF DEFECTS AND NON INFRINGING WITH REGARD TO THE SOFTWARE AND THE ACCOMPANYING WRITTEN MATERIALS YOU BEAR ENTIRE RISK AS TO SELECTING THE PRODUCT FOR YOUR PURPOSES AND AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PRODUCT THIS LIMITATION WILL APPLY NOTWITHSTANDING THE FAILURE OF ESSENTIAL PURPOSE OF ANY REMEDY In any event LICENSOR will not honor any warranty shown to exist for hich inaccurate or incorrect identifying data has been provided to LICENSOR The product s provided are intended for commercial use only and should not be utilized as the sole data source in clinical decisions as to levels of care 8 LIMITATION OF LIABILITY EXCEPT AS REQUIRED BY LAW LICENSOR AND ITS DISTRIBU TORS DIRECTORS LICENSORS CONTRIBUTORS AND AGENTS COLLECTIVELY THE LICENSOR GROUP WIL
309. ort Text ASCH File command in this chapter for more information Export Text ASCII Text File This routine outputs point data from the current coordinate CRD file to a ASCII Text file See the Export Text ASCH File command in this chapter for more information Edit Header Enter or edit the job information associated with the coordinate file Fields include Job Description Job Number and Job Date Chapter 9 Tools Commands 212 Numeric CRD C Scadxml Data Examplel crd Highest Pt 2079 gt File Utilities Open CRD File Copy Merge CRD File Switch Point Number Format Map Points From 2nd File Import Text 4SCIl File Export Text ASCIl File Edit Header Compress CAD File Coordinate Transformation Draw Entities by Point New Last Point Number Update Drawing from CRD File Update CRD File from Drawing r Point Utilities Input E dit Point Delete Points Screen Pick Point Scale Points Translate Points Rotate Points Align Points Descriptions for Points Point Number Report Duplicate Points Compare Points Renumber Points IV Point Protect Exit Compress CRD File Removes unused point numbers by renumbering high point numbers into the unused spaces For example for an original file with points 1 2 105 107 108 109 would be compressed to 1 2 3 4 5 6 Coordinate Transformation Transfo
310. ot Aa HE Se te Bee ow le ee SP ee Oe 220 xe eo GM ed ha e Abe we a a les al la a ER eee A it ae Bae 221 ads oe be oe et Gee hae Poe eS Bes Phe eee ee eee 222 fh Hla Goad Ge koe wh ee ae al Bd o AOE Slee we Se ee aw A 223 tte Boe aie ee ee we eh Oboe ee doe ee Boe eee en ee Oe oe Ge oe S 223 Re aE Ea ae a REE RSS Da Ss ke ke a Ba ka oa ee oes 227 ds rade OS Conds e dearth oe Wate eae RT ted A a er 229 Satara se Bo eRe ea totes aes SR wd OA eee a en 229 A a Ee SH Aah gated Gerda wea wt Bree ade Se Rg eae a 231 O E aA nang eg ein he E ae ee 231 8 a we ee A ee lS dae a was aoa aoe A 232 boo ht a di bb Ge eh eh A aer BS en Se A 232 Contents v Chapter 10 Display Commands 243 E eee ee a pee Bee ete ce dete oe ieee a ea ear a 244 i hed aide hake hk Gog GR Bare Ae ees AR A Ba ay ae ao 244 E O eh ar toh eee Ge ty RS Be nea 246 Pe TEA ee ee ee ee ee ee eee 247 hapter 11 GIS Commands 249 ir ota eee re eee ree ea ee te ee 250 Whe a eae ge Ce Ne ae ewan aed Wg a eee ae Bae Gee 250 a iia denon eed ede ea 252 a er ee 253 Lee hee eee AER eee E AE se as 254 Sia ed baba be AGRE ae Reba CR ba La RARE Ow RM 255 E AAP Oe oe ea ere Bae en oY 257 ETTE SEEE EEE EE EEEE bs pea Ema eee 259 Chapter 12 Help Commands 261 sableak aiee ea de ae sa aida da a me Ela eal Sw a dw ed aka gd x 262 hd en ge ha sea gt at Re a See ee dds dees Ay de ee Bee dee 262 Contents vi Product Overview 1 This chapter describes the product overview and system requirements
311. ots J 7 Cancel Two Point Symbol Drawing Not all of the symbol insertion points need to be used when drawing the points If a code definition has a three insertion points it is possible to use just the first two or first one There are special codes to associate multiple points to the same symbol The first code point is used as the first symbol insertion point The 2ND code is used to specify the second symbol insertion point A point number can follow the 2ND to identify a specific point Otherwise without the point number the program will use the next point with the current code The 3RD code is Chapter 9 Tools Commands 196 used to specify the third symbol insertion point and similar to the 2ND code a point number after the 3RD is optional The 2ND and 3RD codes should be assigned to the first point For example consider a code of CAR with a three point symbol insertion definition If point 1 has a description of CAR 2ND 3RD then point 1 will be used as the first symbol insertion point and the next two points with the CAR description will be used as the second and third symbol insertion points 1 a Back Driver Side Multi Point Symbol DrawingDraw 2nd Symbol This option creates a second symbol on each point This additional symbol can be used to add a 3D symbol to a 2D symbol used as the first symbol Besides selecting the symbol name there are settings for the symbol size and layer
312. our contours are not smoothed as they cross hard barriers Connection Order The points of a distinct code can be connected in their point number order or by near est found which makes the line by adding the next closest point Tie When checked the linework drawn with this code will always close For example if you have points 1 2 3 and 4 with the code BLDG and Tie is checked on for the code BLDG then the linework will be drawn from point 1 to 2 to 3 to 4 and then back to point 1 closing the figure Linework Description This description is labeled along linework created by this code The Set button displays a dialog to control the layer style and size for these labels You can also set the label interval Linework Description Setup ES Layer LINETXT Set Style STANDARD Set Text Size 0 100 Y Flip Text for Twist Screen Label Interval By Distance Distance Interval 500 OK Cancel He Set Template For 3D polyline codes this option allows you to assign a template TPL file to the code The code points act as the centerline for the template and the program will drawn parallel 3D polylines for each break point grade ID in the template The template file is defined in the Civil Design module Select All This option selects all the codes This can be used when only wanting to process a couple of codes For example use the select all option to select all the codes and then turn them off Now s
313. ove the current attached image The Capture button will take a shot in the field using a configured camera and then attach the image to the entity Different digital cameras can be used by picking Pick or Set Camera The Input Edit GIS Data command is an excellent way to simply review the data associated with an entity If the entity has GIS data the banner line at the top of the dialog will display Entity has GIS Data If not the banner Chapter 11 GIS Commands 252 line will display Entity has no GIS Data Even when the entity has no data the default values for the prompts will appear Pressing OK will assign this data to the entity To avoid assigning data to the entity if it has none press Cancel Alternately you can use the commands GIS Inspector Settings followed by GIS Data Inspector to review the data with no possibility of editing or inputting data in the process There are three methods for selecting the drawing entities to process S for Select P for Pick and N for Number Select Object method With this method you pick the drawing entity to process the data attached to that entity When selecting a Carlson point the point number is used to link to the database Pick method For this method you pick inside a closed polyline to process the data attached to that polyline Number method Here you simply input the point number from the current CRD file to process Prompts Select object Number Pick lt Select gt P
314. ows you to display the radius arc length chord length and delta angle of a curve Display Polyline Data Allows you to display the end point elevations horizontal distance slope distance and slope ratios Display 3D Face Data Allows you to display the Z elevations at the face corners Display Polyline Blips Allows you to displays temporary blip plus marks at the vertice locations of polylines Display Polyline Direction Allows you to displays temporary arrows to show the direction of polylines In the Drawing Inspector menu you can also choose how the property information is reported Enable Highlighting Allows you to highlight the object that the Drawing Inspector is reporting Enable Tag Display Enables you to view the information next to the cursor on the screen Show Data On Status Bar Enables you to view the information on the status bar in the lower corner of the screen Use Default Cursor When enabled only the drawing cursor shows When disabled the mouse pointer is also shown Report In High Precision When enabled displays 8 decimals on distance and 4 decimal seconds on angles N 29 37 30 W 114 656 Example of Drawing Inspector reporting Bearing Distance using the Tag Display Pulldown Menu Location View Keyboard Command inspector Prerequisite None Chapter 4 View Commands 60 Draw Commands 5 Line This command allows you to draw a line entity by picking points on the screen or by supplying t
315. ows you to select existing drawing DWG files to populate the selected category If the files you select are not in the Carlson Survey SUP directory the program will offer an option of copying them there e Save Saves the symbol library list e Exit Exit the dialog If there are unsaved changes you will be prompted to save Notes The symbol library is stored in an ASCII file named symbols dta in the Carlson Survey USER directory Menu Location Settings Prerequisite None Keyboard Command EDITPTS YM Chapter 6 Settings Commands 100 Configure Function This command allows you to set the default settings that are used each time you start a new drawing or load an existing drawing These settings are stored in ini files in the Carlson Survey directory Configure restores the current drawing settings to these default settings 1 In the Configure dialog box you choose between General Settings Survey Settings and Drawing Setup General Settings Survey Settings Drawing Setup t Help 2 In the General Settings dialog box you can set options for Carlson Survey General Settings xi General Support Paths V Use Startup Wizard Data Path Set J Generate Report Log LSP Path Set V Save Drawing INI Files Resco Set Put Data Files in DWG Directory Suppert Path Set I Auto Zoom Center for New Points MSExcelPath sd _ St JV Ignore Zero Elevs Object Linking m CRD File PtH F
316. patterns are converted to R13 polylines and hatch patterns e Raster objects are displayed as bounding boxes Raster objects are restored if the drawing is opened in AutoCAD 2000 or later e Draw order information is not applied for display or print e Xrefs that have been clipped with a boundary box are displayed in full as attached xrefs because Release 13 does not support xref clipping Clipping is restored if the drawing is opened in AutoCAD 2000 or later Saving a drawing in Release 12 LT 2 DXF format is subject to the following limitations e Lightweight polylines and hatch patterns are converted to R12 polylines and hatch patterns e All solids bodies regions ellipses leaders multilines rays tolerances and xlines are converted to lines arcs and circles as appropriate e Groups complex linetypes OLE objects and preview images are not displayed e Many objects are lost if you save a drawing as Release 12 and open it later in AutoCAD 2000 or later Menu Location File Prerequisite None Keyboard Command SAVEAS Plot This command allows you to plot a drawing to a plotting device or file AgsStar displays the Plot dialog box Choose OK to begin plotting with the current settings and display the Plot Progress dialog box 1 The Plot dialog box includes the tabs Plot Device and Plot Settings and several options to customize the plot e Layout Name This option displays the current layout name or displays Selected layo
317. pe name pick another entity The first selection is now assigned to the layer of the second selection Chapter 4 View Commands 57 Menu Location View Prerequisite Entities to change Keyboard Command LCHG Freeze Layer This command allows you to freeze layers assigned to the entities you select Menu Location View Prerequisite None Keyboard Command LOFF Isolate Layer This command allows you to freeze all layers except the layers assigned to the entities you select The program prompts to see if you would like to retain the PNT layers which keeps the point layers from freezing These layers include PNT PNTMARK PNTELEV PNTDESC and PNTELEV Prompts 1 Select objects on layers to isolate Select objects pick entities 2 Retain POINT layers Yes lt No gt Press Enter Menu Location View Prerequisite None Keyboard Command ISOLATE Restore Layer This command thaws the layers frozen by the Isolate Layer command Menu Location View Prerequisite You must have previously run the Isolate Layer command Keyboard Command RESTORE Thaw Layer This command allows you to thaw the layers frozen by the Freeze Layer command Menu Location View Prerequisite None Keyboard Command LON List Displays database information for selected objects Carlson Survey lists the object type object layer and X Y Z position relative to the current user coordinate system UCS and whether the object is in model space or pape
318. pends on the plotter Changes that modify the effective plot area include those made to the plot origin which you define under Plot Offset on the Plot Settings tab If you offset the origin so much that the effective area extends outside the preview area the program displays a warning Menu Location File Prerequisite None Keyboard Command PLOT Import LandXML File The Import LandXML File routine provides a mechanism where land based data from other software applications including Carlson Software can be brought into a project and used for analysis and or design purposes To import a LandXML file a series of dialog boxes are presented Select LandXML File Specify the name of a LandXML file you wish to import LandXML Units Imperial LandXML Info V Point Protection Destination file method Prompt for each file name Automatic name by LandXML file and target directory TT Load surfaces into Surface Manager Use Old FLT Triangulation File Format to import surface data I Save All Existing Ground Profiles from one Centerline to the same file Change Directory C Carlson Projects Centerlines SANDRIDGEO1 Profiles SANDRIDGEO2 PARKINGO1 Profiles PARKINGO2 PARKINGO2 ENTRANCEO1 Profiles ENTRANCEO2 CrossSections ENTRANCE EXT ENTRANCE FIN 78 1 7 Surfaces TAL FXISTING PHASF II Y LandXML Units Indicates the Units of Measure associated with th
319. phically choose the desired symbol You specify the layer by entering the name in the Layer box or by clicking on the Select button to choose from a dialog that presents all known layers Symbol Buffer Offset By default the symbol will be automatically scaled according to the text length and size of the Lot Description value for the area For additional control of symbol scaling the user can enter a number in text size units in the Symbol Buffer Offset box This value will be added to the automatically generated default scaling value Avoid Label Overlap If this box is checked the area labels will be checked for overlaps after they are generated Please see the Overlap Manager documentation for more information Overlap Settings Click this button to go to the Avoid Label Overlaps dialog where you can review or modify the Overlap Manager settings Please see the Overlap Manager documentation for more information Chapter 9 Tools Commands 225 Area Defaults Label Fields and Settings Table Process Settings Area Commands Use Area Tables Never Y 5 O Next Available Area Number Specified With Prompt Specified With Auto Numbering C Auto Place Table References Cancel Table Process Settings Tab Use Area Tables Use this control to determine whether area labels are sent to a table or not Options are Never Always or By Scaler To Table Area When the user has selected By Scaler in the Use Area Tabl
320. ping the command name or right click and choose Turn off Drawing Inspector The options for this command are set in the menu that pops up by clicking the right mouse button The available properties are Layer Name Elevation Azimuth Distance Bearing Distance Point Data Text Data Curve Data 3D Face Data Polyline Data and Polyline Blips Keyboard Enter Exit Menu Turn Off Drawing Inspector 4 Display Layer Name Display Entity Type Display Elevation Display Azimuth Distance Display Bearing Distance Display Point Data Display Text Data Display Curve Data Display Polyline Data Display 3DFace Data Display Polyline Blips Display Polyline Direction Enable Highlighting Enable Tag Display Show Data On Status Bar Use Default Cursor Report In High Precision lt 4 In the Drawing Inspector menu you can choose one or more properties to display Display Layer Name Allows you to display the layer name of the entity Display Entity Type Allows you to display the type of the entity ie TEXT or POLY LINE Display Elevation Allows you to display the elevation of the entity Chapter 4 View Commands 59 Display Azimuth Distance Allows you to display the azimuth and distance of a line Display Bearing Distance Allows you to display the bearing and distance of a line Display Point Data Allows you to display the coordinate data of point Display Text Data Allows you to display the attributes of text Display Curve Data All
321. polylines In the case of multiple areas the user can choose to have the areas totaled Total Multiple Areas into a single result or to generate data for each area separately Area by Closed Polyline will also automatically find special Carlson attributes attached to the polyline in addition to capturing the area itself These attributes will appear in the report which can be the standard report or which can be presented in the Report Formatter which itself links to Excel and Access For example property names and owner names as applied to a polyline using the Mine modules will report out automatically using Area by Closed Polyline The command Draw Lots from File will apply extended entity data to the lot polylines which includes the lot name and this will also report out when using Area by Closed Polyline In addition lot names or any interior text whatsoever can be captured and included in the report The plot of the area on screen can be canceled if only the report is desired Area By Closed Polylines Multiple Areas C Prompt For Exclusion Areas Area Report None Standard Formatter Label Area Auto Place Labels Chapter 9 Tools Commands 229 Carlson Software Edit c Carlson2007 USER scadrprt tmp Of Polyline Area 4 6 2006 15 22 Polyline Area 64862 9 sq ft 1 5 acres Polyline Perimeter 1018 7 ft Prompts Select Area Polyline select the area polyline SQ FEET 64862 9 SQ YARDS 7
322. priate unit using the arrow keys Topcon Total Stations The Topcon instrument must have CR LF carriage return linefeed turned on for communication with AgStar To set this with 200 series 1 Turn instrument off 2 Turn instrument on while holding F2 key 3 Choose F3 Others set 4 Press F4 Page down 5 Choose F3 CR LF and set it on To set this with 700 series 1 Choose Parameter from the main screen 2 Scroll down until you find CR LF and set it on Topcon GTS 700 To set the instrument to work with AgStar press F2 for std on the instrument Topcon 800 A Remote Setup Topcon Setup 1 Turn on the Topcon Chapter 7 Survey Commands 132 2 Connect the Topcon to one of the radios and the other radio connect to AgStar 3 Under the Survey menu go to Configure Survey and under equipment type select Topcon800A Remote 4 To set Topcon for external mode Press F1 for prog then F6 for more This will lead to more programs Enter F2 for Ext Link 5 To select the radio channel in External Link enter 2 for settings and 4 for parameter radio modem then 3 for set channel Using the arrow keys change the channel When done press for F1 for set then press ESC until get back to External Link Menu NOTE Channel on the Topcon should match the channel set in AgStar 6 After channel is set press 1 for Execute 7 Topcon is ready Pa tad NOTE If the batteries ar
323. process including pseudoranges and DGPS corrections The NT300D is now properly configured and if connected to a computer running AgStar will transmit position fix data to the computer automatically Before using it however it is best to power it down and then turn it back on normally as running it in Setup Mode is not recommended Trimble 4000 Series Hardware Setup 1 Setup the antenna and GPS receiver as normal The radio should be on I O Port 2 2 Connect the Computer that AgStar is running on to I O Port 1 by the appropriate cable Front Panel Configuration Base Station 1 After powering on the receiver press the Control Button From the selections available select MORE This will bring up a second page of options Select MORE again The front panel screen should now be on RECEIVER CONTROL 3 of 7 2 Select BAUD RATE FORMAT and from the menu that this creates select SERIAL PORT 1 SETTINGS 3 Ensure that the port is set to 38400 baud 8 Odd 1 Format with no flow control 4 Similarly make sure that the settings for I O Port 2 agree with those of the type of radio being used typically 9600 8 None 1 5 Return to the RECEIVER CONTROL menu and go to page 4 0 7 Select REFERENCE POSITION 6 Enter the Lat Lon of the position the base is located at Alternately select HERE to have the GPS unit read the current position and use that as the base reference point 7 On page 1 of the RECEIVER CONTROL menu select R
324. r Impulse Laser Leica GPS System 500 Leica TC Series Manual Total Station Nikon Total Stations Simulation GPS Sokkia Topcon Total Stations Trimble Navcom GPS Setup Navcom Configuration Guide CSI GBX Pro Hardware Setup 1 Connect the receiver to the antenna by coaxial antenna cable 1f 1t is not already connected and ensure that that the receiver has ample power 2 Ensure that the antenna is tracking corrections from an MSK Radio Beacon The easiest way to do this is to use the antenna s automatic frequency scanning when first powering on the receiver a To do this enter the SETUP menu and select the option AUTO BX SEARCH Note that the beacon automatically selected by this scan will be saved to the receiver s memory and used automati cally in the future until either the scan is executed again or until a new beacon is specified manually Thus it is not necessary to scan each time the bacon is used provided it is still operating in the same general area b A scan can be performed again in the event that the beacon is lost to scan for the next nearest beacon 3 Enter the Setup menu then select Options then NMEA ON OFF This menu allows the enabling or disabling of various NMEA messages The only ones which are necessary are the GGA GSV and GSA messages All others should be disabled Software Setup 4 In AgStar no further setup is necessary to make use of the CSI GBX Pro Simply use the other AgS
325. r 1 Product Overview 14 3 Proprietary Rights of Licensor End User agrees that LICENSOR retains exclusive ownership of the trademarks and service marks represented by its company name and logo and all of the documentation and computer recorded data related thereto End User also agrees that all techniques algorithms and processes contained in LICENSOR s computer program products or any modification or extraction thereof constitute TRADE SECRETS OF LICENSOR and will be safeguarded by End User but in no event shall End User exercise less than due diligence and care in accordance with the laws of the country of purchase and International Law whichever operates to best protect the interests of LICENSOR End User shall not copy reproduce re manufacture or in any way duplicate all or any part of LICENSOR products WHETHER MODIFIED OR TRANSLATED INTO ANOTHER LANGUAGE OR NOT or in any documentation or in any other material provided by LICENSOR in association with LICENSOR s computer program products regardless of what manner of storage and retrieval the product exists except as specified in this Agreement and in accordance with the terms and conditions of this Agreement which remain in force End User agrees that in the event End User breaches this EULA End User will be liable for damages as may be determined by a court of competent jurisdiction 4 Restrictions End User s rights and obligations under this EULA are nonexclusive and personal in nature a
326. r displays the Save Drawing As standard file selection dialog box Enter a file name and type You can select any of the following file types e AutoCAD 2000 dwg e AutoCAD R14 LT 98 LT 97 Drawing dwg e AutoCAD R13 LT 95 Drawing dwg e Drawing Template File dwt e Carlson Software 2002 DXF dxf e AutoCAD R14 LT 98 LT 97 DXF dxf e AutoCAD R13 LT 95 DXF dxf e AutoCAD R12 LT2 DXF dxf AgsStar saves the file under the specified file name If the drawing is already named the program saves the drawing to the new file name If you save the file as a drawing template the program displays the Template Description dialog box where you can provide a description for the template and set the units of measurement Chapter 2 File Commands 21 Saving a drawing in Release 14 LT 98 LT 97 format is subject to the following limitations e Hyperlinks are converted to Release 14 attached URLs e Database links and freestanding labels are converted to Release 14 links and displayable attributes e Database attached labels are converted to MText and leader objects and their link information is not available Attached labels are restored if you open the drawing in AutoCAD 2000 or later e Lineweight information is not available Lineweights are restored if you open the drawing in AutoCAD 2000 or later Saving a drawing in Release 13 LT 95 format is subject to the following limitations e Lightweight polyline and hatch
327. r of a trace solid or 3D face e Midpoint Snaps to the midpoint of an arc ellipse elliptical arc line multiline polyline segment solid spline or xline a ba e Center Snaps to the center of an arc circle ellipse or elliptical arc gt _ e Node Snaps to a point object e Quadrant Snaps to a quadrant point of an arc circle ellipse or elliptical arc O A Chapter 6 Settings Commands 82 e Intersection Snaps to the intersection of an arc circle ellipse elliptical arc line multiline polyline ray spline or xline Intersection snaps to the edges of regions and curves but does not snap to the edges or corners of 3D solids Extended Intersection snaps to the imaginary intersection of two objects that would intersect if the objects were extended along their natural paths Carlson Survey automatically turns on Extended Intersection when you select the Intersection object snap mode You might get varying results if you have both the Intersection and Apparent Intersection running object snaps turned on at the same time Intersection and Extended Intersection work with edges of regions and curves but not with edges or corners of 3D solids a N Extension Causes a temporary extension line to display when you pass the cursor over the endpoint of objects so you can draw objects to and from points on the extension line Insertion Snaps to the insertion point of an attribute a b
328. r space LIST reports color linetype and lineweight information if these items are not set to BYLAYER The thickness of an object is displayed if it is nonzero Z coordinate information defines the elevation If the extrusion direction of the entry differs from the Z axis 0 0 1 of the current UCS LIST also reports the extrusion direction in UCS coordinates Chapter 4 View Commands 58 LIST reports additional information related to the specific object selected Menu Location View Prerequisite None Keyboard Command LIST Polyline Info This command reports the length and elevation of the selected line or polyline Prompts Pick Polyline or Line pick a polyline Polyline length 145 43 Elevation 100 0 Pull Down Menu Location View Keyboard Command polylen Prerequisite A polyline Drawing Inspector This command reports object properties to you as you move the cursor over an entity You can simply move the pointer over an entity and the selected property will be displayed either in a pop up window next to the pointer and or on the status bar depending on the selected option Drawing Inspector is a transparent command that can run while other commands are running Once Drawing Inspector is started it will stay active even while running other commands until you turn it off To turn off Drawing Inspector run the command again to toggle it off by pick Drawing Inspector from the Inquiry pull down menu or from the toolbar or by ty
329. r the report including angle format e Maximum Horiz Distance This option allows you to define the maximum horizontal distance e Report Slope Distance This option allows you to include the slope distance in the report e Use Cut Sheet Format This option allows you to use the cut sheet format in the report e Azimuth This option reports azimuth for radial stakeout e Angle Right This option reports angle right for radial stakeout e Both This option reports both azimuth and angle right for radial stakeout D Under Number of Decimal Places for List Points you can set the precision for both Northing Easting and eleva tion You also set scale factors for line and curve tables E Under Initial Traverse Sideshot Angle Mode you can determine if angles are represented as azimuth or angle right Alternatively you can set the default to prompt you each time Chapter 6 Settings Commands 105 F Show Occupy and Backsight Points on Status Bar When checked the current occupied and backsight point numbers are visible in the program status bar G Automatic Raw File On When checked a raw RW5S file is automatically created during any of the following commands Locate Point Traverse Sideshot and Inverse 8 In the Survey Text Defaults dialog box you can set defaults for building dimension and adjoiner text Survey Text Defaults xi r Building Dimensions y Offset Dimension Text Layer Layer Text Style Text
330. ra Fields into DBF file for known GIS tables NORTHING EASTING ELEVATION DESCRIPTION LENGTH_DWG AREA _DWG Remove arcs from polpline offset cutoff 01 Pulldown Menu Location GIS Keyboard Command export_shp Prerequisite None Chapter 11 GIS Commands 260 Help Commands 12 OnLine Help This command opens the AgStar on line Help File Menu Location Help Prerequisite None Keyboard Command F1 or HELP Training Movies This command opens an application that lets you choose from several training movies The movies provide instruc tion for all aspects of AgStar Menu Location Help Prerequisite None Keyboard Command RUN_MOVIES Chapter 12 Help Commands 262 Index plus 0 5in PRO 27 2D Polyline 62 3 Point Curve 68 3D Polyline 3D Viewer Window Add 22 B1 E8 09 0038 195 20A 234 236 255 Add Polyline Vertex 48 Adjust Field Elevation 151 Align 5 5 65 173 371201535 146 275 233 Align GPS To Local Coordinates Align to Benchmark Alphanumeric Angle Balance Angle Mode Append Another Raw File 241 Arc BA 68 73 220 250257259 Area D413 43 152 L63 165 208 226 227 229 231 Area by Closed Polylines Area by Interior Point 229 Area Defaults Area Name Inspector 153 ASE Assign Subdivision Area Name 152 Attributes AuthorizingAgstar Automatic Point Numbers 168 171 Azimuth A3 78 102 104 105 113 1
331. rate lines in X Y Z format The DTM and Idan formats create linework files for the DTM and Idan programs The MicroStation format txt can be imported into MicroStation This format has the coordinates as space delimited for each polyline point There is an extra column with a 1 or 0 where 1 specifies the start of a new polyline The Moss format creates a INP file for the MX MOSS Genio program The Peabody format is a company specific format for Peabody Energy The Topcon format creates a Topcon LN3 file The 12D format creates a file format compatible with the 12d modeling program Note Chapter 2 File Commands 29 e The former Google KML output option has been been moved to the dedicated Export Google Earth File command Prompts Polyline file format lt Carlson gt DTM Idan MicroStation MOSS Peabody Topcon 12D Specify the desired output option by specifying the CAPITALIZED option or press Enter for the lt default gt option Polyline File to Write dialog Create a new file or Append to Existing If the Carlson option was selected the following dialog then appears Write Polyline File E xi T Use Polyline File for Grid File Utilities macro T Specify Exclusion Waming Polylines J Specify WorkZone Polylines J Reduce Polyline Vertices Offset cutoff 0 010 IV Include Z coordinate in polyline file Desa foomo z ox f cms te Use Polyline File for Grid File Utilities macro When enabled the option will
332. real numbers in the range from 1 797E 308 to 1 797E 308 separated by a comma having extreme decimal accuracy maintained Always maintain the X Y format one and only one comma must be used separating the X and Y e 3D Point Defined as a list of three real numbers in the range from 1 797E 308 to 1 797E 308 separated by commas While editing a 3D point you must always maintain the X Y Z format two no less or no more commas must used separating the X and Y and Z values 3 Under Range Group the variable displayed will usually have a range displayed The FROM value indicating the minimum and the TO value being the maximum value accepted 4 Under the Store Group depending on the type of variable AutoCAD may store the value in the drawing or the configuration file or it may not be stored Each of these types are explained below for your benefit e Not Stored Some variables such as PLATFORM and CDATE are not stored because they are system interde pendent e In Drawing Most variables are stored in the drawing making the drawing format more personal than just a database of objects This allows you to open a drawing and have it behave just as though you had never left it In Config These are variables that remain the same regardless of the drawing opened APERTURE and PICK BOX are just two examples of variables stored in the configuration file 5 Under Access Group depending on the type of variable AutoCAD may not allow you t
333. red g whether the attribute Value can be field Edited appears as Read Only or is Hidden h whether the value used is restricted to the list Define Gl iS Feature File Category Feature Help Features File C Carlson Projects masteilist gis GIS Categories Features Feature LOTS New Feature Edit Feature Save Feature g CONTROL i ATTRIBUTE FULL NAME TYPE DEFAULT HISTORIC VALUE VALUE Int I PROP_ID PROP_ID Int O IRONPIN OWNER OWNER Char O LOTCORNER E Type Char i g STORMDRAIN s Lock Block Char LOT Lot Char O SWRNET_NO Char of SWRNET_PIF _ 9 SUBDIVISION ENCUEN EN EN EN ES TREE 3 8 UNASSIGNED 29 un O Gas SMH UP 4 Attribute Geometry Point 9 Polyline Layers LOT Chapter 11 GIS Commands 251 Features File C Carlson Projects masterlist gis GIs Categoties Features Feature LOTS New Feature Edit Feature l Save Feature 7 9 CONTROL LIST VALUES REQUIRED FIELD EDIT RESTRICI TO LIST O HISTORIC No Editable No S O IRONPIN No Editable No No Editable wo O LOTCORNER No Editable No 2 STORMDRAIN No Editable No No r Editable No No EdRpable w No O SWRNET_NO of SWRNET PIF _ BD SUBDIVISION 2 53 O TREE 9 UNASSIGNED 4 gt Attribute Geometry Point Set Select Color ByLayer Polyine Layers Set Linetypes Geometry Settings At
334. reen that is in the direction of the side of line to offset Select a polyline to offset Enter for none press Enter Pulldown Menu Location Edit gt Polyline Utilities Keyboard Command offset3d Prerequisite polyline Entities to Polylines This command converts selected lines arcs circles 3Dfaces and solids into individual polylines You may use Join Nearest to convert adjoining lines and arcs into continuous polylines Prompts 1 Select lines arcs circles 3Dfaces and solids to convert Select objects pick entities Menu Location Edit Polyline Utilities gt Prerequisite Lines arcs or other entities to convert Chapter 3 Edit Commands 46 Keyboard Command TOPLINE Reverse Polyline This command reverses the order of the line and or arc segments of a polyline This can be used in conjunction with the commands such as Station Polyline Centerline or Profile from Surface Entities since the polyline must be plotted in the direction of increasing stations If it is more convenient to draft a polyline in one direction you may do so and then use the Reverse Polyline command to change its order This command can also be used to reverse a 3D Polyline Breakline or a 3D Pad Template Temporary arrows are drawn along the polyline to graphically show the new polyline direction Prompts 1 Select the Polyline to Reverse pick point on polyline Menu Location Edit Polyline Utilities gt Prerequisite A polyline Keyboard Com
335. rface data doesn t cover the entire grid area then the values for the grid cells beyond the data limit must be extrapolated in order to compute slopes in that area This prompt only appears if there are grid cells without values Local pond spillover depth lt 4 80 gt press Enter This allows the runoff line to continue past flat or low points in the grid or TIN by allowing these area to fill up with water in essence up to the specified depth thus letting the runoff polyline continue on Draw tracking for all grid cells or pick individuals All lt Pick gt press Enter Pressing Enter leads to individual picking of runoff tracking lines while A for All would fill draw runoff polylines starting from each grid cell or each triangulation triangle Pick origin of rain drop pick a point at the top of the run off polyline Pick origin of rain drop Enter to end press Enter Pulldown Menu Location Tools Keyboard Command runoff Prerequisite A grd file created by Design Field Point Defaults This command sets AgStar point options Descriptions Specify whether you are prompted for a point description when creating points and whether the point descriptions are labeled in the point block Chapter 9 Tools Commands 167 Elevations Specify whether you are prompted for a point elevations when creating points and whether the point elevations are labeled in the point block Locate on Real Z Axis When checked points are located at the
336. riation of Twist Screen Standard The command aligns a selected line to be parallel to the east west direction of your graphics screen Think of the line you select as a pointer or arrow that will be moved to point in the east direction of the screen Select the line closest to the line endpoint that you want to point in the horizontal or east direction of the screen Menu Location View Twist Screen gt Prerequisite None Keyboard Command TWIST2 Twist Screen Surveyor This command is another variation of Twist Screen Standard You enter the angle azimuth that you want to be aligned parallel to the east west direction of the graphics screen Menu Location View Twist Screen gt Prerequisite None Keyboard Command TWIST3 Restore Due North This command twists the screen to make due north vertical Menu Location View Twist Screen gt Prerequisite None Keyboard Command TWIST4 Layer ID This command reports the layer name of the selected entity Prompts Pick entity to read layer pick an entity Layer FINAL Pick entity to read layer Press Enter to end Pull Down Menu Location View Prerequisite None Keyboard Command layerid Change Layer This command allows you to change the layer of a group of entities you select The layer name can be either typed or read from an existing entity you select Prompts 1 Select entities to be changed Select objects pick entities 2 Pick entity with new layer or press Enter to ty
337. rimeter x Move P j fe Use Commas in Labels Y Use MText Erase Previous Labels Label Placement Center O Rear Side C Align By Sides Flip Text for Twist Screen Draw Symbol Around Lot Description Symbol Name SPTB Symbol Buffer Offset lo le pa Avoid Label Overlap Qj yerlap Settings al Cancel I Help Field Settings Dialog To control the appearance of the fields in the drawing use the Edit button to edit the high lighted item in the Used Fields list or double click on a field in the same list This will call up the Field Settings Dialog Field Settings Field Name Actes Text Style Text Size Text Layer Text Color Prefix Sufix Justification Precision ROMANC 0 150 AREATXT ByLayer ACRES Centered v None 00 Select Style Select Layer Select Color User Defined The Field User Defined can be added to place a custom fixed label in all areas To control the value and appearance of the custom label in the drawing use the Edit button to edit the User Defined item in the Used Fields list or double click on a field in the same list This will call up the Field Settings Dialog In this case the Value setting becomes the custom label Scaled labels The Scaled Sq Feet Scaled Sq Meters Scaled Acres and Scaled Permiter fields can be used to include area labels that are scaled based on Drawing Setup Report Scale Factor Field Settings Field Name User Defined Tex
338. ring azimuth and horizontal distance between two points The command prompts for series of points Use the appropriate object snap mode to select the points from the screen or use the point numbers to reference coordinates stored in the current coordinate file The results are then displayed This command is also used in conjunction with the Traverse and Sideshot commands to occupy and backsight two points The last two points you Inverse to are the Backsight and the Occupied point for the Traverse and Sideshot commands Press Enter at the point prompt to end the command You can also inverse around an arc by inversing to the PC and then entering A for Arc option The program will ask for the radius point the curve direction left or right and the PT point The curve data is then reported There is an unequal PC Radius and PT Radius distance check The tolerance for this is set in the Area Label Defaults command There are several input options for Inverse that are set by entering O for Options Sideshot inverse holds the cur rent occupied point and calculates the bearing distance to each entered point The Pairs option reports the bear ing distance between pairs of points and not for every entered point For example if points 1 2 11 12 were entered the bearing distance would be reported for 1 2 and 11 12 but not 2 11 The Auto Increment option uses the next point number by just pressing Enter To exit the routine with Auto Increment active End must be
339. ription the description would be TR 12 OAK Fixed Parameters 1st Parameter 2nd Parameter 31d Parameter Size Y Description v None Data Collection Codes These settings apply to Carlson Field for turning on the Offset mode and Rotate mode automatically by F2F code Data Collection Codes pre Som E Rotate Code ok Cancel Hep Chapter 9 Tools Commands 193 Edit Field Code Definition x Gener St Unete spt10 Symbol Name Fpt10 Set Symbol I Unit Symbol I Random Rotate I Rotate to Line Symbol Size Scaler p 080 Custom Attributes Symbol Points l Draw 2nd Symbol Here are the settings on the Symbol tab Set Symbol This is the point symbol for the code The dialog allows you to select from the symbols de fined in the Symbol Library which is setup with the Settings gt Symbol Library command Besides the symbols from the symbol library you can also use any symbols that are defined as blocks in the current drawing by entering the block name in the symbol edit box To have a point without a symbol use the Carlson symbol named SPTO which represents no symbol Unit Symbol This option will draw the point symbol at unit 1 1 scale For example this option could be used for a symbol that is already drawn to actual dimensions such as a car symbol Random Rotate This option will randomly rotate the symbol For example this option could be used for tree symbols to have th
340. rmation The rotation will use either the state plane grid or the geodetic as north No scale is applied in this transformation A two or more point alignment is used to align to an existing local coordinate system At least two pairs of local and GPS coordinates must be entered In addition to the northing and easting transformation SurvStar will also translate the elevation from the GPS system to the local The elevation difference between the two systems is modeled by a best fit plane An alignment is only valid if the base receiver setup has not changed since the alignment points were recorded In order to use an alignment when returning to a site you must set up the base receiver in the same position and enter the same LAT LONG coordinates for the base The Align GPS to Local Crds menu item brings up the alignment dialog box There is more information than to fit in one window so use the View button to switch between viewing the local coordinates and the GPS Lat Lon Each line in the box represents one alignment point Each point in an alignment file relates a specific Lat Lon Elv to a specific Northing Easting Elevation for your local coordinate system AgStar will use the current alignment file every time that the GPS is read It provides the necessary adjustment to properly convert that position to your coordinate system In the local points view the HRes column shows the horizontal residual and the VRes column shows the vertical residu
341. rms coordinates between local state plane 27 state plane 83 lati tude longitude and Universal Transverse Mercator UTM Works on individually entered coordinates by range of point numbers and with on screen entities For converting between state plane 27 and 83 AgStar calls upon NADCON from the National Geodetic Survey to apply the latitude longitude adjustment The NADCON program ndcon210 exe is stored in the AgStar EXEC directory The Enter Coordinates input option transforms one coordinate at a time The coordinates can be typed in or use the Input Point Number option Output Point Number is an option to store the results in the coordinate file When transforming a local coordinate system there are three methods as shown in this dialog The Align by Two Pairs of Points option uses two pairs of source and destination coordinates The first pair defines the translation as the difference between the source and destination northing and easting This destination point is also the pivot point for rotation Rotation can be entered directly or defined by a second pair of points where the bearing between the first and second source points is rotated to align with the bearing from the first and second destination points There is an option to also apply scaling The scaling holds the angle between points and adjusts the distances by the scale factor The scale factor is calculated for each point as the elevation factor at the first source point times the
342. rrent location relative to the viewport coordinate system The drawing display is moved in the same direction as the cursor S hand cursor When you reach a logical extent the edge of the drawing space a bar is displayed on the hand cursor on the side where the extent has been reached Depending on whether the logical extent is at the top bottom or side of the drawing the bar is either horizontal top or bottom or vertical left or right side x S Sk S JS NA top right bottom left extent extent extent extent When you release the pick button panning stops You can release the pick button move the cursor to another location in the drawing and then press the pick button again to pan the display from that location To stop panning at any time press Enter or ESC Menu Location View Prerequisite None Keyboard Command P 3D Viewer Window This command allows you to view the selected 3D faces polylines lines and points in 3D using the OpenGL graphics library for rendering which gives it superior performance This command gives you the ability to zoom in and out pan rotate around the X Y or Z axis and shade in user positioned lighting You also have the option to export the view to a windows bitmap BMP file The window below is displayed after you select the entities to be shown To pan the display click on the image and drag the pointer Carlson Software 3D Viewer Al ES Y Ignore Zero Ely Vert scale 1 0 v
343. rrently being installed Updating component registration ana Please wait installation in progress Cancel 9 When the installation is complete the Setup Complete dialog box is displayed Choose Finish to exit the installa tion program Chapter 1 Product Overview 8 ji AgStar 2002 Setup 10 x AgStar 2002 has been successfully installed You may run AgStar 2002 by double clicking the installed program icon Click the Finish button to exit this installation 10It is strongly recommended that you restart your computer at this point in order for the new configuration settings to take effect Installer Information to Carlson Software 2002 to take effect Click Yes to restart now ez You must restart your system for the configuration changes made 2 ot No if you plan to manually restart later Do one of the following Choose Yes to restart your computer now Choose No to manually restart your computer at another time If you do not restart your computer you may have problems running Agstar Congratulations You have successfully installed Agstar You are now ready to register your product and start using the program To register the product double click the Agstar icon on your desktop and follow the instructions Command Entry Commands may be issued by selecting an entry from a pull down menu clicking a toolbar button or by typing a command at the command prompt Pressing Enter
344. rs of a base station for the receiver Ex Current position etc Chapter 7 Survey Commands 130 j Power Cycle Receiver powers the receiver down and then turns it back on clearing the main memory k Save and Exit save all settings changes and exit this menu 1 Cancel Restore original settings and exit this menu To set the Radian IS up as a Rover 7 Select Rover for Station Type and set the Radio Baud to match the PDL s which are being used Also set RTK Dynamics to Dynamic Kinematic and set Motion Dynamics to the appropriate option 8 Select Exit and Save The receiver is now ready for use as a rover To set the Radian IS up as a Base 7 Select Base for station type and set the Radio Baud to math the PDL s which are being used For most jobs set RTK Dynamics to Dynamic Kinematic unless you are sure that static is more appropriate even small fluctuations from wind on the pole can cause problems in Static mode Set motion dynamics to Foot Walking and then select Configure Base Station 9 In the menu dialog that opens there are a few buttons a Read from GPS Read a position from the GPS and fix to that position b Enter Lat Lon Fix to a manually entered Lat Lon position c Enter State Plane Coord Fix to a manually entered State Plane Northing Easting position d Read From File Fix to a position read from a x ref file e Cancel Cancel base setup If Read From GPS is selected the software wil
345. rt structures route the flow from the culvert inlet to the outlet The culverts are defined by two points for the inlet and outlet and by a name The Channel structure is the same as the Culvert except that it can have more than two points to define the flow path The structure data can be stored to a Watershed Structure File wst using the Save button The Load button can read the structure data from either a wst file or from a sewer network file sew Tools Options Structures Data Pulldown Menu Location Tools Keyboard Command watershed Prerequisite Triangulation File or Grid File created by Design Field Chapter 9 Tools Commands 166 Run Off Tracking This command draws 3D polylines starting at user picked points downhill until they reach a local minimum or the end of the grid or TIN In effect it simulates the path of a rain drop The program also reports the horizontal and slope distances average slope maximum slope and vertical drop These values can be used for time of concentration calculations Runoff tracking is a convenient way to identify distinct watershed areas and is an alternative to the automated Watershed Analysis command Prompts Enter the run off path layer lt RUNOFF gt press Enter Select Surface Model dialog box Choose the grid file or triangulation file that models the surface If a grid is selected it will prompt Extrapolate grid to full grid size Yes lt No gt Yes If the limits of the su
346. rvey Settings xj Tree Entity Options Layer Description Codes GIS Attributes Label Tree Trunk TRUNK Tree Drip RIP Tree Tag TAG Chapter 9 Tools Commands 205 In addition to looking for the tree attributes in the point description the program can also read these attributes from GIS fields On the GIS Attributes dialog tab you can set the GIS field names for the tree attributes Tree Survey Settings xj Tree Entity Options Layer Description Codes GIS Attributes Label Text Size Scaler 0 080 Text Offset Scaler 0 080 Text Style Standard Select Label Location Defaut TI Tc gt Tag Location Default BL MR y On the Label tab there are settings for the tree text labels for the size offset from trunk center style and location When creating a tree table only the tag text is labeled Otherwise the label is drawn The Label Description Setup dialog sets which fields to include the the label the field order prefix and suffix Label Settings f xj Order field Prefix Suffix 2 z rk se None 72 Comments 0 pu a ul one T2810 When Field to Finish draws entities the program checks for codes set as tree features and applies the settings from the Tree Survey dialog When tree features are found the number of trees are reported along with a prompt for whether to draw a tree table The tree table has the tag ID code description and trunk diameter Here is an example with the f
347. ry and Font File Names A Print File Spooler and Prolog Section Names D Printer Support File Path B Search Path for ObjectDBX Applications 3 Automatic Save File Location B Drawing Template File Location B Log File Location B Temporary Drawing File Location Browse E E E E E El Set Curent E E Specify the folders in which Carlson Software should look for text fonts menus plug ins drawings to insert linetypes and hatch patterns that are not in the current folder OK Cancel Under the Files Tab you specify the directories in which the program searches for support driver menu and other files You can also specify optional settings such as which dictionary to use for checking spelling Each option under the Files Tab displays a list of the directories and files used by Carlson Survey To specify a location for a directory or file double click the directory or file from the list Choose Browse and use the Browse for Folder dialog box a standard file selection dialog box to locate the directory or file you want to use 1 Support File Search Path Specifies the directories in which Carlson Survey searches for support files In addition to the files required to run the program you can include files for fonts menus drawings to insert linetypes and hatch patterns in the support file search path 2 Device Driver File Search Path Specifies where the program looks for device drivers for t
348. s OK Cancel Apply E Under the Plotting Tab you control options related to plotting 1 Under Default Plot Settings For New Drawings you control default plotting settings for new drawings or drawings created in AutoCAD Release 14 or earlier that have never been saved in Carlson Survey 2000 format Use As Default Output Device Sets the default output device for new drawings and for drawings created in AutoCAD Release 14 or earlier that have never been saved in Carlson Survey 2000 format The list displays any plotter configuration files PC3 found in the plotter configuration search path and any system printers that are configured in the system e Use Last Successful Plot Settings Sets the plotting settings according to the settings of the last successful plot Add or Configure Plotters Displays the Autodesk Plotter Manager a Windows system window You can add or configure a plotter with the Autodesk Plotter Manager 2 Under General Plot Options you control options that relate to the general plotting environment including paper size settings system printer alert behavior and OLE objects in an AgStar drawing Keep the Layout Paper Size If Possible Uses the paper size specified on the Layout Settings tab in the Page Setup dialog box under the File menu as long as the selected output device can plot to this paper size If the selected output device cannot plot to this paper size the program displays a warni
349. s by prompting you to select entities The entities that you select will be used by GIS Inspector In the case of a large drawing this selection allows you to limit the entities for inspector to a local area instead of having to process the whole drawing Then after reading the entities you can move the cursor around the drawing to inspect the GIS data You can also use the arrow page up and page down keys to pan and zoom the display Pressing enter ends the routine Prompts Chapter 11 GIS Commands 253 Select objects select entities with attached data Arrow keys Pan PageUp Down ZoomOut In Zoom Pick left lower and right upper corner Move pointer over entity with Gis Data Enter to End move cursor over entities with data press Enter to end uge lang 106 EL 520 74 EL 1805 US ia i 5032 a u34 x EL 037 nas a EN Pulldown Menu Location GIS Keyboard Command gis inspector Prerequisite MDB GIS Prompting must be created in Define Template Database and entities must have linked GIS information GIS Inspector Settings This command sets up the fields to be displayed when using GIS Data Inspector Each GIS table code can have different display options stored in the GIS Inspector Settings command GIS Inspector Settings reads all the points and entities with GIS information currently linked in the drawing and displays a list of the linked data tables under the Available GIS Table column When a GIS Table code is hi
350. s each point is drawn Otherwise the default symbol name set in this dialog box will be used e Attribute Layout ID Controls the location of the point number elevation and description These attribute layouts are defined in drawings that are stored in the AgStar Support directory with the file name of SRVPNO plus the ID number i e SRVPNO1 DWG SRVPNO2 DWG etc If you want to change the attribute positions for a layout ID then edit the associated SRVPNO drawing C Under Angle Mode you determine how angles are entered and displayed e Bearing This option sets reporting to bearing mode for any of the Inquiry commands e Azimuth This option sets reporting to north based azimuth mode for any of the Inquiry commands e Gon This option sets reporting to gon mode for any of the Inquiry commands e Other Allows you to set a custom angle mode by using the Units Control command described later in this chapter D Under Vertical Angle Mode select an option to determine how the vertical angle is calculated Vertical Angle Prompt applies to creating points with commands such as Traverse None The vertical angle will not be used to calculate point elevations 0 Degrees Level The vertical angle is used to calculate elevation and horizontal distance e 90 Degrees Level The zenith angle is used to calculate elevation and horizontal distance Elevation Difference Use the elevation difference to calculate the elevation E Under Point Num
351. s in the GIS module such as Input Edit GIS Data GIS processing in Field to Finish starts with the GIS Table setting in the initial Draw Field To Finish dia log The GIS Table is the GIS file created by the Define GIS Features command which defines the GIS feature names and attributes Setting the GIS Table is optional but useful The GIS Table is used as the reference in the Set functions for selecting a GIS feature name to assign to Field to Finish codes Additionally when processing the Field to Finish codes any associated attributes from the GIS Table will be attached to the entities Also attributes generated from Field to Finish are added to the GIS Table So using the GIS Table links the GIS module commands with Field to Finish Each Field to Finish code has settings to assign GIS feature names In the Edit Field Code Definition dia log the GIS Setup button brings up a dialog for setting the GIS feature names and attribute options for the current code Since Field to Finish codes are capable of drawing both points and linework and GIS can have different features for points and linework there are separate settings for the GIS feature names for points and linework For example a Field to Finish code UP for utility pole could be setup to draw both points with symbols at the poles and polylines between these points Then you could have different GIS feature names for the pole points and linework with separate GIS attributes for each For Attri
352. s necessary to configuring a base will be performed You will be prompted for a Base Position and a Radio ID Upon completion the unit status should read BASE If it does not or if an error occurs during base configuration try again or consult the Base Rover configuration troubleshooting section below Configure Rover Submenu Before clicking Configure Rover first choose the type of corrections you want to use When you click Config ure Rover all steps necessary to configuring a base will be performed Upon completion the unit status should read ROVER If it does not or if an error occurs during rover configuration try again or consult the Base Rover configuration troubleshooting section below Switching the device you re plugged in to Whenever you switch the device you re plugged into be sure to either close the GPS Setup window or click Retrieve Settings from the top level GPS setup menu Troubleshooting Invalid Navigations If the Navigation Status menu reports an invalid navigation you re unit has not yet been able to calculate it s position The unit may need more time if less than 4 satellites are visible or an error is reported If you can t get a valid solution for a few minutes try raising the PDOP mask or lowering the Satellite elevation mask Troubleshooting Base Rover Configuration If you ve configured a base to output corrections and you re rover does not appear to be receiving the corrections try each of the
353. s on which you base your new drawings Chapter 6 Settings Commands 89 e Segments in a Polyline Curve Sets the number of line segments to be generated for each polyline curve The higher the number the greater the performance impact Set this option to a low value such as 4 to optimize performance for drawing Values range from 32767 to 32767 The default setting is 8 This setting is saved in the drawing 4 Under Display Performance you control display settings that affect Carlson Survey performance e Apply Solid Fill Controls whether solid fills in objects are displayed Objects with solid fill include multilines traces solids all hatches including solid fill and wide polylines You must regenerate the drawing by using REGEN for this setting to take effect This setting is saved in the drawing Clear this option to optimize performance Show Text Boundary Frame Only Displays the frames for text objects instead of displaying the text objects After you select or clear this option you must use REGEN to update the display This setting is saved in the drawing Select this option to optimize performance 5 Under Crosshair Size you control the size of the crosshairs The valid range is from 1 to 100 percent of the total screen At 100 percent the ends of the crosshairs are never visible When the size is decreased to 99 percent or below the crosshairs have a finite size and the ends of the crosshairs are visible at the edge of th
354. s option sets the layer for the table text Table Text Style This option sets the text style for table text Table Text Size This option sets the text size for table text Curve Label Prefix This option sets the label prefix for curves Prompt for Label Location This option prompts you for label position B Under Line Table Distance you can choose between slope or horizontal distance C Under Curve Options you can determine sequence of the curve table D Under Label Angles in you determine if angles are labeled in azimuths bearings or gons E Under Automatic Table Update you determine if the table is automatically updated when lines or curves are modified F Under Label Alignment you set the label as horizontal or parallel Menu Location Settings Prerequisites None Keyboard Command CONFIG SCAD Chapter 6 Settings Commands 108 Survey Commands 7 Configure Survey This command sets the equipment type communication parameters and other AgStar options Make sure the Equip ment Type box shows the correct GPS or Total Station equipment that you ll be using The down triangle button to the right of this box brings up a list of the equipment types to choose from The eight buttons in Configure bring up the dialog boxes which are used to change AgStar s default settings Explanations for each are shown below General Settings If you are using a total station Rod Height is the distance from the prism to the groun
355. s option will zoom center on new points Chapter 6 Settings Commands 101 Ignore Zero Elevs This option causes entities with zero elevations to be excluded from calculations etc e Use South Azimuth This option allows you to use a south azimuth for calculations Use Dview Twist Angle This option keeps text horizontal to a twist screen view e Set PDSIZE to Symbol Size When checked the system variable PDSIZE will be set to the same size as the symbol size that you set in Drawing Setup PDSIZE controls the display size of AutoCAD point entities Normally AutoCAD point entities are displayed as a dot and the size does not apply You may modify the point display type by changing the system variable PDMODE For example if you set PDMODE to 64 point entities are displayed as a square regardless of the Carlson Survey symbol type used e Point Layer You can assign a layer name for points B Under Support Paths you must determine paths for file allocation and retrieval e Data Path You determine where data files crd grd etc are stored LSP Path You determine where command files dcl arx etc are stored Warning Changing this path can render AgStar non functional e Program Path You determine where x exe files are located Warning Changing this path can render Carlson Survey non functional e Support Path You determine where auxiliary dwg files point symbols linetypes etc are stored MS Excel Path You de
356. s selected the software will read once from the GPS receiver and then fix to that position If Enter Lat Lon is selected a dialog box will open and a Latitude and Longitude must be input manually If Enter State Plane Coord is selected a dialog box will open allowing the input of a set of Northing Easting coordinates by hand Read from File will open a File gt Open dialog and ask for a file name of a reference file REF to open for use in corrections Chapter 7 Survey Commands 136 Regardless of which option is selected after the position is determined this position will be displayed and dialog boxes will open to enter a station id used by the base to identify iteself to the rover s and the measured base antenna height Once these values are entered base setup is complete and the Exit and Save button can be selected to exit the GPS Setup menu At this point whenever looking at a menu that displays the connection status REFERENCE will be displayed instead of Float Fixed or Autonomous Align GPS To Local Coordinates AgStar reads a latitude longitude and height position from the GPS rover receiver and converts these values to State Plane or UTM coordinates for the current zone as set in Configure Survey Using local coordinates and their corresponding GPS position Align Local Coordinates applies a transformation to convert the state plane or UTM coordinate to the local AgStar can operate in three different modes depending on th
357. s you to edit text and attribute labels 1 Select Text to Edit select the text You can modify text in provided text field Menu Location Edit Text gt Prerequisite Text Keyboard Command EDITXT Text Style This command allows the user to change the current text style to one of the available text styles The font style can be given any name by the user following which the user is prompted to select the specific font file to be used and the text orientation inclination height width etc If the option is entered the current text style and its details are listed Pull Down Menu Location Edit Prerequisite None Text EnlargeReduce This command allows you to scale text entities up or down in size The command prompts for a scale multiplier and a selection set of text objects If you want to enlarge the text enter a value greater than one If you want to reduce the text enter a decimal fraction such as 5 which would reduce the text size by 50 Use this command if you set up your drawing for one plotting scale and then decide to change to a new plotting scale The Change Text Size command can alternatively be used to set the text size to a specific value Prompts 1 Scaling Multiplier enter value Select Text for Scaling 2 Select objects select the text Menu Location Edit Text gt Prerequisite Text Keyboard Command TXTENL Join Nearest This command joins lines or polylines together and allows you to join lines t
358. s you to select an existing folder or create a new folder See the Set Data Directory command for more information The coordinate CRD File is the coordinate file for storing the point data There is an option to create a new or existing coordinate CRD file The new option will erase any point data that is found in the specified CRD file The existing option will retain any point data in the specified coordinate CRD file If the specified coordinate CRD file does not exist the wizard will create a new file The next wizard step depends on the Import Points option The Data Collector option will start the data collection routines to download data from a collector The Text ASCII option will import point data from a text ASCII file See the Data Collection and Import Text ASCII File commands for more information on running these routines If the None option is set then the Startup Wizard is finished Startup Wizard Data Files Ea Data Path Set C Program files Carlson software 2002 D ata CRD File Set C les Carlson software 2002 D ata Example_1 crd r Coordinate File New Existing m Import Points From Data Collector e Text A amp SCIl File C Current CRD File C None E Exit Help Once point data has been imported from the data collector or text ASCII file the wizard guides you through drawing the points There are options to run Draw Locate Points Field To Finish or None If None is select
359. sed as a backup or reference to coordinate data as it was originally stored GPS RMS in Point Notes When storing a point this option will store the horizontal and vertical RMS values in the note field for the point This offers a good check on the quality of the shot Point Settings x m Store Options m Drawing Options J Beep for Store Point Symbol SPT8 M User Entered Point Notes f Select Symbol I Coordinates in Point Notes V Label Elevations IV Label Descriptions I GPS RMS in Point Notes lM Locate on Real Z Axis Layer for Points PNTS GPS DOPs in Point Notes m Point Averaging I Rod Heightin Point Notes Number of Readings DirectReverse Horz Angle Tolerance Seconds 20 0 J Project Scaler in Point Notes PET DirectReverse Vert Angle Tolerance Seconds I Time Date in Point Notes DirectReverse Distance Tolerance 1 000 Field to Finish Use Code Table For M Symbols NM Layers M Descriptions M Linework Split Multiple Codes J Check Descriptions With Code Table Code File C scadces data surveadd fid Select File GIS Options Cancel Help GPS DOPs in Point Notes When storing a point this option will store the DOP dilution of precision values as reported from the GPS receiver Rod Height in Point Notes When storing a point this option will store the rod height value in the note field for the point Project Scaler in Point Notes When storing a point this option
360. select the swath you want to follow Then you will be directed along the chosen swath by on screen arrows or a connected lightbar Click Exit to stop E swathing C Documents and Settings Dave C My Documents jerry4 2dwg i a lex EA Fie Edt View Draw Survey Desgn Tools Display Window Help e x Oca ao capstone TF yraaagar fj el el 3 t 4 Northing 24 633 Tolerance 10 000 Easting 872 482 A e nen Offset 50 00 lt lt lt lt LEFT lt a SIMULATION Status LOCK Is the highlighted polyline correct lt Yes gt No y 883 9863 135 3494 0 0000 SNAP GRID ORTHO POLAR OSNAP OTRACK LWT MODEL Pull Down Menu Location Tools Prerequisite None Keyboard Command swathing Distance Measure with Pen Click on any two locations in the field and the distance between them will be reported at the command line Pull Down Menu Location Tools Prerequisite None Keyboard Command dist Stakeout Design Surface This feature reports the cut fill at each point in the field over which you drive Steps 1 Select Stakeout Design Surface from the Tools menu and begin to pilot your vehicle When complete press Exit Chapter 9 Tools Commands 160 Elevation Difference C Documents and Settings Dave C My Documents jerry4 2 dwg OR Jaj x EA fe Edt View Draw Survey Design Tools Dsplay Window Hep lel xj Oca 6 gt 18M EF yeaaaRgar Monitor F3 SkyPlot F4 Menu F11 A A 4 mb Elevation Difference Rod
361. set dimensions Layer This option allows you to set the layer for the offset text Text Style This option allows you to set the text style for the offset text Text Size Scaler This option allows you to set the text scaler to determine text size Arrow Size Scaler This option allows you to set the arrow scaler to determine arrowhead size Decimal Places This option allows you to set the precision for the offset dimensions Drop Trailing Zeroes This option allows you to truncate trailing zeroes from dimensions Characters To Append This options allows you to set characters to add to reported dimensions Chapter 6 Settings Commands 106 e Offset From Line This option sets the offset distance from the line to the dimension text Text Alignment This options allows you to align text either parallel to the line or horizontally in the drawing e Position This options allows you to determine if you will pick the location of the text or if it is automatically positioned in the drawing C Under Adjoiner Text you can set text specifications for adjoiner text e Layer This option allows you to set the layer for the adjoiner text e Text Style This option allows you to set the text style for the adjoiner text Text Size Scaler This option allows you to set the text scaler to determine text size e Justification This option allows you to set the text justification D Under Dimension Line Type you can determine the line style t
362. set lineweight options such as display properties and defaults and also to set the current lineweight Lineweight Settings 21x m Lineweights gt r Units for Listing l Millimeters mm C Inches in ByBlock Default T Display Lineweight 0 00 mm 0 05 mm Default 0 25 mm 0 09 mm Adjust Display Scale 0 1 3 mm Y ete S ieee O ae ut gi Min HS __ Max 1 nm im tl tt 7 Current Lineweight ByLayer Cancel Help Drafting Tab Options 2 Eg Current drawing Drawingl dwg Files Display Open and Save Platting System User Preferences Drafting Selection m AutoSnap Settings m Tracking Settings V Marker IV Magnet IV Display polar tracking vector Y Display AutoSnap tooltip Display AutoSnap aperture box IV Display Tracking tooltip AutoSnap marker color m Magenta y r AutoSnap Marker Size Aperture Size a OK Cancel Apply E Under the Drafting Tab you specify a number of general editing options 1 Under AutoSnap Settings you control settings that relate to object snaps Using object snaps you can locate exact points and planes including endpoints midpoints centers nodes quadrants intersections insertion points and perpendicular and tangent planes e Marker Controls the display of the AutoSnap marker The marker is a geometric symbol that displays the object snap location when the crossh
363. setup menu are failing try opening the Configure Ports submenu selecting the proper Control Port and saving the new settings Make sure that you re plugged into the port you have chosen to be the control port If this does not work issue a soft reset command If this fails try a factory reset command If even this fails call Carlson Software Technical Support Chapter 7 Survey Commands 128 Nikon Total Stations Nikon A Series includes the ASLG A5 A10LG A10 and A20LG A20 Also the C 100 and D 50 have the same communication as the A Series and should be used in the SET mode Nikon 500 Setup 1 Turn on Nikon 2 Turn it Horizontally and Vertically to set it 3 Connect Nikon to AgStar NOTE 9 pin serial cable from Nikon to AgStar should be NGT type and not SOKTOP 4 In AgStar go to Configure Survey and under equipment type put Nikon 300 400 500 series 5 To make sure the baud rate matches under the Configure Survey menu click on General Settings and check the baud rate On Nikon press MENU then 3 for sett and 6 for comm The baud rate can be changed using the arrow keys 6 Exit the Configure Survey menu 7 To check if units Ft M matches for correct results in AgStar under Inq Set go to Drawing Setup and select the appropriate button On Nikon press MENU and 3 for sett again but now press 5 for unit Angle Format dd mmss Horizontal Angle 82 4359 Zenith Angle 89 4821 Slope Distance 76
364. specifying the center and the elevation and the second point specifying the radius Only the first point has the CIR code The third method uses 3 or more points that specify the perimeter of the circle in 2D with the first point specifying the elevation For this method the CIR special code is only on the first point The CIR code can be used with all of the linetypes including points only The circles are always parallel to the X Y plane For Multi Point 2ND Code Chapter 9 Tools Commands 184 When used on the first point of a multi point symbol the 2ND code indicates that the second point of the sequence i e the next point after the current one should be used as the second symbol insertion point for a multi point symbol Please refer to Symbol Pts in the Edit Field Code Definition section below For Multi Point 3RD Code When used on the first point of a multi point symbol the 3RD code indicates that the third point of the sequence should be used as the third symbol insertion point The 3RD code should be used with the 2ND code Please refer to Symbol Pts in the Edit Field Code Definition section below 3D Special Codes Below are the special codes that can be used for the easy creation of 3D surfaces The resulting 3D face entities can be viewed in the Carlson 3D viewer by entering cube on the command line Carlson Software 3D Viewer View Control Advanced Ignore Zero Elv C Color By Elevation JE S a
365. st possible configuration If you want to customize the configuration consult the reference manual A Preliminary setup steps Perform the following preliminary steps to initialize your computer for communication with your Navcom units 1 Startup the Carlson product you intend to use 2 Select Configure Survey from the Survey Menu 3 Select Navcom from the Equipment Type dropdown 4 Click the General Settings button Verify that the Serial COM Port is set to the port you intend to use to commu nicate with your Navcom unit usually COM1 5 In the COM Port Settings box click Default and verify that baud rate 19200 parity NONE char length 8 and stop bits 1 6 Click OK and then click the GPS Settings button Chapter 7 Survey Commands 123 7 Under General Settings set your HRMS and VRMS tolerance For single unit setup these numbers should be at least 10 For base rover configuration they should be around 0 01 8 Under Projection Type select the coordinate plane you wish to use For state plane make sure you choose the proper zone 9 Click Ok and then click Exit B Single unit setup no corrections Before attempting a multi unit setup it is recommended that you first try setting up your Navcom unit to output an uncorrected position The steps to do so are explained here 1 Mount your GPS Antenna on a tripod in a place where its view of the sky is not obstructed 2 If your antenna is separate from your re
366. system North to be Geodetic North or State Plane Grid North under Configure Survey gt GPS Settings If you specify a scale factor in that dialog box it will be applied to all points recorded One point alignment is useful for data collection on a new site In this case you can set up the GPS base receiver anywhere convenient Then position the rover over a point preferably one you can find again and add this point as your one alignment point by reading the GPS point and entering a local coordinate like 5000 5000 100 Now the local coordinate system is set around this first point at 5000 5000 100 This method is commonly used for small topo or stockpile RTK GPS surveys When collecting or staking data at distances greater than 2 miles from the base both the horizontal and vertical errors will begin to increase gradually Therefore you should use a multiple point alignment for large projects Alignment Method 3 Chapter 7 Survey Commands 139 This method is useful if you are arriving on a job which has already been surveyed It assures that your survey is in the same coordinate system as the original survey Using control points this method transforms the GPS coordinates to an existing local coordinate system This method takes pairs of GPS coordinates and the corresponding local coordinates to define the translation rotation and scale of the alignment In Configure Survey gt GPS Settings there is a choice for the transformation as Pl
367. t This EULA constitutes the entire agreement between the parties and supersedes any prior agreements This EULA may only be changed by mutual written consent 15 End User Agreement Acknowledgment The End User hereby accepts all the terms and conditions of this Agreement without exception deletion alteration End User acknowledges they are authorized to enter this agreement on behalf of any organization for which the license is sought Any unauthorized use of LICENSOR products will be considered a breach of this Agreement subject to liquidated damages and otherwise unlawful and willful infringement of LICENSOR s trade secrets and or proprietary products 16 Payment and Refund Policy The use of the SOFTWARE herein is deemed a commercial use and under the terms of this license agreement End User shall not be entitled to any refund of purchase price End User agrees to pay all user fees promptly LICENSOR is authorized by End User to suspend any further access to SOFTWARE in the event fees are not fully paid End user entity shall promptly pay any and all access and use charges incurred regardless of the end user End user is responsible for protecting any pass word and user identity supplied to End User 17 Loss Theft Misuse End user shall promptly report to LICENSOR the theft or other loss of any pass word and or user identity required to access SOFTWARE LICENSOR shall not be responsible for maintaining the integrity of End User data in the even
368. t Bearing Qdd mmss gt 245 3030 Enter an A to input an Azimuth or enter the bearing The above response defines a bearing of South 45 degrees 30 minutes and 30 seconds East The program then changes the database to the new bearing If point objects are selected the program warns This command DOES NOT change the coordinates in the CooRDinate file Use CooRDinate File Utilities menu option F to update the file Standard Rotate Function This command allows the user to choose objects and then prompts for a base point It then prompts the user to choose whether to rotate by rotation angle default or by reference angle As the mouse is moved around the rotated position of the object keeps changing giving an idea of its final position The user can then click on a point to select the angle of rotation and thereby the final position of the object The angle of rotation can be also be entered from the keyboard The object is rotated through that angle relative to its current inclination to the coordinate axes Whether the rotation is clockwise or counter clockwise can be set using the Units Control command under the Inq Set pulldown menu Alternatively the rotation can be achieved by reference angle This is done by first choosing the Reference option after entering the base point The user then has to select the reference angle whose orientation needs to be changed The user can either enter this at the keyboard or choose a line o
369. t Style Text Size Text Layer Text Color Value Justification Romance 0 100 AREATXT ByLayer FOOBAR Centered v Select Style Select Color Chapter 9 Tools Commands 224 Text Style This allows you to set a text style for the area labels You can enter the name manually or use the Select Style button to call up a dialog which presents a list of known text styles Text Size This value is multiplied by the horizontal scale to obtain the actual text size Text Layer This allows you to assign a layer for the area text You can enter the name manually or use the Select Layer button to call up a dialog which presents a list of known layers Text Color This allows you to to assign a color for the area text Use the Select Color button to call up the standard color picker dialog To use the default for the Text Layer select ByLayer Prefix and Suffix Although most area labeling uses the suffix as in 1 25 Acres or 3 515 Hectares But for those who prefer a prefix as in Ac 1 25 this routine can create that area labeling style automatically see below for example of results of using a prefix with square feet and acres Justification Use this to control whether the label field is left centered or right justified This allows you to display or in the Prefix or Suffix of the area labels or choose None Precision Choose precision level for the currently selected field Below the Available and Used Fields lists t
370. t and meters The Use Report Formatter chooses between the Chapter 9 Tools Commands 227 standard report or customizing the report You can also set the decimal precisions for the report and whether to report stations for the distances along the perimeter Inverse With Area Options Different Radius Tolerance 0 01000000 Coordinate Precision Distance Precision Angle Precision Label Both Feet and Meters Report Stations T Use Report Formatter OK Cancel The area can be labeled in the drawing using the settings from the Area Defaults command If you don t want to label the area press Enter at the pick label point prompt This command creates a polyline of the figure which can be erased or kept in the drawing Prompts Options lt Pick Starting point or point number gt pick a point Pick point or point numbers R RadiusPt U Undo Enter to end pick a point Pick point or point numbers R RadiusPt U Undo Enter to end R for radius Radius point number or pick point pick a point Curve direction Left lt Right gt press Enter Pick End of Arc or point number U Undo Enter to end pick a point Pick point or point numbers R RadiusPt U Undo Enter to end pick a point Point number R RadiusPt U Undo Enter to end pick a point Point number R RadiusPt U Undo Enter to end pick a point Point number R RadiusPt U Undo Enter to end press Enter SQ FEET 27247 4 SQ YARDS 3027 5 SQ MILES 0 0 ACRES 0 63 PERIMETER 668
371. t number range Selection Method Area Allows you to select a closed polyline to list all of the points inside of that polyline Selection Method Selection Set Allows you to specify the points to list by selecting them from the drawing Range of Points If you are using the Range method specify the range of points to list here To quickly specify all points click the All button Description Match Can be used to filter the point list For example entering EP for the Description Match would only list those points with a description of EP An asterisk is the default setting it matches any character sequence meaning no filtering occurs Report Coordinate Range When checked the point list will include the minimum and maximum northing easting and elevation List Point Notes When checked any additional point notes assigned to the points will be included in the point list Point notes can be entered using the Input Edit Point command found in Coordinate File Utilities Use Report Formatter When checked you may customize the fields and layout of the point report using the Report Formatter The Report Formatter can also be used to export the point report to Excel or Access Double Space Between Points When checked the report will be double spaced The point list report is displayed in the Standard Report Viewer which can print draw and save the report file This report viewer cannot be used to edit the coordinate file Instead use
372. t object snap Prompts 1 Current text style MONO Text height 4 00 2 Specify start point of text or Justify Style S The style option lets you change the textstyle on the fly 3 Enter style name or lt MONO gt STANDARD 4 Current text style STANDARD Text height 4 00 5 Specify start point of text or Justify Style J The justify option lets you specify the justification for the text 6 Enter an option Align Fit Center Middle Right TL TC TR ML MC MR BL BC BR BC In this case BC Bottom Center 7 Specify bottom center point of text pick point or enter coordinates 8 Specify height lt 4 00 gt press enter to select default or enter text height Chapter 5 Draw Commands 65 9 Specify rotation angle of text lt 0d0 0 gt press enter to select default or enter angle 10Enter text Found Iron Pin 11Enter text press enter to end Menu Location Draw Prerequisite None Keyboard Command DTEXT TEXT Insert Symbols This command inserts symbols from the symbol library into the drawing The symbol library may be edited using the Edit Symbol Library command The locations for the symbols can be specified by picking points specifying point numbers in the current coordinate CRD file or by entering the northing and easting If you specify a point number and that point number already has a symbol on it you will be prompted whether or not to replace the existing symbol Selecting the Enter coords option allows you to inser
373. t snap modes e Select All This option turns on all object snap modes Menu Location Settings Prerequisite None Keyboard Command OSNAP Set Environment Variables Function The AutoCAD engine stores the values for its operating environment and some of its commands in system variables Each system variable has an associated type integer real point switch or text string This command allows you to list or change the values of system variables Variable Editor Ea ACADLSPASDOC Type Stored Control Integer Not Stored OK C Real C In Drawing Cancel C String In Registry Load 2d Paint A ccess Save C 3d Point M7 J Read Only Report p Range Read Write Viable From io To Br Restore MENA C onfi J7 Status Echo m Description Blip Markers O Off 1 0n 1 Dialog Fields e List Box Contains a list of the variables associated with the currently running version of AutoCAD There are more items than will display on the list box use the scroll bar to move up and down through the list Picking on an item in the list box makes it the current item causing the information about the item to be displayed and can be affected by most of the edit commands explained below e Edit Field When an item on the list box is picked its current setting is displayed in the edit field If you intend to make changes in an item use standard editing proc
374. t that end user s data base is accessed and or altered by an unauthorized end user due to the failure of licensed End User to protect its password or user identity End User shall be responsible for any costs incurred by LICENSOR due to the negligence or reckless disregard of End User s failure to protect its password or user identity 18 Civil Criminal Investigation End user shall fully cooperate with LICENSOR and or any person autho rized by LICENSOR including local state or federal law enforcement officials to investigate any alleged theft misuse or unauthorized use of SOFTWARE or data related thereto 19 U S Government Restricted Rights The SOFTWARE PRODUCT and documentation are provided with RESTRICTED RIGHTS Use duplication or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph b 1 ii and c of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS 252 227 7013 or subparagraphs c 1 and 2 of the Commercial Computer Software Restricted Rights at 48 CFR 52 227 19 as applicable 20 Governing Law This EULA shall be governed and construed in accordance with the laws of the Com monwealth of Kentucky USA Technical Support Discussion Groups Chapter 1 Product Overview 17 Carlson Software operates user discussion groups The NNTP address is news carlsonsw com Visit our website for complete details on how to connect to these discussion groups Electronic Mail The
375. t the symbol by entering a northing and easting Using the Select entities option symbols can also be placed on arcs points lines or polylines Under the Options command you can turn prompting for rotation on or off With rotation off the symbol will be inserted horizontal to the current twist screen Choose a symbol from the Select Symbol dialog by clicking on it You may select a different category by choosing the Symbol Category drop down list Within each category use the scroll bar to view all of the symbols Select Symbol xi Symbol Category Points F Prompts 1 Options Select entities Enter coords lt Point numbers or pick point gt pick point 2 Options Select entities Enter coords lt Point numbers or pick point gt 5 10 3 Options Select entities Enter coords lt Point numbers or pick point gt Press Enter Menu Location Draw Prerequisite None Keyboard Command PTSYM Chapter 5 Draw Commands 66 Shrink Wrap Entities This command creates a closed polyline which encloses a given set of entities The resulting polyline is created in the current layer The program works on either point entities or polylines For points the program creates a closed polyline through the points around the perimeter of the area defined by the points For polylines the shrink wrap polyline follows the outside border of the selected polylines The polylines that are processed have to be connected to be shrink wrapped The snap tolera
376. t to leave any unsurveyed patches especially in areas where the terrain s natural slope changes 3 If you need to stop in the middle press Stop If you need to add a benchmark press Stop then press Add Benchmark and follow the instructions in the Survey Benchmark section of this manual When complete click Exit Pull Down Menu Location Survey Prerequisite A closed perimeter and fixed RTK Keyboard Command auto_pts Survey Subdivision line You may wish to divide your field into multiple sub fields in order to assign different designs to different areas There are two ways to divide up your field To draw the subdivision line with your mouse see instructions on the Draw Subdivision Line feature To draw the subdivision line with your vehicle using GPS select Survey Subdivision Line from the Survey menu When surveying a subdivision line no new points are added to the drawing so performing this function without RTK will not compromise the accuracy of the data Steps 1 If you do not have an RTK base set up uncheck the Require RTK box 2 Press start and begin to pilot your vehicle across the field Chapter 7 Survey Commands 144 _ Auto Points At Interval C oem2k oem XPAD WORK testS dwg l 5 x EA Fie Edit View Draw Survey Design Tools Display Window Help lel x Os a8 lt S eperme ve E yeagaa as Monitor F3 SkyPlot F4 Menu F11 A A 4 MN Dist 6 0 LOCK
377. t zero elevation NOS This code indicates that the point should be non surface that is that it should be ignored when contouring or creating surfaces This can also be controlled per field code by turning on the Non Surface toggle in the Edit Field Code Definition dialog box Offsets OH OV OFL OFB The codes OH and OV stand for offset horizontal and offset vertical These offset codes apply to 2D and 3D polylines A single set of offset codes can be used to offset the polyline a set amount For example 10 500 500 100 EP OH2 5 OV 5 11 525 527 101 EP 12 531 533 103 EP This would create a polyline connecting points 10 11 and 12 and an offset polyline with a 2 5 horizontal and 0 5 vertical offset The direction of the horizontal offset is determined by the direction of the polyline A positive horizontal offset goes right from the polyline direction and a negative goes left The horizontal and vertical offset amounts apply starting at the point with the offset codes until a new offset code or the end of the polyline Only one horizontal and vertical offset can be applied to 2D polylines For 3D polylines multiple offset codes can be used to make a variable offset For example 10 500 500 100 EP OH2 5 OV 5 11 525 527 101 EP OH5 5 OV 75 12 531 533 103 EP OH7 5 Chapter 9 Tools Commands 182 This would offset the first point horizontal 2 5 and vertical 0 5 the second point horizontal 5 5 and vertical
378. tar functions as normal Note however that the elevations reported by the CSI GBX Pro are MSL Mean Sea Level Geodimeter Geodimeter 600 For Remote Mode Note Firmware version 696 03 xx or higher is required on the instrument SET UP 1 Connect the instrument to the battery pack There is no need to connect the keyboard to the battery if it is going to be turned off or attached to the unit 2 Connect the prism to the top port of GeoRadio 3 Connect the bottom port of the GeoRadio to AgStar Then turn on the radio 4 Turn on the Geodimeter The Geodimeter starts with the screen for leveling the instrument When the instrument is leveled press ENT key to continue to the next step Now the instrument starts compensator calibration You can Chapter 7 Survey Commands 118 wait for calibration to finish or turn it off To turn calibration off press on F 22 enter 0 for comp This needs to be done when the instrument is turned on and before ENT is pressed 5 Next Geodimeter will ask for different values for pressure offset etc They can either be left like they are by pressing on ENT or they can be changed 6 Press F 79 it is the End of Transfer character which should be set to 4 7 To set radio and station channels press MNU and enter 1 for Set After set press 5 which will give the user opportunity to change channel station and remote address NOTE The channel station and remote address on the Geodim
379. tarts a new drawing based on the Imperial measurement system The drawing is based on the surv dwt template and the default drawing boundary the drawing limits is 12 x 9 inches e Metric This option starts a new drawing based on the metric measurement system The drawing is based on the surviso dwt template and the default drawing boundary the drawing limits is 429 x 297 millimeters 2 Under Use a Template you can start a new drawing based on a customized template This command creates a new drawing using the settings defined in a template drawing you select Template drawings store all the settings for a drawing and may also include predefined layers dimension styles and views Template drawings are distinguished from other drawing files by the dwt file extension They are normally kept in the template directory Several template drawings are included with AgStar You can make additional template drawings by changing the extensions of drawing file names to dwt e Select a Template This option lists all template files that currently exist in the drawing template file location which is specified in the Options dialog box Choose a file to use as a starting point for your new drawing A preview image of the selected file is displayed to the right e Browse This option displays the Select a Template File dialog box a standard file selection dialog box where you can access template files in other directions Menu Location File Prerequ
380. ted at the selected intersection The command then erases the temporary circle and line NOTE Except where noted most of the Carlson routines leave the selection of the appropriate osnap mode up to the user If a command turns on an osnap the prompt line of a command will notate which osnap is on by enclosing it in brackets For example if the MIDpoint Osnap is on mid on will appear in the point prompt line Each of the predefined point symbols have a POINT entity at the center of the symbol therefore the NODE ObjectSNAP mode should be used when snapping lines or other drawing entities to point symbols Chapter 9 Tools Commands 231 Prompts Enter to use preview point or select known Bearing base point Pick point or Point number pick point Define bearing by Line Points Bearing lt P gt L Select Line that defines Bearing select line Known distance base point Pick point or Point number pick point Enter Pick Distance 40 41 int on Pick Intersection point Enter to cancel pick point Enter Point Number lt 55 gt Enter This prompt appears only if Automatic Point Numbering is set to No Enter Point Symbol Number lt 4 gt Enter This prompt appears only if point symbol prompting is set to Yes Symbol number four is located at the computed coordinate and labeled point number 55 Pull Down Menu Location Tools Locate at Intersect gt Prerequisite Run Drawing Setup to set defaults DistanceDistance I
381. termine the path for the exe file for MS Excel is located C Under Object Linking you can set reactors to the drawing entities e Link Points with CRD File This option attaches a reactor to the point entities so that any change to the entities such as MOVE or ROTATE will update the coordinates in the coordinate file e Link Linework with Points This option attaches reactors to line and polyline entities that are drawn by point number so that moving the points automatically moves the linework Link Labels with Linework This option applies to bearing distance annotation This link updates the annotation when the linework is modified e Group Point Entities This option joins the three entities of a point attribute block symbol node For each point selecting any one of these entities selects all three entities for the point D Under CRD File Pt Format you can set the point number format for coordinate files as either numeric only or alphanumeric e Numeric Only This options allows for numeric point numbers only e Alphanumeric This option allows point numbers to contain characters for example 5A 5B and 5C E Under Database Format you choose between Microsoft Access 97 or 2000 format This only applies to new MDB files created by Carlson Survey F Under Report Print Specifications you determine formatting for the Standard Report Viewer e Use Degree Symbol in Reports This option lets you choose between using the degree
382. text the Software Product may include a security mechanism that can detect the installation or use of illegal copies of the Software Product and collect and transmit data about those illegal copies Data collected will not include any customer data created with the Software By using the Software Product you consent to such detection and collection of data as well as its transmission and use if an illegal copy is detected Licensor also reserves the right to use a hardware lock device license administration software and or a license authorization key to control access to the Software You may not take any steps to avoid or defeat the purpose of any such measures Use of any Software without any required lock device or authorization key provided by Licensor is Chapter 1 Product Overview 15 prohibited 6 Audit Rights End User agrees that LICENSOR has the right to require an audit electronic or otherwise of the LICENSOR Materials and the Installation thereof and access thereto As part of any such audit LICENSOR or its authorized representative will have the right on fifteen 15 days prior notice to End User to inspect End User s records systems and facilities including machine IDs serial numbers and related information to verify that the use of any and all LICENSOR Materials is in conformance with this Agreement End User will provide full cooperation to enable any such audit If LICENSOR determines that End User s use is not in conf
383. that is currently being used of Satellites Used shows the number of satellites the unit is able to use in its solution All DOP values are also shown here GDOP PDOP HDOP VDOP and TDOP Click Refresh to load the latest values from the device Monitor Incoming Corrections Submenu Note To access this menu the local unit must be configured as a ROVER This menu displays the number of seconds since the arrival of each RTK correction type At the top the correction type currently being used is displayed In NCT Correction Mode the relevant messages are 5B correction which should be arriving every second and 5C base position which should be arriving every 16 seconds In CMR Correction Mode the relevant messages are cmr0 correction which should be arriving every second and cmr1 base position which should be arriving every 30 seconds In RTCM RTK Correction Mode the relevant messages are RTCM message 22 and either messages 18 and 19 or messages 20 and 21 depending on your base s RTCM setup Messages 18 21 should be arriving every second Message 22 should be arriving every 6 seconds In RTCM DGPS Correction Mode the age of correction messages 1 and 9 cannot be monitored here Click Refresh to load the latest values from the device Configure Base Submenu Chapter 7 Survey Commands 127 Before clicking Configure Base first choose the type of corrections you want to use When you click Configure Base all step
384. that relate to object selection methods 1 Under Selection Modes you determine the methods of selecting objects e Noun Verb Selection Allows you to select an object before starting a command The command affects the previously selected object or objects You can also set this option by using the PICKFIRST system variable Chapter 6 Settings Commands 98 e You can use many editing and inquiry commands with noun verb selection including ALIGN DVIEW PROPERTIES ARRAY ERASE ROTATE BLOCK EXPLODE SCALE CHANGE LIST STRETCH CHPROP MIRROR WBLOCK COPY and MOVE e Use Shift to Add to Selection Adds or removes an object to the selection set when you press SHIFT and select an object To clear a selection set quickly draw a selection window in a blank area of the drawing You can also set this option by using the PICKADD system variable e Press and Drag Draws a selection window by selecting a point and dragging the pointing device to a second point If this option is not selected you can draw a selection window by selecting two separate points with the pointing device You can also set this option by using the PICKDRAG system variable e Implied Windowing Initiates the drawing of a selection window when you select a point outside an object Drawing the selection window from left to right selects objects inside the window s boundaries Drawing from right to left selects objects within and crossing the window s boundaries You can also
385. the Edit Points command in the Points menu List Points X Selection method Range C Area C Selection Set Range Settings Highest Point Number gt 2079 Range of Points ALL All Report Coordinate Range FF List Point Notes Use Report Formatter F Double Space Between Points Number of Decimal Places for Northing Easting 0 000 v Elevation 0 000 y Cancel Help Pull Down Menu Location Points Prerequisite points in a coordinate file or on the screen Keyboard Command listpt Edit Points This command edits point data in the current coordinate file The current coordinate file can be set with the Set Coordinate File command Edit Points shows all the points in the coordinate file New points can be added and points can be deleted by using the Insert and Delete keys Chapter 9 Tools Commands 208 This tool also lets you edit notes associated with each point While the standard point description is limited to 32 characters the drawing notes are not When you click on a given point you can add numerous lines of notes about that point in the bottom of the dialog Keep in mind that these notes are stored in a separate file with the extension not having the same name as the CRD and residing in the same folder Pull Down Menu Location Points Keyboard Command EDITPT Prerequisite None Erase Points This command erases AgStar points inserts from the drawing The p
386. the associ ated image objects from the drawing and from the display e Reload This option loads the most recent version of an image or reloads an image that was previously unloaded Reloading does not control whether the image is displayed but it ensures display of the most current image e Unload This option unloads image data from working memory without erasing the image objects from the drawing It is recommended that you unload images no longer needed for editing to improve performance An unloaded image cannot be displayed or plotted You can selectively load and unload individual images from a working list of images associated with the drawing file e Details This option opens the Image File Details dialog box which displays the image name saved path active path file creation date and time file size and type color system color depth width and height in pixels resolution default size in units and a preview image Image Found At This field shows the path of the selected image If you select multiple images this field remains blank The path shown is the actual path where the image resides e Browse This option opens the Select Image File dialog box a standard file selection dialog box The path you select appears under Image Found At e Save Path This option stores the new path information Press ESC while editing the path to restore the old path If the program cannot find the referenced image in the new path the image
387. the bottom of the dialog box the user can specify the geometry settings for each feature whether it is a line or point feature what layer it is to be drawn on what block to use to represent it what text style to use and what linetype to use Pulldown Menu Location GIS Keyboard Command def template Prerequisite None Input Edit GIS Data This routine creates reviews and appends GIS data linked to entities stored in the drawing The GIS Smart Prompting dialog has a spreadsheet format for editing the data fields The GIS table to process is selected in the pull down list in the upper right of the dialog The GIS tables that are available depend on the tables that are defined in the current template database Use the GIS Database Settings and Define Template Database commands to setup the tables Once you select a table to process the fields for that table are displayed in a spreadsheet format If a field is related to a field in another table in the database a character is shown next to the field name Picking the will open another dialog box with the related data in the other table The data in this related table is not editable only the data in the initial linked table The bottom portion of the dialog has features for attaching images to the entity Existing image files BMP JPG or GIF can be linked by choosing the New option The Update option will replace the current image with a newly selected image The Delete option will rem
388. the edges of the image Specify first corner point specify a point Specify opposite corner point specify a point Chapter 3 Edit Commands 50 Menu Location Edit Image gt Prerequisite None Keyboard Command IMAGECLIP Image Frame This command controls whether Carlson Survey displays the image frame or hides it from view Because you select an image by clicking its frame setting the image frame to off prevents you from selecting an image Prompts 1 Enter image frame setting ON OFF lt current gt enter an option or Press Enter e On Displays image frames so you can select images e Off Hides image frames so you cannot select images Menu Location Edit Image gt Prerequisite None Keyboard Command IMAGEFRAME Image Adjust This command controls the display of the brightness contrast and fade values of images 2 Image Adjust 24 x m Brightness m115041 Dark DO E eid A N Light r Contrast Low y High Min Max Reset Fade The Image Adjust dialog box controls how the image is displayed by adjusting the brightness contrast and fade settings of the selected image Adjusting these values changes the display of the image but does not change the image file itself e Brightness Controls the brightness and indirectly the contrast of the image Values range from 0 through 100 The greater the value the brighter the image and the more pixels that become white when you in
389. the old boundary even when clipping is turned off and the clipping boundary is not visible e Delete Removes a predefined clipping boundary and redisplays the full original image e New Boundary Specifies a new clipping boundary The boundary can be rectangular or polygonal and consists only of straight line segments When defining a clipping boundary specify vertices within the image boundary Self intersecting vertices are valid Rectangular is the default option If you use the pointing device to specify a point at the Enter Clipping Type prompt the program interprets the point as the first corner of a rectangle 3 Enter clipping type Polygonal Rectangular lt Rectangular gt enter P or Press Enter e Polygonal Uses specified points to define a polygonal boundary Specify first point Specify a point Specify next point or Undo specify a point or enter u Specify next point or Undo specify a point or enter u Specify next point or Close Undo specify a point or enter c or u You must specify at least three points to define a polygon If the image already has a clipping boundary defined AgStar displays the following prompt Delete old boundary No Yes lt Yes gt enter N or Press Enter If you choose Yes the program redraws the entire image and the command continues if you choose No the com mand ends e Rectangular Specifies a rectangular boundary by its opposite corners AgStar always draws the rectangle parallel to
390. the raw file then you don t need the NAME record Menus File The File menu of the Raw Editor dialog box contains commands for printing importing exporting and saving files e Print This command displays the raw file data using the standard report viewer You can print the report draw it in the drawing or save it to a file e Import These routines convert raw data from other formats into the current Carlson Survey RWS format The converted raw data will be added to the end of any existing data in the editor In many cases the raw data file to import can be downloaded directly from the data collector or instrument using the Data Collectors command The following supported formats along with their standard file extension are listed here e Sokkia Leitz RAW Several data collectors generate this format including the SDR series collectors e Wild Leica GSI or RAW This reads the Leica raw file in Wildsoft Liscad or 10 20 30 40 format There is an option to specify for direct reverse shot order if any e SMI RAW e Geodimeter OBS or RAW e Nikon RAW e MDL Laser CDS Fieldbook FBK From Softdesk or Land Development Desktop e SurvCOGO RAW or TXT Chapter 9 Tools Commands 235 e PC Cogo BAT e Survis RAW e C amp G RAW e Caice DMP e Carlson RW5 e Maptech FLD Sokkia SDR SDR or RAW TDS RW5 e 3TAS TXT Export These routines convert the AgStar ra
391. ties to Polylines 46 Equipment 2 B TO T2 1234025113058 Equipment Commands 118 Erase Point Attributes 219 Erase Points 209 Exit 34 86 LOO 121 029 e Explode Export Google Earth File uan UI j icy ON W NI N 1 Export TextASCII File 210 Extend Extend by Distance Extend To Edge 39 Extrapolate 167 Factor Field to Finish File Commands Fillet Find Bad Angle 241 Follow Elevation 157 Freeze Layer Geodimeter GIS Commands 249 GIS Database Settings 250 252 GIS File GIS Inspector 253 GIS Inspector Settings 253 254 GIS Query Report Grid 2 116 238 240 244 Grid File Utilities Header 212 Help Commands 261 Image Adjust 51 Image Clip 50 Image Frame Import Export Topcon TIN File Import Export Trimble TTM File Import Google Earth File 28 Import LandXML File Import SHP File 257 258 Import TextASCII File 209 Impulse Laser 120 Info Input Edit GIS Data 202 252 Input Edit Point 208 Inquiry 104 InRoads 187 Insert 64 65 67 70 80 83 177 195 208 233 236 Insert Symbols 66 Installing Agstar 4 Interior Point Inverse Inverse with Area 227 228 Isolate Layer Join 45 184 Join Nearest 44H46 Export SHP File 259 EEEE a a PS Index 264 Label Angle 108 Label Area Names 154 Label Elevations 115 Label Zeros Layer 28 53 1
392. tion C Landscape a Portrait OK Cancel To print the selected region check the Print Selection toggle Other select the Print All toggle You can also choose between Portrait and Landscape printing orientations Click Ok to print Summarize You may increase the grid cell size by going to Summarize under the View menu and choosing a desired scale factor Cutsheet grid sizes must be a multiple of the grid size chosen during the Make Existing Ground Grid routine Cut Fill Spreadsheet jerry4 2 dwg 373600 828500 116600 792525 351300 348475 665975 238950 706050 764425 2692850 82175 1071800 2156125 Options By default only cuts and fills are displayed in the spreadsheet However the existing and design elevations of each cell can also be displayed by going to Options under the View menu Chapter 10 Display Commands 245 500 1000 1500 Cut Fill J ao a o in t T oO N A 1926475 1000 764425 82175 i ti j t3 e n N J i m 1950 1071800 373800 828500 792525 348475 238950 2692850 116600 351300 665975 706050 2156125 Font Size You may increase the font size by going to Font Size under the View menu and select the desired font size This feature is useful if you need to fit more data onto a printout Import Export You can export import the cutsheet to from Excel or any other database program through standard cut amp
393. to be logged until the receiver has acquired a few satellites The receiver has enough satellites when the center light is at the second or higher level when it is orange instead of red Software Setup 6 To configure the IS for use select Equipment Setup from the Survey pull down menu This will open a menu with several options a Radio Baud Rate This radio button sets the baud rate for COM2 the radio COM port Make sure this number and the number the PDL s are set for is the same b Station Type This sets whether the Radian IS is to be configured as a base station or a rover c Elevation Type This allows selection of Geoid MSL or Ellipsoidal measures for height altitude d RTK Dynamics This sets the dynamics mode of the receiver In general this setting should be set to Dy namic Kinematic e Message Type sets what format of corrections this receiver will send receive for RTK f Motion Dynamics Used to set the receiver s calculations appropriate to the motion of the receiver g Elevation Mask This is the satellite elevation cutoff No satellites with elevation less than this number will be used in cor rections This allows filtering out of satellites close to the horizon which provide less accurate calculations for positions h Send Command to Receiver Allows a specific user entered command to be sent to the receiver Mostly used for troubleshooting with Technical support 1 Configure Base Configures the paramete
394. to close the perimeter Then click Exit Pull Down Menu Location Survey Prerequisite A master benchmark and preferably fixed RTK Keyboard Command survey_perim Survey Interior Surface To get an accurate model of the field a larger number of points within the interior of your field must be surveyed Normally it is sufficient to have ten to twenty feet separating your survey points however if there is a lot of variation in the slope of the field you may need the points to be closer together Steps 1 To survey a point every time a specified horizontal distance is travel select Distance as the interval type and type the desired interval in the Interval x y cell Alternatively you can specify an amount of time between surveyed points by selecting the Time interval type 2 Press Start and begin piloting your vehicle back and forth across the field Chapter 7 Survey Commands 143 2 auto Points At Interval C oem2k oem XPAD WORK testS dwg aj xj EA File Edit view Draw Survey Design Tools Display Window Help la x i Monitor F3 SkyPlot FS Menu F11 A A del Stored point 170 Dist 5 2 LOCK SIMULATION Point Number 171 Rod Height 0 000 Northing 141 441 Easting 272 726 panaeee ee pes Elev 6 724 Desc n H Options F6 Interval Type y Distance C Time sec Interval xiy 10 000 Interval 2 10 000 Stop F2 Exit a mel Try no
395. to the layout or viewport Named plot style tables are files with the file extension stb You can also control Use Named Plot Styles by setting the PSTYLEPOLICY system variable to 0 If you want to change the default plot style behavior for a drawing select this option or Use Color Dependent Plot Styles before opening or creating a drawing Changing the default plot style behavior using the Options dialog box affects only new drawings or drawings created in an earlier release of an Autodesk product that have never been saved in AgStar 2000 format This setting is saved with the drawing Once a drawing is saved with Use Color Dependent Plot Styles as the default you can change the default to Use Named Plot Styles with a migration utility However once a drawing is saved with Use Named Plot Styles as the default you cannot change it to Use Color Dependent Plot Styles e Default Plot Style Table Specifies the default plot style table to attach to new drawings A plot style table is a file with a ctb or an stb extension that includes and defines plot styles If you are using color dependent plot styles this option lists all color dependent plot style tables found in the search path as well as the value of None If you are using named plot styles this option lists all named plot styles tables Chapter 6 Settings Commands 93 Default Plot Style for Layer 0 Sets the default plot style for Layer O for new drawings or drawings created with earli
396. to the point This combination allows you to calculate points that cannot be directly reached by the GPS There are two methods in the Point Store command to use the laser when this option is enabled The Point Store dialog will have a new Laser button which will bring up another dialog that allows you to take multiple shots from the laser The other method is to click on the Offset toggle in the Point Store dialog Then when you do the Read function the program will read the GPS position and then pop up a dialog for taking one offset shot Point Settings Beep for Store Point This option will make a triple beep to indicate when a point is stored in the coordinate file User Entered Point Notes Point Notes are additional descriptions that can be stored with a point A regular point consists of a point number northing easting elevation and 32 character description These points are stored in a CRD file Point Notes are a way to add an unlimited number of lines of text to a point number With Point Notes ON in the Store Point command the program will prompt for notes after collecting a point The notes are stored in a file that uses the name of the coordinate file with a NOT extension For example a coordinate file called JOB5 CRD would have a note file called JOB5 NOT Coordinates in Point Notes When storing a point this option will store the point number northing easting eleva tion and description in the point notes as well This may be u
397. ts are drawn at zero elevation For example you could turn this option off for the FH for fire hydrant code to drawn them at zero Then the GND code could have this option on to draw the ground shots at their elevations Non Surface Entities created with this flag are ignored when contouring or creating surfaces regardless of their elevation Companion Codes This option allows different codes to connect when defined as line polyline or 3d polyline For example a main line power pole code may be defined as PP while a service utility pole may be defined as UP When processing Draw Field to Finish it may be desired to connect all PP and UP codes together This could be accomplished by defining a companion for UP as PP and a companion code for PP as UP Each code needs to reference the other as a companion code Companion codes are other codes that connect linework with the current code Cancel Help Fixed Parameters This option is a coding method where you specify a sequence of parameters that follow the main code There can be up to three parameters and these parameters can be an additional description or special codes Size Rotate Azimuth Distance or Offsets The purpose for Fixed Parameters is to save keystrokes by not having to enter the special code prefix For example for a code TR for Tree along with a size 12 feet and description of Oak the special code description would be TR SZ12 OAK With Fixed Parameters of Size and Desc
398. ts can be positive or negative With 3 points makes a parallelogram base that is extruded up or down if height is negative to form a 6 sided block including top and bottom With 4 or more points makes a closed Chapter 9 Tools Commands 186 polygon for the base that is then extruded by the height The points can be laid out in clockwise or counterclockwise order around the perimeter The perimeter or base does not have to be a convex polygon WALL3D Makes a set of 3D faces above the polyline using a height value entered after the code e g WALL3D2 3 with height 2 3 The height can be negative if the points on the top of the wall have been shot If no parameter exists then the height is determined by the distance from the current point to the next point This is a signed distance so the surveyor can shoot either the top of the wall or the bottom of the wall Both sides of the wall will have triangles and so both sides will always be visible in the Carlson 3D viewer cube Example 5 6 high wall shot along the bottom 2000 1000 000 1060 000 100 000 WALL1 WALL3D6 0 wall 6 2001 1100 000 1060 000 100 000 WALL1 2002 1100 000 1160 000 100 000 WALL1 Example 6 6 high wall height specified by 1st to 2nd point shot along the top 2020 1100 000 1160 000 100 000 WALL2 WALL3D height by 2nd pt 2021 1100 000 1160 000 106 000 WALL2 2022 1000 000 1160 000 106 000 WALL2 Load Default This button sets the special codes to Carlson
399. ttings dialog box sets object snap modes Chapter 6 Settings Commands 81 Drafting Settings 20x Snap and Grid Polar Tracking Object Snap IV Object Snap On F3 J Object Snap Tracking On F11 m Object Snap modes O M Endpoint 4 7 Insertion Select All A D Midpoint b M Perpendicular Clear All O T Center O TP Tangent w T Node X J Nearest lt gt T Quadrant 2 Apparent intersection X J Intersection 4 T Parallel 7 Extension command 4 tracking vector appears when you move the cursor as To track from an Osnap point pause over the point while in a Y To stop tracking pause over the point again Options Cancel Help 1 Under Object Snap you set object snaps e Object Snap On This option turns running object snaps on and off The object snaps selected under Object Snap Modes are active while object snap is on This setting is also controlled by the OSMODE system variable e Object Snap Tracking On This option turns object snap tracking on and off With object snap tracking the cursor can track along alignment paths based on other object snap points when specifying points in a command To use object snap tracking you must turn on one or more object snaps 2 Under Object Snap Modes you turn on running object snaps e Endpoint Snaps to the closest endpoint of an arc elliptical arc line multiline polyline segment spline region or ray or to the closest corne
400. tup steps described above b Attach the radio antenna to the radio port of your base unit c Select Equipment Setup from the Survey menu d Select a Correction Type We recommend NCT RTK e Click the Configure Base button f When prompted to enter a position enter the exact position of the base unit Note that the accuracy of your rover s calculation depends on this position being completely accurate g Enter a Station ID of 0 The Station ID is only used in RTCM mode h Verify that Station Type now reads Base i Base station setup is complete Click Save Settings and Exit 2 Switch the device you re plugged in to After configuring the base unplug your serial cable from your base s port A and plug it into your rover s port A Note Whenever you switch the device you re plugged into be sure to close the GPS Setup window first Chapter 7 Survey Commands 124 3 Rover Setup a Perform the preliminary and single unit setup steps described above b Attach the radio antenna to the radio port of your rover unit c Select Equipment Setup from the Survey menu d Select a Correction Type We recommend NCT RTK Note that this selection must match the selection made during base setup e Click the Configure Rover button f Verify that Station Type now reads Rover g Rover setup is complete Steps that follow are optional h You can verify that the rover is receiving correction by clicking the Monitor Incoming Correctio
401. tup xi r Scale amp Size Settings Point Prompt Label Settings English 1in ft JV Descriptions C Metric 1m m JV Elevations Horizontal Scale 100 0 IV Locate on Real Z Axis Vertical Scale Instrument Rod Height Symbol Size 0 080 J Prompt For Symbol Names Text Size 0 080 JV Label Zero Elevations Line Type Scaler 0 500 Attribute Layout ID 1 Symbol Name SPTO Angle Mode Select Symbol 7 Beating Azimuth C Gons Other Vertical Angle Prompting None m Point Number Settings CD Degrees Level Y Point Numbers C 90 Degrees Level Elevation Difference J Automatic Point Numbering Cancel A Under Scale and Size Settings you can determine scale and size of drawing entities English lin ft This option tells the program which unit mode to use This affects the prompting and reports When you are working on a drawing in English units one unit equals one foot e Metric 1m m This option sets the metric scale to meters only Horizontal Scale This option allows you to set the horizontal scale of the drawing For example if the horizontal scale is set to 50 then 1 50 in your drawing e Vertical Scale This option allows you to set the vertical scale of the drawing e Symbol Size This value is a scaler that represents the size on the plot The Drawing Units are determined by multiplying the scaler by the horizontal scale In English mode the scaler represe
402. used and enter any necessary data The receiver is now configured and ready for use Other Buttons In the Setup Menu 1 Power Cycle Receiver This will shut the receiver down and then power it up again Used to clear the receiver s memory 2 Power off Receiver Shuts the receiver down Note that if this button is pressed any settings changes made while in this menu will not be saved to the receiver 3 Send command to receiver this will allow for sending messages to the receiver The user must enter the message by hand This feature is only intended for use in conjunction with the technical support provided with AgStar Troubleshooting the Leica 500 Series in AgStar Several possible errors can occur in the course of using a 500 Series Leica receiver with AgStar AgStar will use all its standard error messages to report usual types of error messages such as an inabilty to communicate with Chapter 7 Survey Commands 121 the satellites that are being tracked In addition the Leica 500 Series of receivers will have their own set of error messages unique to themselves This type of error message is reported if there is an error during the transmission of various configuration messages to the receiver to set up the base station settings Such messages will say Set Port Message Rejected or Set Base Antenna Message Rejected or Set Antenna Height Message Rejected or Set RTK Message Rejected Each indicates which particular f
403. used in position calculation receiver default is 15 6 Select the Radio Settings button This will open another window with several selectable settings Select the Port number the radio is attached to on the front of the receiver the baud rate of the radio number of radio stop bits and radio parity These last three settings should be listed in the documentation for the radio being used Also select the desired format to use for sending and receiving messages from the bottomost option Exit this menu 7 If the GPS receiver is being configured as a base station select the Configure Base Station button from the Equipment Setup menu and proceed with step 8 Otherwise the receiver is ready for use 8 There will now be a menu with a few buttons to select a method of determining the base station s present location The options are gt Read From GPS R ead one or more position readings from the GPS and use this position or the average of several poss itions for the base station corrections gt Enter Lat Lon this option will bring up a menu to enter the exact Latitude Longitude and elevation of the receiver s position by hand gt Enter State Plane Coord This option will bring up a menu to enter the coordinates of the position of the base station according to the state plane coordinate system gt Read from File this option will read a coordinate set from a file already saved to the computer Select whichever method will be
404. uts if multiple tabs are selected If the Model tab is current when you choose Plot the Layout Name shows Model e Save Changes to Layout This option saves the changes you make in the Plot dialog box in the layout This option is unavailable if multiple layouts are selected e Page Setup Name This option displays a list of any named and saved page setups You can choose to base the current page setup on a named page setup or you can add a new named page setup by choosing Add e Add This option displays the User Defined Page Setups dialog box You can create delete or rename named page setups 2 Under the Plot Device Tab you can specify the plotter to use a plot style table the layout or layouts to plot and information about plotting to a file Chapter 2 File Commands 22 Plot 21x Layout name Page setup name Model IV Save changes to layout lt Select page setup to apply gt y Add Plot Device Plot Settings m Plotter configuration i Name E DWF eView optimized for viewing pc3 y Properties f Plotter DWF eView optimized for viewing DWF ePlot by Autodesk Hints Where File Description m Plot style table pen assignments Plot stamp Name STAR ctb y Edit New Ir On Settings m What to plot Plot to file Current tab IV Plot to file Selected tabs File name example Model dwt All layout tabs odos 4 Location jc Program Files C
405. v Earth Radius In order to calculate the state plane scale factors the traverse coordinates must be in state plane coordinates When this option is selected the program will prompt for the state plane zone to use Select either Zone 27 or 83 e Scale Factor This factor is multiplied by the slope distance for the traverse and sideshot records e Correct for Earth Curvature This adjusts the calculated points for the effect of the Earth s curvature Typically this adjustment is small and adjusts the elevation more than the horizontal e Reference Closing Point OPTIONAL This is an optional field for entering the coordinates to compare the ending traverse point with This reference closing point is used to calculate the closure If you do not specify this option the command will use the starting coordinate as the reference closing point After you select OK for the first dialog box the Traverse Points dialog box appears Enter the starting and ending point numbers Traverse Points xi Starting Point Number Ending Point Number Cancel Help i The command reads the raw file to set the defaults for these point numbers which are used to calculate the closure The difference between the ending point and the reference closing point is the closure error The sum of the traverse distances from the starting to the ending point is used as the total distance traversed After you pick OK for the second dialog box the progr
406. w data RWS5 file to other formats The following file formats are supported e Caice DMP e Fieldbook FBK e Sokkia SDR e Save Save As These commands save the raw data as a RWS file e Exit This command exits the raw file editor Edit Under the Edit menu of the Raw Editor are basic cut copy and paste commands for editing To edit the raw data simply highlight the cell and type in the new value To change the type of record pick on the down arrow in the first column and choose a new data type from the list To delete a row highlight any cell in the row and press the Delete key or choose Delete Row from the Edit menu Data can be hidden from view with the Hide and Show commands Search Under the Search menu of the Raw Editor are basic Find and Replace commands You enter in a string you want to find and optionally what you want to replace it with Display The Display menu of the Raw Editor contains settings to control how the information is displayed e Vertical Vertical can be shown as Vertical Angle Zenith Angle Elevation Difference or None You pick the item off the menu list and a check mark is placed in front of the selection e Distance There are two choices for showing distance in the Raw Editor slope and horizontal You pick the item off the menu list and a check mark is placed in front of the selection e Graphics There are three toggles in this menu e On Off Toggle whether the graphics
407. write a polyline file that can be used with Grid File Utilities for inclusion exclusion perimeters Specify Exclusion Warning Polylines When enabled this option applies to machine control for warning areas Specify WorkZone Polylines When enabled this option applies to machine control for working areas Reduce Polyline Vertices When enabled this option applies the Reduce Polyline Vertices to the polyline vertices before writing the file Offset Cutoff Indicate the allowable offset distance essentially the middle ordinate distance of a 3 point arc that would allow the middle vertex between two other vertex locations to be removed Include Z coordinate in polyline file When enabled this option controls whether the elevation s or Z value of the selected polyline vertices are written to the polyline file Decimals Indicate the desired amount of precision for the coordinate values that should be written to the file Select polylines lines and arcs to write FILter lt Select entities gt Pick the entities to process press Enter when complete Sample Polyline File POLYLINE 51 0 0 0 CONT V STRM PIPE 5375168 9320 3932304 7050 0 0000 5375193 3310 3932211 6150 0 0000 POLYLINE 150 0 0 0 CONT V BRKL 5375026 8800 3932090 0480 962 8334 5375062 3960 3932105 7540 961 5399 5375075 5640 3932115 7940 961 1595 5375079 0150 3932128 0920 961 1532 5375081 6860 3932159 7840 961 6147 5375086 6920 3932195 6480 962 6206 etc
408. x Age you can prevent the Navcom Unit from using any RTK corrections older than a specified number of seconds Range 0 1275 Multiple of 5 By changing the Base Station ID on a base you can provide your base with a unique identifying number so that rovers can specify which base they want to use for corrections By changing this settingson a rover you can specify which base unit you want to use If 0 is specified the rover will use any base station it can find The base station ID only applies when using the RTCM correction format Range 1 1023 You can choose between 4 different Correction Types NCT Navcom Proprietary CMR Trimble s format RTCM RTK Messages 18 22 or RTCM DGPS Message 1 and 9 When configured to BASE changing the correction type changes the type being sent When configured to ROVER changing the correction type changes the type the unit is listening for A ROVER will ignore all incoming correction messages except those of the type specified Configure Ports Submenu The Control Port should be configured to Port A or Port B depending on which of the Navcom units ports you are plugged into Note that the Control Port refers to the number of the port on the Navcom unit NOT the number of the COM port on your computer If the Control Port is configured improperly you will not be able to communicate with your Navcom unit The RTK Data Port refers to the device port out of which RTK corrections will be sent This v
409. xample AZI25 DIST4 2 would draw the point offset 4 2 at an azimuth of 25 degrees JOG The JOG special code allows for additional points to be inserted into the line work at perpendicular or straight offsets Only offsets should follow the JOG code Positive numbers indicate a jog to the right and negative numbers indicate a jog to the left Alternatively R and L can be used where is the distance to either the right or the left Finally S can be used to make an offset straight ahead by using a positive or behind by using a negative For example BLDG JOG S10 1 R5 L12 2 L5 L12 2 or equivalently BLDG JOG 10 1 5 12 2 5 12 2 advances 10 1 units and then draws a closed rectangle on the right hand side of an existing line The offsets are always done in the X Y plane If the current line is vertical an offset to the right is along the positive X axis JPN The JPN Join to Point Name special code joins to the point named immediately after the code For example JPN205 causes a line to be drawn from the current point to the point 205 JPN is designed to work for adding a segment at the start of linework So the point with the JPN code should be at first segment of the linework NEAR This special code sets the current polyline to Nearest Found connection order This applies to codes that have the Connection Order set to Sequential and you want to override this setting to Nearest Found for the current polyline RECT T
410. xist in the drawing then this point is drawn using the settings from the dialog The number of points modified erased and drawn is reported at the end of the command Chapter 9 Tools Commands 214 Update CRD File from Drawing This function allows you to select all or some of the points in the drawing and add or update them to the CRD file The points can be filtered with AutoCAD s Select Objects selection mechanism and or wild card matching of the point descriptions The Update Point Descriptions option determines whether the point descriptions from the drawing will be stored to the CRD file Use this command to update the file after a global edit such as Move Rotate Renumber Points Change Elevations Erase etc This routine directly reads Leica Wildsoft Softdesk Geodimeter InRoads Land Development Desktop and Eagle Point point blocks Update Drawing from CRD File X Range Settings Highest Point Number gt 2079 Range of Points to Update ALL IV Erase points from drawing that are not in CRD file m Draw Points Options IV Draw points from CRD file that are not in drawing Symbol Name SPT55 m Point Label Settings IV Point Numbers IV Descriptions IV Elevations Y Locate on Real Z Axis Layer for Points PNTS OK Compare Points This function compares the coordinates in the CRD file with either the coordinates for the matching point numbers in the drawing file with matching point
411. xternal power source On or Off Battery A Indicates whether a well charged battery is plugged into Battery Port A On Good or Off Low Battery B Indicates whether a well charged battery is plugged into Battery Port B On Good or Off Low Status Indicates whether the unit is sending out corrections BASE or ROVER If more than two units are present you can access this information for the additional units by selecting the desired unit s radio ID from the Remote Radio ID dropdown menu Configure RTCM Submenu Note To access this menu first configure the unit as a BASE and set the Correction Type to either RTCM RTK or RTCM DGPS Choose message 18 19 to make your RTCM RTK base broadcast RTCM message types 18 19 Choose message 20 21 to make your RTCM RTK base broadcast RTCM message types 20 21 Chapter 7 Survey Commands 126 Choose message 1 to make your RICM DGPS base broadcast RTCM message type 1 Choose message 9 to make your RICM DGPS base broadcast RTCM message type 9 Edit Base Position Submenu Note To access this menu first configure the unit as a BASE If your BASE already has a GPS position set it will be shown here If you don t see it trying pressing Retrieve To edit this value change the displayed number and press the Lock button Click Survey to read a new GPS position from the Navcom unit Click Empty to clear the GPS position from the unit Reset Unit Submenu Click Soft Reset to send a reset command to
412. y Chapter 9 Tools Commands 233 pressing the down arrow key from the last line in the spreadsheet or by choosing one of the add records from the Add menu Record Types TR Traverse The traverse record contains the occupied point number foresight point number angle mode horizontal angle distance vertical angle and description When processed this record will calculate and store the coordinates for the foresight point Traversing also moves the setup by making the traverse foresight point the next occupied point and the traverse occupied point becomes the next backsight point The different angle modes are NE for northeast bearing SE for southeast SW for southwest NW for northwest AZ for azimuth AL for angle left AR for angle right DL for deflection angle left and DR for deflection angle right To set the angle code pick on the Code down arrow and choose from the list The horizontal and vertical angles should be entered as dd mmss For example 45 2305 is 45 degrees 23 minutes and 5 seconds The vertical angle can be shown as vertical angle 0 degrees level zenith angle 90 degrees level or elevation difference The vertical angle mode is set in the Display menu The distance mode is also set in the Display menu as either slope or horizontal distance The description field is used as the foresight point description SS SideShot The sideshot record is the same as the traverse record except that sideshot does not move the s
413. y Window Help lej x 054 89 9 1 eper ki vyraaagas Monitor F3 SkyPlot F4 Menu F11 al al a Read Average GPS E xj Number of readings 30 North Avg 5041 908 SD 7 972 North Min 5028 553 Max 5055 264 East Avg 5017 719 SD 3 371 East Min 5012 072 Max 5023 365 Elev Avg 1000 068 SD 0 026 Elev Min 1000 018 Max 1000 133 Point Number E Rod Height 0 000 N E Z l No Elev Desc MB Note Options F6 Code F7 Number of readings 30 I Join Undo store F2 _ Read amp Store F5 Exit Start Continuous F12 Command store_pt2 rx 3 When the readings complete click Ok on the Read Average GPS window Press the Store button You will be prompted for the desired coordinates of your master benchmark Enter Local Coordinates E xi Elevation 4 Enter the coordinates click Ok and then Exit You may also want to mark the benchmark with a flag in case you return to the field later and need to realign to a benchmark see Align to Benchmark Pull Down Menu Location Survey Prerequisite A drawing name and fixed RTK Keyboard Command store_pt2 Monitor GPS Position This command reports the current GPS Lat Lon local coordinates and GPS solution status The latitude and lon gitude are reported in the DD MMSSSSSS format In this example the latitude is 42 degrees 21 minutes 46 4414 seconds north The longitude is 71 degrees 8 minutes and 31 5699 se
414. y other objects Prompts 1 Select cutting edges Select objects pick entity 2 Select object to trim or shift select to extend or Project Edge Undo select entity to be trimmed e Project You can project the object to be trimmed in order to trim objects that do not intersect Edge You can project the trimming edge in order to trim objects that do not intersect e Undo This option allows you to undo the above projections Menu Location Edit Prerequisite None Keyboard Command TRIM TR Scale This command allows you to enlarge or reduce selected objects equally in the X Y and Z directions Prompts 1 Select objects pick entities 2 Specify base point pick point on screen as reference Chapter 3 Edit Commands 38 3 Specify scale factor or Reference scale to desired size Menu Location Edit Prerequisite None Keyboard Command SC Extend To Edge This command allows you to extend an object to meet another object Prompts 1 Select boundary edges Select objects pick entity 2 Select object to extend or shift select to trim or Project Edge Undo pick entity You have the option of trimming or projecting objects and edges Menu Location Edit Extend gt Prerequisite None Keyboard Command EXTEND Extend by Distance This command extends a line or polyline or creates a new line or polyline from an existing one using a specified distance The new segment of the line or polyline is drawn fr
415. zero elevations lt Yes gt No Press Enter If you answer No then entities with elevation O will be changed 2 A bsolute or D ifferential Change lt A gt A 3 Elevation to change to lt 0 0 gt 125 4 Select Entities for elevation change Select objects pick entities from screen 5 Select objects Press Enter Menu Location Edit Change gt Prerequisite an entity with elevation Keyboard Command CHGELEV Rotate This command changes the display angle of objects by rotating them This command has a sub menu consisting of two items as described below By Bearing Function This command allows the user to rotate the coordinate database of all or part of the drawing To translate the coordinate database use the MOVE command Prompts Select entities to rotate Select objects W First corner pick point Other corner pick point Select objects Enter Base pivot point Number lt Pick point gt N By responding with N the program switches to point number input Pick point lt point number gt 2 Chapter 3 Edit Commands 42 The program then reads the coordinate value from the current CooRDinate file Reference Bearing point Pick point lt point number gt P By responding with P the program then switches back to screen picking mode Number lt Pick point gt pick point Reference Bearing N 44d31 1 E The program then displays the reference bearing defined by the two points selected Azimuth l

Carlson Agstar 2013

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents